1 #LyX 2.2 created this file. For more info see http://www.lyx.org/
5 \origin /systemlyxdir/doc/
8 % DO NOT ALTER THIS PREAMBLE!!!
10 % This preamble is designed to ensure that the User's Guide prints
11 % out as advertised. If you mess with this preamble,
12 % parts of the User's Guide may not print out as expected. If you
13 % have problems LaTeXing this file, please contact
14 % the documentation team
15 % email: lyx-docs@lists.lyx.org
17 \usepackage{ifpdf} % part of the hyperref bundle
18 \ifpdf % if pdflatex is used
20 % set fonts for nicer pdf view
21 \IfFileExists{lmodern.sty}{\usepackage{lmodern}}{}
23 \fi % end if pdflatex is used
25 % for correct jump positions whe clicking on a link to a float
26 \usepackage[figure]{hypcap}
28 % the pages of the TOC is numbered roman
29 % and a pdf-bookmark for the TOC is added
30 \let\myTOC\tableofcontents
31 \renewcommand\tableofcontents{%
33 \pdfbookmark[1]{\contentsname}{}
37 % macro for italic page numbers in the index
38 \newcommand{\IndexDef}[1]{\textit{#1}}
40 % for customized page headers/footers
41 % only needed because they are only used in one section of the document
43 % change header rule width
44 \renewcommand{\headrulewidth}{2pt}
46 % used to have extra space in table cells
47 \@ifundefined{extrarowheight}
48 {\usepackage{array}}{}
49 \setlength{\extrarowheight}{2pt}
51 % workaround for a makeindex bug,
52 % see sec. "Index Entry Order"
53 % only uncomment this when you are using makindex
55 %\renewcommand*{\index}[1]{\OrgIndex{#1}}
57 \options refpage,intoc,bibliography=totoc,index=totoc,BCOR7.5mm,captions=tableheading
58 \use_default_options false
63 \maintain_unincluded_children false
65 \language_package default
70 \font_typewriter default
72 \font_default_family default
73 \use_non_tex_fonts false
79 \default_output_format default
81 \bibtex_command bibtex
82 \index_command default
86 \pdf_title "The LyX User's Guide"
87 \pdf_author "LyX Team"
91 \pdf_bookmarksnumbered true
92 \pdf_bookmarksopen false
93 \pdf_bookmarksopenlevel 1
98 \pdf_pdfusetitle false
99 \pdf_quoted_options "linkcolor=black, citecolor=black, urlcolor=blue, filecolor=blue, pdfpagelayout=OneColumn, pdfnewwindow=true, pdfstartview=XYZ, plainpages=false"
102 \use_package amsmath 1
103 \use_package amssymb 1
104 \use_package cancel 0
106 \use_package mathdots 1
107 \use_package mathtools 0
108 \use_package mhchem 1
109 \use_package stackrel 0
110 \use_package stmaryrd 0
111 \use_package undertilde 0
113 \cite_engine_type default
117 \paperorientation portrait
121 \notefontcolor #0000ff
138 \paragraph_separation indent
139 \paragraph_indentation default
140 \quotes_language english
143 \paperpagestyle default
144 \tracking_changes true
145 \output_changes false
149 \author -1966299584 "ef"
150 \author -712698321 "Jürgen Spitzmüller"
161 by the \SpecialChar LyX
166 \begin_layout Plain Layout
168 If you have comments on or error corrections to this documentation, please
169 send them to the \SpecialChar LyX
170 Documentation mailing list:
171 \begin_inset CommandInset href
173 target "lyx-docs@lists.lyx.org"
184 \begin_inset Newline newline
188 \begin_inset Newline newline
192 \begin_inset Note Note
195 \begin_layout Plain Layout
196 The latest PDF-version of this document can be found here:
197 \begin_inset Newline newline
202 http://wiki.lyx.org/\SpecialChar LyX
203 /DocumentationDevelopment#UserGuide
211 \begin_layout Standard
212 \begin_inset CommandInset toc
213 LatexCommand tableofcontents
220 \begin_layout Chapter
224 \begin_layout Section
225 What is \SpecialChar LyX
229 \begin_layout Standard
231 is a document preparation system.
232 It is a tool for producing beautiful manu\SpecialChar softhyphen
233 scripts, publishable books, business
234 letters and proposals, and even poetry.
235 It is unlike most other
236 \begin_inset Quotes eld
240 \begin_inset Quotes erd
243 in the sense that it uses the paradigm of a markup language as its core
245 That means that when you type a section header, you mark it as a
246 \begin_inset Quotes eld
250 \begin_inset Quotes erd
254 \begin_inset Quotes eld
258 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
261 pt type, left justified, 5
262 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
266 \begin_inset Quotes erd
271 takes care of the typesetting for you; so you deal only with concepts,
275 \begin_layout Standard
276 This philosophy is explained in greater detail in the
281 If you haven't read it yet, you need to.
285 \begin_layout Standard
290 manual describes several things in addition to \SpecialChar LyX
291 's philosophy: most importantly,
292 the format of all of the manuals.
293 If you don't read it, you will have a bear of a time navigating this manual.
294 You might also be better served looking in one of the other manuals instead
300 manual describes that, too.
303 \begin_layout Section
308 \begin_layout Standard
309 Like most applications, \SpecialChar LyX
310 has the familiar menu bar across the top of its
312 Below it is a toolbar with a pulldown box and various buttons.
313 There is, of course, a vertical scrollbar and a main work area for editing
317 \begin_layout Standard
318 Note that there is no horizontal scrollbar.
319 This is not a bug or an oversight, but intentional.
320 When you read a book, you expect the end of a line to wrap around to the
322 Text overflows onto new pages in a vertical fashion, hence the need for
323 only a vertical scrollbar.
324 There are three cases where you might want a horizontal scrollbar.
325 The first case is large images.
326 To avoid them being displayed larger than your screen, left click on the
327 image and use the option
338 The second and third cases are tables and equations which are wider than
341 You can use the arrow keys to scroll horizontally through the table, but
342 this doesn't work for equations yet.
345 \begin_layout Standard
346 For a brief description of all \SpecialChar LyX
347 menus and toolbar buttons, have a look at
353 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
355 reference "chap:The-User-Interface"
362 \begin_layout Section
366 \begin_layout Standard
367 The help system consists of the \SpecialChar LyX
369 You can read all of the manuals from inside \SpecialChar LyX
371 Just select the manual you want to read from the
378 \begin_layout Section
379 Basic \SpecialChar LyX
381 \begin_inset CommandInset label
383 name "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
390 \begin_layout Standard
391 Almost all features of \SpecialChar LyX
392 can be configured via the menu
394 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
398 \begin_inset Index idx
401 \begin_layout Plain Layout
408 is able to inspect your system to see what programs, \SpecialChar LaTeX
410 and \SpecialChar LaTeX
411 packages are available.
412 It uses this knowledge to give reasonable defaults for the preferences
414 Although this configuration has already been done when \SpecialChar LyX
416 your system, you might have some items that you installed locally, e.
417 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
421 \begin_inset space \space{}
424 new \SpecialChar LaTeX
425 classes, and which are not seen by \SpecialChar LyX
427 To force \SpecialChar LyX
428 to re-inspect your system, you should use
430 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
434 \begin_inset Index idx
437 \begin_layout Plain Layout
438 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
444 You should then restart \SpecialChar LyX
445 to ensure that the changes are taken into account.
448 \begin_layout Section
451 \begin_inset CommandInset label
453 name "sec:LaTeX-Setup"
460 \begin_layout Standard
461 You can edit documents in \SpecialChar LyX
462 without having \SpecialChar LaTeX
463 installed, but you will not be
464 able to create PDFs or print your documents unless you do have it installed.
465 However, some \SpecialChar LyX
466 documents use DocBook as the “backend” that can produce
467 PDFs and the like, and every \SpecialChar LyX
468 document can always be output as plain text
472 \begin_layout Standard
473 Some document classes may depend upon specific \SpecialChar LaTeX
474 or DocBook classes or packages.
475 Such document classes can be used even if you do not have the required
476 files installed, but you will not be able to produce certain kinds of output.
479 \begin_layout Standard
480 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
481 packages that \SpecialChar LyX
482 has found on your system are listed in a file you can
485 Help\SpecialChar menuseparator
490 \begin_layout Plain Layout
504 If you are missing packages you need, then you must install them and then
505 reconfigure \SpecialChar LyX
508 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
512 \begin_inset Note Note
515 \begin_layout Plain Layout
516 The two braces in the \SpecialChar TeX
517 Code box prevent that the term
518 \begin_inset Quotes eld
523 \begin_inset Quotes erd
526 from being printed with sub- and superscript letters.
527 More about \SpecialChar TeX
528 Code is described in section
533 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
535 reference "sec:TeX-Code"
539 , the printout of proper names like \SpecialChar LaTeX
540 is explained in section
545 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
547 reference "subsec:LyX's-Proper-Names"
557 \begin_inset Index idx
560 \begin_layout Plain Layout
561 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
567 See section 5.1 of the
571 manual for more information on installing additional \SpecialChar LaTeX
575 \begin_layout Chapter
576 How to work with \SpecialChar LyX
580 \begin_layout Section
581 Basic File Operations
582 \begin_inset Index idx
585 \begin_layout Plain Layout
594 \begin_layout Standard
599 menu and in the standard toolbar are basic operations for any word processor
600 in addition to some more advanced operations:
603 \begin_layout Itemize
625 \begin_layout Itemize
641 arg "buffer-new-template"
647 \begin_layout Itemize
669 \begin_layout Itemize
679 \begin_layout Itemize
693 \begin_layout Itemize
715 \begin_layout Itemize
727 arg "buffer-write-as"
733 \begin_layout Itemize
747 \begin_layout Itemize
755 arg "dialog-show print"
763 arg "dialog-show print"
769 \begin_layout Itemize
783 \begin_layout Standard
784 They all do pretty much the same thing as in other word processors, with
785 a few minor differences.
788 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
799 command lists the available templates.
800 Selecting a template will automatically set certain layout features for
801 the document, features you would otherwise need to change manually.
802 They can be of use for certain classes, especially those for writing letters
804 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
808 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
810 reference "sec:Document-Classes"
817 \begin_layout Standard
818 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
821 \begin_layout Plain Layout
827 \begin_inset Quotes eld
831 \begin_inset Quotes erd
835 \begin_inset Quotes eld
839 \begin_inset Quotes erd
843 \begin_inset Quotes eld
847 \begin_inset Quotes erd
850 Unless you tell \SpecialChar LyX
851 to open a file or create a new one, that big, blank space
852 is just that — a big, blank space.
860 \begin_layout Standard
881 are useful if more people work on the same document at the same time.
885 \begin_layout Plain Layout
886 If you plan to do this, you should check out the Version Control feature
889 Read Additional Features\SpecialChar endofsentence
907 will reload the document from disk.
908 You can of course also use it if you regret that you changed a document
909 and want to restore it to the last save.
918 you can register the changes you made to a document so that others can identify
919 them as your changes.
922 \begin_layout Section
923 Basic Editing Features
924 \begin_inset Index idx
927 \begin_layout Plain Layout
934 \begin_inset CommandInset label
936 name "sec:Basic-Editing-Features"
943 \begin_layout Standard
944 Like most modern word processors, \SpecialChar LyX
945 can perform cut and paste operations
946 on blocks of text, can move by character, word, or page of text, and can
947 delete whole words as well as individual characters.
948 The next four sections cover the basic \SpecialChar LyX
949 editing features and how to access
951 We will start with cut and paste.
954 \begin_layout Standard
955 As you might expect, the
959 menu and the standard toolbar has the cut and paste commands, along with
960 various other editing features.
961 Some of these are special and covered in later sections.
965 \begin_layout Itemize
971 \begin_inset Index idx
974 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1003 \begin_layout Itemize
1009 \begin_inset Index idx
1012 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1041 \begin_layout Itemize
1047 \begin_inset Index idx
1050 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1075 \begin_layout Itemize
1079 \begin_inset space ~
1085 \begin_layout Itemize
1089 \begin_inset space ~
1095 \begin_layout Itemize
1099 \begin_inset space ~
1103 \begin_inset space ~
1109 \begin_inset Index idx
1112 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1121 \begin_inset Index idx
1124 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1139 arg "dialog-show findreplaceadv"
1149 arg "dialog-show findreplace"
1155 \begin_layout Standard
1156 The first three are self-explanatory.
1157 You can also copy text between \SpecialChar LyX
1158 and other programs by
1179 put text in two versions into the clipboard (formatted and unformatted),
1180 so that other programs can choose the most suitable form.
1185 supports formatted and unformatted text as well, and additionally graphics.
1186 It tries to interpret the clipboard contents in an intelligent way.
1187 For example if the clipboard contains text in the format of comma separated
1188 values (CSV) and the cursor is inside a table, the text will be pasted
1189 into individual cells.
1193 \begin_inset space ~
1198 shows you a list with the last strings you have pasted.
1199 You can insert one at the current cursor position by clicking on a list
1203 \begin_layout Standard
1207 \begin_inset space ~
1212 contains optional items for specific formats, depending on the clipboard
1214 These include HTML, \SpecialChar LaTeX
1216 \begin_inset space ~
1223 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1229 , PDF, PNG, JPEG and EMF.
1230 These menu items are useful if the clipboard contains the same contents
1231 in different formats, and you want to select one format explicitly.
1233 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1237 \begin_inset space \space{}
1240 some programs put an image into the clipboard as graphics and as a short
1241 text which is often meaningless.) The menu item
1244 \begin_inset space ~
1247 Special\SpecialChar menuseparator
1249 \begin_inset space ~
1253 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1257 \begin_inset space ~
1266 , with the only difference that it acts on text only.
1267 It will insert the text in the clipboard so that the whole text is inserted
1269 A new paragraph is only started when there is a blank line in the text.
1273 \begin_inset space ~
1278 the text is inserted as paragraphs where the line breaks of the text will
1279 start a new paragraph.
1280 This is for example useful to copy contents of tables from webpages to
1281 a table in \SpecialChar LyX
1286 \begin_inset space ~
1289 Special\SpecialChar menuseparator
1291 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1295 \begin_inset space ~
1303 \begin_inset space ~
1306 Special\SpecialChar menuseparator
1309 paste from the primary selection.
1310 This is normally the currently selected text.
1313 \begin_layout Standard
1316 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1318 \begin_inset space ~
1322 \begin_inset space ~
1330 \begin_inset space ~
1334 \begin_inset space ~
1340 Once you have found a word or expression, \SpecialChar LyX
1346 button replaces the selected text with the contents of the
1349 \begin_inset space ~
1358 \begin_inset space ~
1363 button to skip the current word.
1367 \begin_inset space ~
1372 to replace all occurrences of the text in the document automatically.
1376 \begin_inset space ~
1381 option can be used if you want the search to consider the case of the search
1383 If the toggle is set, searching for
1384 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1392 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1395 will not match the word
1396 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1404 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1410 Match whole words only
1412 option can be used to force \SpecialChar LyX
1413 to only find complete words, e.
1414 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1418 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1426 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1430 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1438 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1443 offers also an advanced
1446 \begin_inset space ~
1450 \begin_inset space ~
1455 feature that is described in sec.
1456 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1460 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
1462 reference "sec:Advanced-Find-and"
1469 \begin_layout Standard
1470 Things like notes, floats, etc.
1471 \begin_inset space \space{}
1475 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1479 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1483 This means that the inset is deleted and its content is left as normal
1485 Dissolving an inset is done by setting the cursor to the beginning of an
1490 or by setting the cursor to the end and pressing
1497 \begin_layout Standard
1501 arg "inset-select-all"
1504 while the cursor is in normal text selects the whole document.
1505 When the cursor is inside an inset
1508 arg "inset-select-all"
1511 selects the content of the inset.
1515 arg "inset-select-all"
1518 consecutively will increase the selection to the whole inset and then to
1523 arg "command-sequence buffer-begin ; buffer-end-select"
1526 selects the whole document in every case and puts the cursor to the end
1530 \begin_layout Section
1532 \begin_inset Index idx
1535 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1542 \begin_inset Index idx
1545 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1552 \begin_inset CommandInset label
1554 name "sec:Undo-and-Redo"
1561 \begin_layout Standard
1562 If you make a mistake, you can easily recover from it.
1564 has a large-capacity undo/redo buffer.
1567 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1570 or the toolbar button
1576 to undo some mistake.
1577 If you accidentally undo too much, use
1579 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1582 or the toolbar button
1589 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1593 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1596 The undo mechanism is currently limited to 100
1597 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1600 steps to minimize memory overhead.
1603 \begin_layout Standard
1604 Note that if you revert back all changes to arrive at the document as it
1606 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1610 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1613 status of the document is unfortunately not reset.
1614 This is a consequence of the 100
1615 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1618 step undo limit mentioned above.
1621 \begin_layout Standard
1630 work on almost everything in \SpecialChar LyX
1632 But they will not undo or redo text character by character, but by blocks
1636 \begin_layout Section
1638 \begin_inset Index idx
1641 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1650 \begin_layout Standard
1651 These are the most basic mouse operations.
1654 \begin_layout Enumerate
1656 \begin_inset Separator parbreak
1663 \begin_layout Itemize
1668 once anywhere in the edit window.
1669 The cursor moves to the text under the mouse.
1673 \begin_layout Enumerate
1675 \begin_inset Separator parbreak
1682 \begin_layout Itemize
1689 marks the text between the old and new mouse positions.
1692 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1695 to create a copy of the text in \SpecialChar LyX
1696 's buffer (and the clipboard).
1699 \begin_layout Itemize
1700 Re-position the cursor and then paste the text back into \SpecialChar LyX
1703 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1710 \begin_layout Enumerate
1711 Insets (Footnotes, Notes, Floats, etc.)
1712 \begin_inset Separator parbreak
1719 \begin_layout Standard
1720 Right-click on them to set their properties.
1721 Also check the appropriate section of this manual for more details.
1725 \begin_layout Section
1727 \begin_inset CommandInset label
1729 name "sec:Navigating"
1734 \begin_inset Index idx
1737 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1746 \begin_layout Standard
1748 offers you several ways to navigate in documents:
1751 \begin_layout Itemize
1756 menu lists all sections of the document as submenu entries that you can
1757 click to jump to the corresponding document part.
1760 \begin_layout Itemize
1761 The “Outline”, which is accessed either by the menu
1763 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
1765 \begin_inset space ~
1770 or by the toolbar button
1773 arg "dialog-toggle toc"
1779 \begin_layout Itemize
1780 You can set bookmarks in your document under
1782 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
1785 and use the same menu to return to them.
1786 Note that bookmarks are saved between sessions.
1789 \begin_layout Standard
1793 arg "bookmark-goto 0"
1798 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
1799 Bookmarks\SpecialChar menuseparator
1801 \begin_inset space ~
1806 ) jumps to the position in the document where you recently changed something.
1807 This is useful when you have a large document and have navigated or scrolled
1808 to another document part to look for something, and want to go back to
1809 your last editing position.
1812 \begin_layout Standard
1817 key the cursor will be vertically centered in \SpecialChar LyX
1821 \begin_layout Subsection
1823 \begin_inset CommandInset label
1825 name "subsec:The-Outliner"
1832 \begin_layout Standard
1833 In the pull-down box at the top of the outline window, you can choose between
1834 several different lists, including other TOC-like objects, such as lists
1835 of tables and figures, but also lists of footnotes, or labels and cross-referen
1837 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1841 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
1843 reference "sec:Cross-References"
1847 ), or notes, or citations (see sec.
1848 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1852 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
1854 reference "sec:Bibliography"
1859 Clicking on any of these will take you to the corresponding object in your
1863 \begin_layout Standard
1864 Right-clicking on elements in the Outline opens in many cases a context
1865 menu that will allow for direct modification of those elements.
1866 For example, with citations, the context menu allows you to open the citation
1867 dialog and to modify the citation.
1870 \begin_layout Standard
1871 The “Filter” field at the top allows you to restrict which entries appear
1873 For example, if you are displaying the list of Labels and References and
1874 wish to see only references to subsections, you can enter the text
1875 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1879 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1882 in the filter, and only entries containing that text will be displayed.
1885 \begin_layout Standard
1886 At the bottom of the outline are several buttons and the like that allow
1887 you further to control the display.
1892 option sorts the current list alphabetically.
1893 Otherwise, the elements appear in the order in which they occur in the
1899 option keeps it in the current view state.
1900 Keeping means that when you have, for example, the subsections of sections
1901 \begin_inset space ~
1904 2 and 4 displayed and click on section
1905 \begin_inset space ~
1908 3, the subsections of sections
1909 \begin_inset space ~
1912 2 and 4 will still be displayed.
1917 option they will be hidden to highlight the clicked section
1918 \begin_inset space ~
1922 Finally, the slider at the left can be used to open the Outline to a given
1924 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1928 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1932 It is best just to experiment with it to see how it works.
1935 \begin_layout Standard
1942 button refreshes the TOC (though this should not usually be necessary).
1943 Next to it are buttons that allow you to change the position of sections
1957 buttons move sections up and down in the document.
1958 So, for example, you can move section
1959 \begin_inset space ~
1963 \begin_inset space ~
1966 2.4 or after section
1967 \begin_inset space ~
1972 will then automatically renumber the sections to the new order.
1985 (or the corresponding key bindings
1993 ) you can change the level of sections.
1994 So you can for example make section
1995 \begin_inset space ~
1999 \begin_inset space ~
2003 \begin_inset space ~
2009 \begin_layout Section
2010 Input/Word Completion
2011 \begin_inset CommandInset label
2013 name "sec:Input-Completion"
2018 \begin_inset Index idx
2021 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2028 \begin_inset Index idx
2031 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2036 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2047 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2062 \begin_layout Standard
2064 provides completion of words by scanning all documents that are currently
2066 Every word that appears in these documents is added to a database that
2067 is used to propose completions.
2070 \begin_layout Standard
2071 Input completion can be activated in the \SpecialChar LyX
2074 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
2079 Editing\SpecialChar menuseparator
2086 \begin_inset space ~
2090 \begin_inset space ~
2095 the proposed completion is shown directly after the cursor.
2099 \begin_inset space ~
2104 the completions are always shown in a popup.
2105 The cursor completion indicator can be turned off by deselecting the option
2109 \begin_inset space ~
2115 With the general options you can define the delay time for the inline and
2116 popup completion, you can set the minimal number of characters a word must
2117 have that it will be taken into account for a completion and you can choose
2118 if long completions should be abbreviated.
2121 \begin_layout Standard
2123 displays a small triangle after the cursor as an indicator that there are
2124 completions available.
2129 key to accept a proposed completion.
2130 If several completions are possible, a popup is opened showing them.
2131 You can select a completion in the popup using the mouse or the arrow keys,
2132 and accept the chosen completion by pressing
2139 \begin_layout Standard
2140 The completion options for math in the preferences do the same as the correspond
2141 ing options for text.
2142 The special math option
2146 enables characters to be composed.
2147 If, for example, you want to insert the character
2148 \begin_inset Formula $\Rightarrow$
2151 , you can then input the characters
2152 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2160 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2163 to a formula to get it.
2164 So this is a quick alternative to the insertion of commands or the use
2165 of the math toolbar.
2166 A list with supported character combinations can be found in the file
2170 that is in \SpecialChar LyX
2171 's installation folder.
2172 Math autocorrection can at any time be turned on by pressing the exclamation
2181 \begin_layout Section
2183 \begin_inset Index idx
2186 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2193 \begin_inset Index idx
2196 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2201 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2212 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2225 \begin_inset Index idx
2228 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2233 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2244 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2259 \begin_layout Standard
2260 There are at least two different primary binding maps:
2274 , which can be changed in the \SpecialChar LyX
2277 Editing\SpecialChar menuseparator
2281 (You can list or change any key bindings as explained in sec.
2282 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
2286 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2288 reference "subsec:Editing-Shortcuts"
2295 \begin_layout Standard
2299 \begin_inset space ~
2307 \begin_inset space ~
2328 , do exactly what you expect them to do.
2332 \begin_layout Labeling
2333 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2337 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2338 LatexCommand nomenclature
2340 description "Tabulator key"
2346 There is no such thing as a tab stop in \SpecialChar LyX
2348 If you do not understand this, go read sections
2349 \begin_inset space ~
2353 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2355 reference "sec:Par-indent-intro"
2360 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2362 reference "sec:Paragraph-Environments"
2366 , especially section
2367 \begin_inset space ~
2371 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2373 reference "subsec:Lists"
2379 If you are still confused, look in the
2384 \begin_inset Newline newline
2392 key is only used to accept proposed input completions, to move the cursor
2393 in tables or math matrices or to change the nesting level in Itemize or
2397 \begin_layout Labeling
2398 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2402 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2403 LatexCommand nomenclature
2405 description "Escape key"
2412 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2416 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2419 It is used, generically, to cancel operations.
2420 Other parts of the manual will go into greater detail about this.
2423 \begin_layout Labeling
2424 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2430 \begin_inset space ~
2434 \begin_inset space ~
2441 These move the cursor, respectively, to the beginning and end of a line,
2442 unless you are using the Emacs bindings where they jump to the beginning
2446 \begin_layout Standard
2447 There are three modifier keys:
2450 \begin_layout Labeling
2451 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2457 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2465 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2469 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2470 LatexCommand nomenclature
2472 description "Control key"
2476 in the documentation files) This has a couple of different uses, depending
2477 on which keys it is used in combination with:
2478 \begin_inset Separator parbreak
2485 \begin_layout Itemize
2494 , it deletes an entire word instead of a single character.
2497 \begin_layout Itemize
2506 , it moves by words instead of characters.
2509 \begin_layout Itemize
2518 , it moves to the beginning and the end of the document, respectively.
2522 \begin_layout Labeling
2523 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2529 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2537 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2541 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2542 LatexCommand nomenclature
2544 description "Shift key"
2548 in the documentation files) Use this with any of the arrow keys to select
2549 the text between the old and new cursor positions.
2552 \begin_layout Labeling
2553 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2559 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2567 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2571 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2572 LatexCommand nomenclature
2574 description "Alt or Meta key"
2578 in the documentation files) This is the Alt key on many keyboards, unless
2579 your keyboard has a distinct Meta key.
2580 If you have both keys, you will need to try out which one actually performs
2586 \begin_inset Newline newline
2589 This key does many different things, but it also activates the
2591 menu accelerator keys
2594 If you use this in combination with any of the underlined letters in a
2595 menu or menu item, it selects that menu item.
2596 \begin_inset Separator parbreak
2603 \begin_layout Standard
2604 For example, the sequence
2605 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2611 \begin_inset space ~
2615 \begin_inset space ~
2621 \begin_inset space ~
2629 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2633 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2637 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2642 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2648 \begin_inset space ~
2654 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2664 \begin_layout Standard
2669 manual lists all other things bound to the
2677 \begin_layout Standard
2678 You will learn more and more key bindings and short-cut keys as you use
2680 , because most actions will prompt a small message in the status bar at
2681 the bottom of \SpecialChar LyX
2682 's main window which describes the name of the action you
2683 have just triggered, and any existing key bindings for that action.
2684 The \SpecialChar LyX
2685 menus also list the defined key bindings.
2686 The notation for the key bindings is very similar to the notation used
2687 in this documentation, so you should not have any problems understanding
2689 However, notice that Shift-modifiers are explicitly mentioned, so
2690 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2698 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2705 followed by a capital
2712 \begin_layout Chapter
2715 \begin_inset Index idx
2718 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2728 \begin_layout Section
2730 \begin_inset Index idx
2733 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2742 \begin_layout Subsection
2746 \begin_layout Standard
2747 Before you do anything else, before you ever start writing a document, you
2748 need to decide what type of document you want to edit.
2749 Different types of documents use different types of spacing, headings,
2750 numbering schemes, and so on.
2751 Additionally, different documents use different paragraph environments,
2752 and format the title of your document differently.
2755 \begin_layout Standard
2760 describes a group of properties common to a particular set of documents.
2761 By setting the document class, you automatically select these properties,
2762 making it easier to create the type of document you want.
2763 If you don't choose a document class, \SpecialChar LyX
2764 picks one for you by default.
2765 So it is up to you to change the class of your document.
2768 \begin_layout Subsection
2770 \begin_inset Index idx
2773 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2780 \begin_inset CommandInset label
2782 name "sec:Document-Classes"
2789 \begin_layout Standard
2790 You can select a class using the
2792 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
2793 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
2797 \begin_inset Index idx
2800 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2807 Select the class you want to use, and make any fine tunings of the options
2811 \begin_layout Subsubsection
2815 \begin_layout Standard
2816 There are four standard document classes in \SpecialChar LyX
2821 \begin_layout Description
2822 Article for basic articles
2825 \begin_layout Description
2826 Report for basic reports
2829 \begin_layout Description
2830 Book for writing a book
2833 \begin_layout Description
2834 Letter for US-style letters
2837 \begin_layout Standard
2838 There are also some non-standard classes, which \SpecialChar LyX
2839 only uses if you have installed
2840 the corresponding \SpecialChar LaTeX
2841 class files, though most \SpecialChar LaTeX
2842 distributions will include
2844 Here are some of the classes.
2845 The full list with detailed explanations can be found in chapter
2847 Special Document Classes
2856 \begin_layout Description
2857 A&A Journal articles in the style and format used in Astronomy & Astrophysics
2860 \begin_layout Description
2861 ACS For submissions to the journals published by the American Chemistry
2865 \begin_layout Description
2866 AGU For submissions to the journals published by the American Geophysical
2870 \begin_layout Description
2871 AMS Layouts for articles and books in the style and format used by the American
2872 Mathematical Society (AMS).
2873 There are three article layouts available.
2874 The standard one uses a typical numbering scheme for theorems etc., that
2875 prepends the section number to the number of the result.
2876 All result-type statements (propositions, corollaries, and so on) are sequenced
2877 together, but definitions, examples, and the like have their own sequence.
2879 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2882 sequential numbering
2883 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2886 scheme does not place the section number with each result, but numbers
2887 them throughout the article in a single sequence.
2888 Each type of result gets its own sequence.
2889 There is also a layout that dispenses with numbering of statements altogether.
2892 \begin_layout Description
2893 Beamer Layout for presentations
2896 \begin_layout Description
2897 Broadway Layout for writing plays.
2898 It is not an existing \SpecialChar LaTeX
2899 document class, but a new one that is distributed
2900 with \SpecialChar LyX
2904 \begin_layout Description
2905 Chess Layout to write about chess games
2908 \begin_layout Description
2910 \begin_inset space ~
2913 vitae classes to create curriculum vitae
2916 \begin_layout Description
2917 Elsarticle Layout for journals of the Elsevier publishing group
2920 \begin_layout Description
2921 Foils Used to make transparencies
2924 \begin_layout Description
2925 Hollywood Used to type spec scripts for the US film industry.
2926 It is not an existing \SpecialChar LaTeX
2927 document class, but a new one that is distributed
2928 with \SpecialChar LyX
2932 \begin_layout Description
2933 IEEEtran Layout for the journals published by the Institute of Electrical
2934 and Electronics Engineers (IEEE)
2937 \begin_layout Description
2938 IOP Layout for journals of the Institute of Physics publishing group
2941 \begin_layout Description
2942 Kluwer Layout for journals of the Kluwer publishing group
2945 \begin_layout Description
2946 KOMA-Script a replacement for the standard classes, offers many useful features
2947 like caption formatting, automatic print space calculation etc.
2948 (Is used by this document.)
2951 \begin_layout Description
2952 Memoir another replacement for the standard classes
2955 \begin_layout Description
2956 Powerdot Layout for presentations
2959 \begin_layout Description
2964 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2971 X is used to write articles for the publications of the American Physical
2972 Society (APS), American Institute of Physics (AIP), and Optical Society
2974 This class is not completely compatible with all \SpecialChar LyX
2978 \begin_layout Description
2979 Slides Used to make transparencies
2982 \begin_layout Description
2984 \begin_inset space ~
2987 Proceedings Layout for the journals published by The International Society
2988 for Optical Engineering (SPIE)
2991 \begin_layout Description
2992 Springer Layouts for journals of the Springer publishing group
2995 \begin_layout Standard
2996 We will not go into detail about how to use these different document classes
2998 You can find details about the non-standard classes in Chapter 6 of the
3004 Here, we will settle for a list of some of the common properties of all
3005 of the document classes.
3008 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3012 \begin_layout Standard
3013 You will probably find that many of the document classes listed under
3015 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
3016 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
3018 \begin_inset Index idx
3021 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3030 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3034 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3038 If you open a document that uses such a class, you will receive a warning
3039 saying that there are files that are required to produce output that are
3041 So it may seem that something is wrong.
3044 \begin_layout Standard
3047 includes many more document classes than you will ever need to use, and
3052 , are highly specialized.
3054 tries to support as many different types of documents as possible, and
3055 it includes almost one hundred different layout files, with a growing number.
3056 No \SpecialChar LaTeX
3057 distribution will install by default all files that might be needed
3058 by some document class.
3059 There are just too many of them.
3060 That is why some of the document classes are unavailable.
3063 \begin_layout Standard
3064 If there is a document class you would like to use that is marked as
3065 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3069 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3072 , you just need to install the appropriate package files.
3073 The easiest way to find out which files you need to install is to use that
3074 document class for a new file.
3076 will display a dialog that will list the missing files.
3078 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3081 Installing new \SpecialChar LaTeX
3083 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3090 manual for information on how to install them.
3091 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
3097 \begin_layout Standard
3098 Although \SpecialChar LyX
3099 provides support for many different sorts of documents, it does
3100 not include support for every document class people might want to use.
3101 For example, many universities provide \SpecialChar LaTeX
3102 class files to be used for dissertation
3103 s submitted to those universities.
3104 The \SpecialChar LyX
3105 team cannot write layout files to support every one of these.
3107 Fortunately, users can write their own layout files, and many users have
3111 Installing New Document Classes, Layouts, and Templates
3117 manual contains information on how to create layout files.
3120 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3122 \begin_inset CommandInset label
3124 name "subsec:Modules"
3129 \begin_inset Index idx
3132 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3141 \begin_layout Standard
3142 Modules load additional features that are not by default available in the
3143 chosen document class.
3144 For example you might want to write Braille (embossed printing) in a document.
3145 This is not available in any document class, so you have to load the correspond
3152 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
3156 \begin_inset Index idx
3159 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3166 Highlighting a module in the dialog will bring up a description of what
3170 \begin_layout Standard
3171 Some modules require \SpecialChar LaTeX
3172 packages or file format converters that are not always
3173 installed by default.
3175 will warn you if you do not have a required package or converter, and
3176 it will tell you what exactly you are missing.
3177 You can still use the module while editing your file, but you will not
3178 be able to export to PDF or print your document, since \SpecialChar LyX
3180 to compile the \SpecialChar LaTeX
3181 file without the missing prerequisites.
3182 If you want to be able to produce this kind of output, then you need to
3183 install the missing prerequisites and then reconfigure \SpecialChar LyX
3186 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
3190 \begin_inset Index idx
3193 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3194 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
3201 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3204 Installing new \SpecialChar LaTeX
3206 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3213 manual for more information on installing required packages.
3216 \begin_layout Standard
3217 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
3220 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3225 Some modules require other modules, and some pairs of modules are incompatible.
3227 will advise you about these things.
3235 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3237 \begin_inset CommandInset label
3239 name "subsec:Local-Layout"
3244 \begin_inset Index idx
3247 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3248 Document ! Local Layout
3256 \begin_layout Standard
3257 Modules are to \SpecialChar LyX
3258 much as packages are to \SpecialChar LaTeX
3259 : They are intended to be used in
3260 a variety of different documents.
3261 If you often find yourself needing the same sort of thing in different
3262 documents, you should consider writing a module for this purpose.
3263 Sometimes, however, a particular document has very special needs, but you
3264 need a specific inset or character style only that one time.
3265 You want something that is like a document's own \SpecialChar LaTeX
3267 What you want is \SpecialChar LyX
3269 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3273 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3285 manual for information on how to use it.
3288 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3292 \begin_layout Standard
3293 Each class has a default set of options.
3294 Here's a quick table describing them:
3297 \begin_layout Standard
3298 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
3304 \begin_layout Standard
3306 \begin_inset Tabular
3307 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="5" columns="5">
3308 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
3309 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3310 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3311 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3312 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3313 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3315 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3318 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3324 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3327 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3342 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3345 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3360 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3363 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3378 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3381 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3398 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3401 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3415 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3418 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3433 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3436 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3451 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3454 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3469 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3472 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3489 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3492 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3506 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3509 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3524 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3527 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3542 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3545 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3560 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3563 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3580 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3583 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3597 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3600 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3615 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3618 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3633 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3636 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3651 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3654 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3671 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3674 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3688 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3691 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3706 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3709 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3724 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3727 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3742 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3745 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3767 \begin_layout Standard
3768 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
3774 \begin_layout Standard
3775 You're probably also wondering what
3776 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3780 \begin_inset space ~
3784 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3788 There are several paragraph environments used to create section headings.
3789 Different document classes allow different types of section headings.
3794 heading; the rest do not and begin instead with the
3799 Some document classes, such as the ones for letters, don't use any section
3809 headings, there are also
3817 headings, and so on.
3818 We will describe these headings fully in section
3819 \begin_inset space ~
3823 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
3825 reference "subsec:Headings"
3832 \begin_layout Subsection
3834 \begin_inset CommandInset label
3836 name "subsec:Document-Layout"
3841 \begin_inset Index idx
3844 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3851 \begin_inset Index idx
3854 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3863 \begin_layout Standard
3864 The most important properties of document classes are set in the menu
3866 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
3873 \begin_inset space ~
3881 \begin_inset space ~
3886 , you can enter special options for your document class in a comma-separated
3888 This is only necessary if \SpecialChar LyX
3889 doesn't support special options you want to
3890 use for your document.
3891 To learn more about your favorite \SpecialChar LaTeX
3892 -class and its options, you have to read
3896 \begin_layout Standard
3900 \begin_inset space ~
3907 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
3913 \begin_inset space ~
3918 controls what sorts of headings and page numbers go on a page.
3919 You can choose between the following five options:
3922 \begin_layout Labeling
3923 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
3928 Use default page style of current class.
3931 \begin_layout Labeling
3932 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
3937 No page numbers or headings.
3940 \begin_layout Labeling
3941 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
3949 \begin_layout Labeling
3950 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
3955 Page numbers and either the current chapter or section title and number.
3956 Whether \SpecialChar LyX
3957 uses the current chapter or the current section depends on the
3958 maximum sectioning level of the class.
3961 \begin_layout Labeling
3962 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
3967 This allows you to define fully customizable headers and footers if you
3968 have the \SpecialChar LaTeX
3974 \begin_inset Index idx
3977 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3979 -packages ! fancyhdr
3985 How they are defined is explained in section
3986 \begin_inset space ~
3990 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
3992 reference "sec:Customized-Page-Headers"
3999 \begin_layout Standard
4000 The separation of paragraphs is described in section
4001 \begin_inset space ~
4005 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
4007 reference "subsec:Paragraph-Separation"
4014 \begin_layout Subsection
4015 Paper Size and Orientation
4016 \begin_inset Index idx
4019 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4020 Document ! Paper size
4026 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4028 name "subsec:Paper-Size,-Orientation"
4035 \begin_layout Standard
4036 You can find the following options in the menu
4039 \begin_inset space ~
4046 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4050 \begin_inset Index idx
4053 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4062 \begin_layout Labeling
4063 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4067 \begin_inset space ~
4072 What size paper to print on.
4074 \begin_inset Separator parbreak
4081 \begin_layout Itemize
4087 \begin_layout Itemize
4093 \begin_layout Itemize
4099 \begin_layout Itemize
4105 \begin_layout Itemize
4108 US letter, US legal, US executive
4111 \begin_layout Itemize
4117 \begin_layout Itemize
4124 \begin_layout Labeling
4125 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4130 To choose whether to output as
4141 \begin_layout Labeling
4142 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4146 \begin_inset space ~
4151 Adjusts the print space to print both sides of paper.
4152 That means that the print space for odd- and even-numbered pages is different.
4155 \begin_layout Subsection
4157 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4159 name "subsec:Margins"
4164 \begin_inset Index idx
4167 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4174 \begin_inset Index idx
4177 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4186 \begin_layout Standard
4187 Paper margins are set in the menu
4189 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4193 \begin_inset Index idx
4196 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4205 \begin_layout Standard
4206 If you use a KOMA-Script document class, you can use the default settings
4207 because KOMA-Script calculates the print space automatically by taking
4208 the paper format and the font size into account.
4211 \begin_layout Subsection
4215 \begin_layout Standard
4216 If you change a document class, \SpecialChar LyX
4222 That includes the paragraph environments.
4223 Some paragraph environments are standard, in so far as all of the document
4224 classes have them; but some classes have special paragraph environments.
4225 If this is the case, and you change the document class, \SpecialChar LyX
4227 paragraphs whose styles it no longer understands as
4228 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4232 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4236 The name of the style is retained, in case you should want to go back to
4238 But these paragraphs will be output with no special formatting, so you
4239 will either need to create a new style yourself or else convert these paragraph
4240 s manually to a style present in your new document class.
4243 \begin_layout Section
4244 Paragraph Indentation and Separation
4245 \begin_inset Index idx
4248 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4249 Paragraph ! Indentation
4257 \begin_layout Subsection
4259 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4261 name "sec:Par-indent-intro"
4268 \begin_layout Standard
4269 Before describing all of the various paragraph environments, we'd like to
4270 say a word or two about paragraph indentation.
4273 \begin_layout Standard
4274 Everyone seems to have their own convention for separating paragraphs.
4275 Most Americans indent the first line of a paragraph.
4276 Others don't indent but put extra space between the paragraphs.
4277 If you choose indentation for paragraphs the
4281 paragraph of a section, or after a figure, an equation, a table, a list,
4287 Only a paragraph following another paragraph gets indented.
4288 Note that the indentation behavior is different when you use another document
4289 language than English.
4291 takes care that the indentation follows the rules of the language used.
4294 \begin_layout Standard
4295 The space between paragraphs, like the line spacing, the space between headings
4296 and text — in fact, all the spacing for just about everything —is pre-coded
4297 into \SpecialChar LyX
4299 As we said, you don't worry about how much space to add between what.
4302 In fact, these pre-coded vertical spacings aren't a single number but a
4304 That way, \SpecialChar LyX
4305 can squish or stretch the space between lines to make sure figures
4306 fit on a page with text, so that sections don't start at the bottom of
4311 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4313 does this when \SpecialChar LyX
4314 goes to produce a printable file.
4319 However, pre-coded doesn't mean you can't change them.
4321 gives you the ability globally to change
4325 these pre-coded spacings.
4326 We will explain more later.
4329 \begin_layout Subsection
4330 Paragraph Separation
4331 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4333 name "subsec:Paragraph-Separation"
4338 \begin_inset Index idx
4341 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4342 Paragraph ! Separation
4350 \begin_layout Standard
4358 \begin_inset space ~
4366 \begin_inset space ~
4373 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4377 \begin_inset Index idx
4380 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4386 to indent paragraphs or to add extra space between paragraphs, respectively.
4389 \begin_layout Subsection
4393 \begin_layout Standard
4394 You can also change the separation method of a single paragraph.
4397 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
4399 \begin_inset space ~
4404 dialog and toggle the
4407 \begin_inset space ~
4412 option to change the state of the current paragraph (shortcut
4415 arg "paragraph-params \\indent-toggle"
4419 If paragraphs have no indentation but use extra space for separation, this
4420 button will be ignored (you can't indent a single paragraph by toggling
4424 \begin_layout Standard
4425 You should only need to change the indentation method for a single paragraph
4426 if you need to do some fine-tuning.
4429 \begin_layout Subsection
4431 \begin_inset Index idx
4434 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4435 Paragraph ! Line spacing
4443 \begin_layout Standard
4446 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4450 \begin_inset Index idx
4453 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4462 dialog you can set the line spacing for the whole document in the submenu
4466 \begin_inset space ~
4475 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4476 You need to have the \SpecialChar LaTeX
4482 \begin_inset Index idx
4485 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4487 -packages ! setspace
4492 installed to use this feature.
4497 You can set it for a single paragraph in the
4499 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
4501 \begin_inset space ~
4506 dialog but this should be used very exceptionally because vertical spacing
4507 is normally defined in the environment's style.
4510 \begin_layout Section
4511 Paragraph Environments
4512 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4514 name "sec:Paragraph-Environments"
4519 \begin_inset Index idx
4522 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4523 Paragraph ! Environments
4529 \begin_inset Index idx
4532 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4533 Paragraph environments|(
4541 \begin_layout Subsection
4545 \begin_layout Standard
4546 Paragraph environments correspond to the
4549 \begin_layout Standard
4568 \begin_inset Newline newline
4571 command sequence in \SpecialChar LaTeX
4573 If you don't know \SpecialChar LaTeX
4574 , or the concept of a paragraph environment is totally
4575 alien to you, we urge you to read the
4584 also contains many more examples than this section does.
4587 \begin_layout Standard
4588 A paragraph environment is simply a
4589 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4593 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4596 for a paragraph which gives that paragraph certain properties.
4597 This can include a particular style of font, different margins, a numbering
4598 scheme, labels, and so on.
4599 Additionally, you can
4600 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4604 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4607 the different environments inside one another, allowing one environment
4608 to inherit some of the properties of another.
4609 The different paragraph environments totally replace the need for messy
4610 tab stops, on the fly margin adjustment, and other hangovers from the days
4612 There are several paragraph environments that are specific to a particular
4614 We will only be covering the most common ones here.
4617 \begin_layout Standard
4618 To choose a new paragraph environment, use the pull-down box
4619 \begin_inset Graphics
4620 filename clipart/ToolbarEnvBox.png
4626 at the left end of the toolbar.
4628 will change the environment of the
4632 paragraph in which the cursor sits.
4633 You can also change the environment of an entire group of paragraphs if
4634 you select them before choosing the new environment.
4638 \begin_layout Standard
4647 create a new paragraph using the
4651 paragraph environment.
4653 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4657 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4660 because if you are in one of these environments:
4663 \begin_layout Itemize
4669 \begin_layout Itemize
4675 \begin_layout Itemize
4681 \begin_layout Itemize
4687 \begin_layout Itemize
4693 \begin_layout Itemize
4699 \begin_layout Itemize
4705 \begin_layout Standard
4707 keeps the old paragraph environment when you enter
4711 , rather than resetting it to
4716 Also the nesting depth is preserved (for more on nesting see section
4717 \begin_inset space ~
4721 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
4723 reference "sec:Nesting"
4730 \begin_layout Subsection
4734 \begin_layout Standard
4735 The default paragraph environment is
4740 It creates a plain paragraph.
4742 resets the paragraph environment, this is the one it chooses.
4743 In fact, the paragraph you're reading right now (and most of the ones in
4744 this manual) are in the
4751 \begin_layout Standard
4752 You can nest a paragraph using the
4756 environment in just about anything else, but you can't really nest anything
4764 \begin_layout Subsection
4766 \begin_inset Index idx
4769 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4778 \begin_layout Standard
4779 A \SpecialChar LaTeX
4780 title page has three parts: the title itself, the name(s) of the author(s)
4782 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4786 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4789 for thanks or contact information.
4790 For certain types of documents, \SpecialChar LaTeX
4791 places all of this on a separate page
4792 along with today's date.
4793 For other types of documents, the title
4794 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4798 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4801 goes at the top of the first page of the document.
4805 \begin_layout Standard
4807 provides an interface to the title page commands through the paragraph
4821 Here's how you use them:
4824 \begin_layout Itemize
4825 Put the title of your document in the
4832 \begin_layout Itemize
4833 Put the author name in the
4840 \begin_layout Itemize
4841 If you want the date to have a certain appearance, want to use a fixed date,
4842 or want other text to appear in place of today's date, put that text in
4848 Note that using this environment is optional.
4849 If you don't provide any, \SpecialChar LaTeX
4850 will automatically insert today's date.
4851 If you don't want a date, use the option
4853 Suppress default date on front page
4857 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4858 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
4860 \begin_inset space ~
4868 \begin_layout Standard
4869 You can use footnotes to insert
4870 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4874 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4877 or contact information.
4880 \begin_layout Subsection
4882 \begin_inset Index idx
4885 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4892 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4894 name "subsec:Headings"
4901 \begin_layout Standard
4902 There are several paragraph environments for producing section headings.
4904 takes care of the numbering for you.
4907 \begin_layout Subsubsection
4909 \begin_inset Index idx
4912 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4913 Section headings ! Numbered
4921 \begin_layout Standard
4922 There are 7 numbered types of section headings.
4926 \begin_layout Enumerate
4932 \begin_layout Enumerate
4938 \begin_layout Enumerate
4944 \begin_layout Enumerate
4950 \begin_layout Enumerate
4956 \begin_layout Enumerate
4962 \begin_layout Enumerate
4968 \begin_layout Standard
4970 labels each heading with a series of numbers, separated by periods.
4971 The numbers describe where in the document you are.
4972 Unlike the other headings, parts are numbered with Latin letters.
4975 \begin_layout Standard
4976 Headings all subdivide your document into different pieces of text.
4977 For example, suppose you're writing a book.
4978 You group the book into chapters.
4980 does a similar grouping:
4983 \begin_layout Itemize
4988 is divided into either
4999 \begin_layout Itemize
5011 \begin_layout Itemize
5023 \begin_layout Itemize
5035 \begin_layout Itemize
5047 \begin_layout Itemize
5059 \begin_layout Standard
5060 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
5063 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5068 Not all document types use the
5072 heading as the maximum sectioning level.
5077 is the top-level heading.
5085 \begin_layout Standard
5090 environment to label a new sub-subsection, \SpecialChar LyX
5091 labels it with its number,
5092 along with the number of the subsection, section and, if applicable, chapter
5094 For example: the fifth section of the second chapter of this book has the
5096 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5100 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5106 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5108 \begin_inset Index idx
5111 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5112 Section headings ! Unnumbered
5120 \begin_layout Standard
5121 The unnumbered section headings have a
5122 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5126 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5129 at the end of their name.
5130 They work the same as their numbered counterparts but will not appear in
5131 the table of contents, see section
5132 \begin_inset space ~
5136 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5145 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5146 Changing the Numbering
5147 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5149 name "subsec:Numbering-depth"
5156 \begin_layout Standard
5157 You can also alter which sectioning levels get numbered and which ones appear
5158 in the Table of Contents.
5159 Now, this doesn't remove any of the levels; that's preset in the document
5161 Just as certain classes start with
5175 Similarly, not all document classes number all sectioning levels.
5185 This is something you can change.
5188 \begin_layout Standard
5191 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
5195 \begin_inset Index idx
5198 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5207 \begin_inset space ~
5211 \begin_inset space ~
5216 you will see two counters.
5221 controls how far down in the sectioning hierarchy \SpecialChar LyX
5222 numbers a section heading.
5223 The other one controls the appearance of the section headings in the table
5227 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5228 Short Titles of Headings
5229 \begin_inset Index idx
5232 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5233 Section headings ! Short titles
5239 \begin_inset Argument 1
5242 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5249 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5251 name "sec:Short-Titles"
5258 \begin_layout Standard
5259 Some section or chapter titles, such as this one, can get quite long.
5260 This can cause trouble when there is limited horizontal space.
5261 For example, if the header of the page is set to show the current section
5262 title, a long title will protrude over the page margins and look awful.
5265 \begin_layout Standard
5267 allows you to specify a short title for section headings.
5268 This short title is used in the header and in the actual table of contents,
5269 avoiding the problem mentioned.
5270 To specify a short title, set the cursor behind the title and use the menu
5273 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
5275 \begin_inset space ~
5281 This will insert a box labeled
5282 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5286 \begin_inset space ~
5290 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5293 which you can use to enter the short title text.
5294 This also works for captions inside floats.
5295 There can only be one short title per title.
5298 \begin_layout Standard
5299 The title of this section is a good example of using this feature.
5302 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5306 \begin_layout Standard
5307 The following information applies to all section headings:
5310 \begin_layout Itemize
5311 You cannot do any nesting with these environments.
5314 \begin_layout Itemize
5315 You cannot use a margin note in any of these environments.
5318 \begin_layout Itemize
5319 You can only use inline math in these environments.
5322 \begin_layout Itemize
5323 You can use labels and cross-references to refer to their numbers.
5326 \begin_layout Subsection
5330 \begin_layout Standard
5332 has three paragraph environments for writing poetry and quotations.
5346 Forget the days of changing line spacing and twiddling with margins.
5347 These three paragraph environments already have those changes built-in.
5348 They all widen the left margin and add a bit of extra space above and below
5349 the text they contain.
5350 They also allow nesting, so you can put a
5358 , as well as in some other paragraph environments.
5361 \begin_layout Standard
5362 There is another feature of these three paragraph environments: they do
5371 when you start a new paragraph.
5372 So, you can type in that poem and merrily enter
5376 without worrying about the paragraph environment changing on you.
5377 Of course, that means that, once you are done typing in that poem, you
5378 have to change back to the
5382 environment yourself.
5385 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5387 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5394 \begin_inset Index idx
5397 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5406 \begin_layout Standard
5407 Now that we've described the similarities of these three environments, it's
5408 time for the differences.
5417 are identical except for one difference:
5421 uses extra spacing to separate paragraphs and never indents the first line.
5430 indents the first line of a paragraph and uses the same line spacing throughout.
5433 \begin_layout Standard
5434 Here's an example of the
5447 I can keep writing, extending this line out further and further until it
5449 See – no indentation!
5453 Here's the second paragraph of this quote.
5454 Again, there's no indentation, but there is extra space between me and
5455 the other paragraph.
5458 \begin_layout Standard
5459 Here's another example, this time in the
5466 \begin_layout Quotation
5472 If I keep writing, you will see the indentation.
5473 If your country uses a writing style that indicates new paragraphs by indenting
5474 the first line, then
5478 is the environment for you! Well, you'd use it
5482 you were quoting other text.
5485 \begin_layout Quotation
5486 Here's a new paragraph.
5487 I could ramble on and on, like a politician at election time.
5488 If I did that, though, you'd get bored.
5491 \begin_layout Standard
5492 As the examples show,
5496 is for those people who use extra space to separate paragraphs.
5497 They should put quotes in the
5502 Those who use indentation to mark a new paragraph should use the
5506 paragraph environment for quoted text.
5509 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5511 \begin_inset Index idx
5514 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5521 \begin_inset Index idx
5524 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5531 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5540 \begin_layout Standard
5545 is a paragraph environment for poetry, rhymes, verses, and so on.
5551 \begin_inset Newline newline
5554 Which I did not rehearse!
5558 It could be much worse.
5559 This line could be long, very long, oh so long, so very long that it wraps
5561 It looks okay on screen, but in the printed version, the extra lines are
5562 indented a bit more than the first.
5563 Okay, so it's turned to prose and doesn't rhyme anymore.
5569 \begin_inset Newline newline
5572 And make things look fine
5573 \begin_inset Newline newline
5579 arg "newline-insert newline"
5585 \begin_layout Standard
5590 does not indent both margins.
5591 Each stanza of the verse or poem is in its own paragraph.
5592 To separate the individual lines of a stanza, use the shortcut
5595 arg "newline-insert newline"
5601 \begin_layout Subsection
5603 \begin_inset Index idx
5606 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5613 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5622 \begin_layout Standard
5624 has four different paragraph environments for creating different kinds
5634 environments, \SpecialChar LyX
5635 labels your list items with bullets or numbers, respectively.
5644 environments, \SpecialChar LyX
5645 lets you provide your own label.
5646 We will present the individual details of each type of list next after
5647 describing some general features of all four of them.
5650 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5654 \begin_layout Standard
5655 The four paragraph environments for lists differ from the other environments
5657 First, \SpecialChar LyX
5658 treats each paragraph as a list item.
5667 reset the environment to
5671 but keeps the current environment and creates a new list item.
5672 The nesting depth is thereby kept.
5673 If you want to keep the paragraph environment but reset the current nesting
5677 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
5681 If you do this at the top level of a list, it returns you to the
5688 \begin_layout Standard
5689 You can nest lists of any type inside one another.
5690 In fact, \SpecialChar LyX
5691 changes the labels on some list items depending on how it is
5693 If you intend to use any of the list paragraph environments, we suggest
5694 you read all of section
5695 \begin_inset space ~
5699 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5701 reference "sec:Nesting"
5708 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5710 \begin_inset Index idx
5713 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5720 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5729 \begin_layout Standard
5730 The first type of list we will describe in detail is the
5734 paragraph environment.
5735 It has the following properties:
5738 \begin_layout Itemize
5739 Each item has a particular bullet or symbol as its label.
5740 \begin_inset Separator parbreak
5747 \begin_layout Itemize
5749 uses the same symbol for all of the items in a given nesting level.
5752 \begin_layout Itemize
5753 The symbol appears at the beginning of the first line.
5757 \begin_layout Itemize
5758 The items can have any length.
5760 automatically offsets the left margin of each item.
5761 The offset is always relative to whatever environment the
5768 \begin_layout Itemize
5773 environment inside another
5777 environment, the label changes to a new symbol.
5778 \begin_inset Separator parbreak
5785 \begin_layout Itemize
5786 There are four different symbols for up to a four-fold nesting.
5789 \begin_layout Itemize
5791 always shows the same symbol on screen.
5794 \begin_layout Itemize
5796 \begin_inset space ~
5800 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5802 reference "sec:Nesting"
5806 for a full explanation of nesting.
5810 \begin_layout Standard
5811 Of course, that explanation was also an example of an
5820 environment is best suited for lists where the order doesn't matter.
5823 \begin_layout Standard
5824 We said that different levels use different symbols as their label.
5825 Here's an example of all four possible symbols.
5828 \begin_layout Itemize
5829 The label for the first level
5833 is a large black dot, or bullet.
5834 \begin_inset Separator parbreak
5841 \begin_layout Itemize
5842 The label for the second level is a dash.
5843 \begin_inset Separator parbreak
5850 \begin_layout Itemize
5851 The label for the third is an asterisk.
5852 \begin_inset Separator parbreak
5859 \begin_layout Itemize
5860 The label for the fourth is a centered dot.
5864 \begin_layout Itemize
5865 Back out to the third level.
5869 \begin_layout Itemize
5870 Back to the second level.
5874 \begin_layout Itemize
5875 Back to the outermost level.
5878 \begin_layout Standard
5879 These are the default labels for an
5884 You can customize how these labels are displayed in the output in the
5886 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
5889 dialog in the submenu
5894 \begin_inset Index idx
5897 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5903 These customizations are not displayed in \SpecialChar LyX
5907 \begin_layout Standard
5908 Notice how the space between items decreases with increasing depth.
5909 We will explain nesting and all the tricks you can do with different depths
5911 \begin_inset space ~
5915 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5917 reference "sec:Nesting"
5924 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5926 \begin_inset Index idx
5929 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5936 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5938 name "sec:Enumerate"
5945 \begin_layout Standard
5950 environment is used to create numbered lists and outlines.
5951 It has these properties:
5954 \begin_layout Enumerate
5955 Each item has a numeral as its label.
5956 \begin_inset Separator parbreak
5963 \begin_layout Enumerate
5964 The label type depends on the nesting depth.
5968 \begin_layout Enumerate
5970 automatically counts the items for you and updates the label as appropriate.
5973 \begin_layout Enumerate
5978 environment resets the counter to one.
5981 \begin_layout Enumerate
5991 \begin_inset Separator parbreak
5998 \begin_layout Enumerate
5999 Offsets the items relative to the left margin.
6000 Items can have any length.
6003 \begin_layout Enumerate
6004 Reduces the space between items as the nesting depth increases.
6007 \begin_layout Enumerate
6008 Uses different types of labels depending on the nesting depth.
6011 \begin_layout Enumerate
6012 Allows up to a four-fold nesting.
6016 \begin_layout Standard
6025 shows the different labels for each item in \SpecialChar LyX
6027 Here is how \SpecialChar LyX
6028 labels the four different levels in an
6035 \begin_layout Enumerate
6036 The first level of an
6040 uses Arabic numerals followed by a period.
6041 \begin_inset Separator parbreak
6048 \begin_layout Enumerate
6049 The second level uses lower case letters surrounded by parentheses.
6050 \begin_inset Separator parbreak
6057 \begin_layout Enumerate
6058 The third level uses lower-case Roman numerals followed by a period.
6059 \begin_inset Separator parbreak
6066 \begin_layout Enumerate
6067 The fourth level uses capital letters followed by a period.
6070 \begin_layout Enumerate
6071 Again, notice the decrease in the spacing between items as the nesting depth
6076 \begin_layout Enumerate
6077 Back to the third level
6081 \begin_layout Enumerate
6082 Back to the second level.
6086 \begin_layout Enumerate
6087 Back to the outermost level.
6090 \begin_layout Standard
6091 You can customize the type of numbering used in the
6095 environment, see section
6096 \begin_inset space ~
6100 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6102 reference "subsec:Customized-Lists"
6107 Such customization only shows up in the printed version, not in \SpecialChar LyX
6111 \begin_layout Standard
6112 There is more to nesting
6116 environments than we've stated here.
6117 You should read section
6118 \begin_inset space ~
6122 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6124 reference "sec:Nesting"
6128 to learn more about nesting.
6131 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6133 \begin_inset Index idx
6136 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6145 \begin_layout Standard
6146 Unlike the previous two environments, the
6150 list has no fixed label.
6151 Instead, \SpecialChar LyX
6153 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6157 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6160 of the first line as the label.
6164 \begin_layout Description
6165 Example: This is an example of the
6172 \begin_layout Standard
6174 typesets the label in boldface and puts extra space between it and the
6178 \begin_layout Standard
6180 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6184 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6187 it is meant that the first usage of the
6191 key ends the label if you are at the beginning of the first line of an
6193 If you need to use more than one word in a label use a
6201 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
6206 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
6207 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
6209 \begin_inset space ~
6215 \begin_inset space ~
6219 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6221 reference "subsec:Protected-Space"
6225 for more information.) Here is an example:
6228 \begin_layout Description
6230 \begin_inset space ~
6233 Example: This one shows how to use a
6236 \begin_inset space ~
6248 \begin_layout Description
6249 Usage: You should use the
6253 environment for things like definitions and theorems.
6254 Use it when you need to make one word in particular stand out in the text
6256 It's not a good idea to use a
6260 environment when you have an entire sentence that you want to describe.
6261 You're better off using
6273 paragraphs into them.
6276 \begin_layout Description
6277 Nesting: You can nest
6281 environments inside one another, nest them in other types of lists, and
6285 \begin_layout Standard
6286 Notice that after the first line, \SpecialChar LyX
6287 indents subsequent lines, offsetting
6288 them from the first line.
6291 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6293 \begin_inset Index idx
6296 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6305 \begin_layout Standard
6310 environment is a \SpecialChar LyX
6311 extension to \SpecialChar LaTeX
6315 \begin_layout Standard
6324 list has user-defined labels for each list item but it provides some additional
6326 Here are its properties:
6329 \begin_layout Labeling
6330 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6332 \begin_inset space ~
6335 labels \SpecialChar LyX
6337 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6341 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6344 of each line as the item label.
6349 after the beginning of the first line of an item marks the end of the label.
6350 If you need to use more than one word in an item label, use a protected
6351 space as described above.
6354 \begin_layout Labeling
6355 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6356 margins As you can see, \SpecialChar LyX
6357 uses different margins for the item label and the
6358 body of the item text.
6359 The body of the text has a larger left margin, which is equal to the default
6360 label width plus a little extra space.
6364 \begin_layout Labeling
6365 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6367 \begin_inset space ~
6370 width \SpecialChar LyX
6371 uses the width of the label, or the default width, whatever is larger.
6372 If the label width is larger, the label
6373 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6377 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6380 into the first line.
6381 In other words, the text of the first line isn't aligned with the left
6382 margin of the rest of the item text.
6385 \begin_layout Labeling
6386 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6388 \begin_inset space ~
6391 width You can set the default label width to ensure that the text of all
6396 environment has the same left margin.
6397 \begin_inset Newline newline
6400 To change the default width, select all items in the list.
6403 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
6405 \begin_inset space ~
6410 dialog (toolbar button
6413 arg "layout-paragraph"
6420 \begin_inset space ~
6425 determines the default label width.
6426 You can use the text of your largest label here, but you can also use the
6428 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6432 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6435 multiple times instead.
6436 M is the widest character and is a standard unit of widths in \SpecialChar LaTeX
6439 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6443 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6446 as the unit of width you don't need to keep changing the contents of
6449 \begin_inset space ~
6454 every time you alter a label in a
6459 \begin_inset Newline newline
6462 The predefined default width is the length of
6463 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6467 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6471 \begin_inset space ~
6477 \begin_layout Standard
6482 list the same way as the
6486 list: When you need one word to stand out from the text that describes
6492 environment gives you another way to do this, using a different overall
6496 \begin_layout Standard
6501 lists inside one another, nest them in other types of lists, and so on.
6502 They work just like the other list paragraph environments.
6504 \begin_inset space ~
6508 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6510 reference "sec:Nesting"
6514 to learn about nesting.
6517 \begin_layout Standard
6518 There is yet another feature of the
6522 list: As you can see in the examples, \SpecialChar LyX
6523 left-justifies the item labels by
6525 You can use additional
6529 to change how \SpecialChar LyX
6530 justifies the item label.
6535 are documented in section
6536 \begin_inset space ~
6540 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6542 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
6547 Here are some examples:
6550 \begin_layout Labeling
6551 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6552 Left The default for
6559 \begin_layout Labeling
6560 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6561 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
6568 at the beginning of the label right justifies it.
6571 \begin_layout Labeling
6572 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6573 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
6577 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
6584 at the beginning of the label and one at the end centers it.
6587 \begin_layout Subsection
6589 \begin_inset CommandInset label
6591 name "subsec:Customized-Lists"
6596 \begin_inset Index idx
6599 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6608 \begin_layout Standard
6609 The features described in this section require that the module
6611 Customisable Lists (enumitem)
6613 is loaded in the document settings.
6614 The module uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
6620 \begin_inset Index idx
6623 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6625 -packages ! enumitem
6633 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6634 Custom Enumerate Lists
6635 \begin_inset Index idx
6638 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6639 Lists ! Enumerate ! Custom
6647 \begin_layout Standard
6649 The default numbering of numbered lists can be changed by adding an optional
6652 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
6655 ) to the first item of each level in the list.
6656 There you add the command
6659 \begin_layout Standard
6667 \begin_layout Standard
6679 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6680 For more about \SpecialChar TeX
6681 Code, look at section
6682 \begin_inset space ~
6686 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6688 reference "sec:TeX-Code"
6701 is hereby the first level counter of the enumeration.
6708 outputs the counter as a small Roman numeral.
6709 For capital Roman numerals replace
6721 in the command above.
6722 For Arabic numerals use
6730 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6734 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6737 items with capital or small Latin letters use
6752 \begin_layout Standard
6754 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
6757 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6762 You can only number 26
6763 \begin_inset space ~
6766 items with Latin letters, because this numbering is limited to single letters.
6774 \begin_layout Standard
6775 To change the numbering for the list sublevels, replace the 'i' in the command
6776 by the small Roman numeral of the level (enumi, enumii, enumiii, enumiv).
6779 \begin_layout Standard
6780 Here is a list with custom numbering:
6783 \begin_layout Enumerate
6784 \begin_inset Argument 1
6787 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6791 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6810 \begin_inset Separator parbreak
6817 \begin_layout Enumerate
6818 \begin_inset Argument 1
6821 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6825 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6844 \begin_layout Enumerate
6846 \begin_inset Separator parbreak
6853 \begin_layout Enumerate
6854 \begin_inset Argument 1
6857 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6861 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6878 \begin_inset Separator parbreak
6885 \begin_layout Enumerate
6886 \begin_inset Argument 1
6889 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6893 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6915 \begin_layout Standard
6916 For this list these commands were used:
6919 \begin_layout Standard
6930 \begin_inset Newline newline
6938 \begin_inset Newline newline
6946 \begin_inset Newline newline
6956 \begin_layout Standard
6963 makes the label emphasized and
6972 \begin_layout Standard
6973 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
6976 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6981 When you change the label of a list level, it will be used for all following
6982 lists until you change the definition.
6990 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6992 \begin_inset Index idx
6995 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6996 Lists ! Enumerate ! Resumed
7004 \begin_layout Standard
7005 Enumerations can be resumed after intermediate paragraphs:
7008 \begin_layout Enumerate
7009 \begin_inset Argument 1
7012 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7016 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7031 \begin_inset Note Note
7034 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7035 goes back to default numbering
7043 \begin_layout Enumerate
7047 \begin_layout Standard
7051 \begin_layout Enumerate-Resume
7055 \begin_layout Standard
7056 To resume an enumeration, use the style
7061 Its numbering appears in blue within \SpecialChar LyX
7062 to indicate that it is a resumed
7063 list and that the numbering will not be correct in \SpecialChar LyX
7064 , but in the output.
7067 \begin_layout Standard
7068 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
7071 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7076 If there is no previous enumeration to resume, you will get a \SpecialChar LaTeX
7085 \begin_layout Standard
7086 Perhaps you might want to resume the list with a different number from the
7088 Or you want to start a new enumeration with a defined number.
7089 This is possible by adding an optional argument to the first list item
7090 of a normal enumeration.
7091 There, insert the command
7094 \begin_layout Standard
7100 \begin_layout Standard
7105 is the number with which you want to resume the list.
7109 \begin_layout Enumerate
7113 \begin_layout Enumerate
7117 \begin_layout Standard
7118 Enumeration starting at a given value:
7121 \begin_layout Enumerate
7122 \begin_inset Argument 1
7125 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7129 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7141 This enumeration starts at 4
7144 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7146 \begin_inset Index idx
7149 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7158 \begin_layout Standard
7159 In some cases you might want less or more vertical space between the items
7161 For example if the default space is too much in your opinion in this case:
7164 \begin_layout Itemize
7168 \begin_layout Itemize
7169 with standard spacing
7172 \begin_layout Standard
7173 You can decrease the space by adding an optional argument to the first item
7175 Add there the command
7179 to get no additional list space like in this example:
7182 \begin_layout Itemize
7183 \begin_inset Argument 1
7186 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7190 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7205 \begin_layout Itemize
7209 \begin_layout Itemize
7213 \begin_layout Standard
7214 To add space you can use several other commands provided by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
7221 \begin_inset Index idx
7224 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7226 -packages ! enumitem
7232 For more information see its documentation,
7233 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
7242 \begin_layout Standard
7243 There are also many commands available to change the horizontal spacing
7245 Here is an example where the indentation was changed to that of the paragraphs
7246 in the document and the label separation was set to 2
7247 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
7250 cm so that the number is in the page margin:
7253 \begin_layout Enumerate
7254 \begin_inset Argument 1
7257 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7261 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7265 parindent, labelsep=2cm
7278 \begin_layout Enumerate
7279 with negative indentation
7282 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7283 Further Customization
7284 \begin_inset Index idx
7287 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7288 Lists ! Customization
7296 \begin_layout Standard
7297 You can also change the style of description lists.
7301 \begin_layout Standard
7307 \begin_layout Standard
7308 changes the description label font, the command
7311 \begin_layout Standard
7317 \begin_layout Standard
7318 sets the list style.
7321 \begin_layout Standard
7322 An example where the command
7325 \begin_layout Standard
7330 itshape, style=nextline
7333 \begin_layout Standard
7337 \begin_layout Description
7339 \begin_inset space ~
7343 \begin_inset Argument 1
7346 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7350 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7352 labelindent=0pt, labelsep=1cm, font=
7354 itshape, style=nextline
7364 Ionizing radiation consists of particles or electromagnetic waves that are
7365 energetic enough to detach electrons from atoms or molecules, therefore
7369 \begin_layout Description
7371 \begin_inset space ~
7374 counting: In computer science, reference counting is a technique of storing
7375 the number of references, pointers, or handles to a resource such as an
7376 object, block of memory, disk space or other resource.
7379 \begin_layout Standard
7380 There are many more commands and features provided by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
7386 \begin_inset Index idx
7389 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7391 -packages ! enumitem
7397 For more information see its documentation
7398 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
7407 \begin_layout Subsection
7409 \begin_inset Index idx
7412 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7421 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7423 \begin_inset space ~
7426 Address: An Overview
7429 \begin_layout Standard
7430 Although \SpecialChar LyX
7431 has document classes for letters, we've also created two paragraph
7439 \begin_inset space ~
7445 To use the letter class, you need to use specific paragraph environments
7446 in a specific order, otherwise \SpecialChar LaTeX
7447 gags on the document.
7448 In contrast, you can use the
7455 \begin_inset space ~
7460 paragraph environments anywhere with no problem.
7461 You can even nest them inside other environments, though you can't nest
7465 \begin_layout Standard
7466 Of course, you're not limited to using
7473 \begin_inset space ~
7482 \begin_inset space ~
7487 , in particular, is useful for creating article titles like those used in
7488 some European academic papers.
7491 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7493 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7495 name "sec:Address-Usage"
7502 \begin_layout Standard
7507 environment formats text in the style of an address, which is also used
7508 for the opening and signature in some countries.
7512 \begin_inset space ~
7517 environment formats text in the style of a right-justified address, which
7518 is used for the sender's address and today's date in some countries.
7519 Here's an example of each:
7522 \begin_layout Right Address
7524 \begin_inset Newline newline
7528 \begin_inset Newline newline
7532 \begin_inset Newline newline
7535 When is it? What is today?
7538 \begin_layout Standard
7542 \begin_inset space ~
7548 Notice that the lines all have the same left margin, which \SpecialChar LyX
7550 the largest block of text on a single line.
7551 Here's an example of the
7558 \begin_layout Address
7560 \begin_inset Newline newline
7563 Where do I send this
7564 \begin_inset Newline newline
7567 Your post office and country
7570 \begin_layout Standard
7571 As you can see, both
7578 \begin_inset space ~
7583 add extra space between themselves and the next paragraph.
7588 in either of these environments, \SpecialChar LyX
7589 resets the nesting depth and sets the
7595 This makes sense, since
7603 function, and the individual lines of an address are not paragraphs.
7604 Thus, you have to use
7611 arg "newline-insert newline"
7616 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
7617 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
7619 \begin_inset space ~
7623 \begin_inset space ~
7628 ) to start a new line in an
7635 \begin_inset space ~
7643 \begin_layout Subsection
7647 \begin_layout Standard
7648 Most academic writing begins with an abstract and ends with a bibliography
7649 or list of references.
7651 contains paragraph environments for both of these.
7654 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7656 \begin_inset Index idx
7659 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7668 \begin_layout Standard
7673 environment is used for the abstract of an article.
7674 Technically, you could use this environment anywhere, but you really should
7675 only use it at the beginning of the document, after the title.
7676 Also, don't bother trying to nest
7690 environment is only useful in the article and report document classes.
7691 The book document classes ignores the
7695 completely, and it's utterly silly to use
7699 in a letter document class.
7702 \begin_layout Standard
7707 environment does several things for you.
7708 First, it puts the centered label
7709 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7713 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7717 The label and the text of the abstract are separated by some extra vertical
7719 Second, it typesets everything in a smaller font, just as you'd expect.
7720 Lastly, it adds a bit of extra vertical space between the abstract and
7721 the subsequent text.
7722 Well, that's how it will appear on the \SpecialChar LyX
7724 The actual appearance in the output depends on the document class you are
7728 \begin_layout Standard
7729 Starting a new paragraph by entering
7733 does not reset the paragraph environment.
7734 The new paragraph will still be in the
7739 So, you will have to change the paragraph environment yourself when you
7740 finish entering the abstract of your document.
7743 \begin_layout Standard
7744 \begin_inset Float figure
7749 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7751 \begin_inset Graphics
7752 filename clipart/Abstract.pdf
7759 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7760 \begin_inset Caption Standard
7762 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7763 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7765 name "fig:Paragraph-in-the"
7786 \begin_layout Standard
7787 We would love to demonstrate the
7791 environment, but since this document is in the
7792 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7796 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7799 class, we can't do this.
7800 We inserted it therefore as figure
7801 \begin_inset space ~
7805 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
7807 reference "fig:Paragraph-in-the"
7812 If you have never heard of an
7813 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7817 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7820 before, you can safely ignore this environment.
7823 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7825 \begin_inset Index idx
7828 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7835 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7837 name "subsec:Biblio_environment"
7844 \begin_layout Standard
7849 environment is used to list references.
7850 Technically, you could use this environment anywhere, but you really should
7851 only use it at the end of the document.
7863 \begin_layout Standard
7864 When you first open a
7868 environment, \SpecialChar LyX
7869 adds a large vertical space, followed by the heading
7870 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7874 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7878 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7882 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7885 depending on the document class.
7886 The heading is in a large boldface font.
7887 Each paragraph of the
7891 environment is a bibliography entry.
7896 does not reset the paragraph environment.
7897 Each new paragraph is still in the
7904 \begin_layout Standard
7905 There is another, usually better way to include references in your document
7906 by using a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
7908 For more information on that, and for a detailed description of \SpecialChar LyX
7910 handling, have a look at section
7911 \begin_inset space ~
7915 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
7917 reference "sec:Bibliography"
7924 \begin_layout Subsection
7925 Special Environments
7928 \begin_layout Standard
7930 provides two environments that can be used to emulate the behavior of a
7931 computer console/terminal and a typewriter.
7934 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7939 \begin_inset Index idx
7942 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7950 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7952 name "subsec:LyX-Code"
7959 \begin_layout Standard
7965 environment is a \SpecialChar LyX
7967 It type-sets text in a typewriter-style font.
7972 key as a fixed whitespace.
7976 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7989 \begin_inset space ~
7994 instead of an end-of-word marker.
8008 are the only environments in which you can type multiple whitespaces in
8011 If you need to insert blank lines, you will still need to use
8014 arg "newline-insert newline"
8031 does not reset the paragraph environment.
8032 So, when you finish using the
8037 environment, you will need to change the paragraph environment yourself.
8038 Also, you can nest the
8043 environment inside of others.
8046 \begin_layout Standard
8047 There are a few quirks with this environment:
8050 \begin_layout Itemize
8054 arg "newline-insert newline"
8057 at the beginning of a new paragraph (i.
8058 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
8062 \begin_inset space \space{}
8072 arg "newline-insert newline"
8078 \begin_layout Itemize
8082 arg "newline-insert newline"
8092 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
8098 \begin_layout Itemize
8099 You cannot have an empty paragraph or an empty line.
8100 You must put at least one
8104 in any line you want blank.
8105 Otherwise, \SpecialChar LaTeX
8109 \begin_layout Itemize
8110 You cannot get the typewriter double quotes by typing
8114 since that will insert
8119 You get the typewriter double quotes with
8122 arg "self-insert \""
8128 \begin_layout Standard
8132 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8136 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8140 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8144 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8148 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8149 printf("Hello World!
8154 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8158 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8162 \begin_layout Standard
8163 This is just the standard
8164 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8168 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8175 \begin_layout Standard
8181 has one purpose: to typeset code, such as program source, shell scripts
8183 Use it only in those very special cases where you need to generate text
8184 as if you used a typewriter.
8185 \begin_inset Index idx
8188 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8189 Paragraph environments|)
8194 For longer parts of programming code, use the listings inset that is described
8197 Program Code Listings
8202 \begin_inset space ~
8210 \begin_layout Subsubsection
8214 \begin_inset Index idx
8217 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8226 \begin_layout Standard
8231 environment is similar to the
8236 environment with the difference that its content will be treated like a
8237 computer console text.
8242 does therefore not have paragraphs so that
8256 key is treated like a normal space in text (not as a protected space) and
8257 you can have empty lines.
8270 \begin_layout Itemize
8271 have a certain language and a text style
8274 \begin_layout Itemize
8275 contain hyperlinks, boxes, foot- and margin notes, notes, math, citations,
8276 index- and nomenclature entries, labels, tables, graphics, listings, floats
8277 and \SpecialChar TeX
8281 \begin_layout Standard
8282 Because of these properties
8286 works like a typewriter.
8290 \begin_layout Verbatim
8294 \begin_layout Verbatim
8297 The following 2 lines are empty:
8300 \begin_layout Verbatim
8304 \begin_layout Verbatim
8308 \begin_layout Verbatim
8309 Almost everything is allowed in verbatim:"%&$§#~'`
8314 \begin_layout Section
8315 Nesting Environments
8316 \begin_inset Index idx
8319 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8320 Nesting ! Environments
8326 \begin_inset CommandInset label
8335 \begin_layout Subsection
8339 \begin_layout Standard
8341 treats text as a unified block with a particular context and specific propertie
8343 This allows you to create blocks that inherit some of the properties of
8345 For example you have three main points in an outline, but point #2 also
8347 In other words, you have a list inside of another list, with the inner
8349 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8353 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8359 \begin_layout Enumerate
8363 \begin_layout Enumerate
8365 \begin_inset Separator parbreak
8372 \begin_layout Enumerate
8376 \begin_layout Enumerate
8381 \begin_layout Enumerate
8385 \begin_layout Standard
8386 You put a list inside a list by nesting one list inside the other.
8387 Nesting an environment is quite simple: Select
8389 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
8391 \begin_inset space ~
8395 \begin_inset space ~
8403 \begin_inset space ~
8407 \begin_inset space ~
8412 to change the nesting depth (the status bar will tell you how far you are
8414 Instead of the menu, you can also use the toolbar buttons
8417 arg "depth-increment"
8423 arg "depth-decrement"
8437 arg "depth-increment"
8443 arg "depth-decrement"
8447 The change will work on the current selection, if you have made one (allowing
8448 you to change the nesting of several paragraphs at once), or the current
8452 \begin_layout Standard
8453 Note that \SpecialChar LyX
8454 only changes the nesting depth if it can.
8455 If it is invalid to do so, nothing happens if you try to change the depth.
8456 Additionally, if you change the depth of one paragraph, it affects the
8457 depth of every paragraph nested inside of it.
8460 \begin_layout Standard
8461 Nesting isn't limited to lists.
8463 , you can nest just about anything inside anything else, as you're about
8465 This is the real power of nesting paragraph environments.
8468 \begin_layout Subsection
8469 What You Can and Can't Nest
8472 \begin_layout Standard
8473 Before we fire a list of paragraph environments at you, we need to tell
8474 you a little bit more about how nesting works.
8477 \begin_layout Standard
8478 The question of nesting a paragraph environment is a bit more complicated
8479 than a simple yes or no.
8480 There are three types of paragraph environments:
8483 \begin_layout Itemize
8484 Completely unnestable
8487 \begin_layout Itemize
8488 Fully nestable, you can nest them inside things and you can also nest other
8492 \begin_layout Itemize
8493 A third type, you can nest them into other environments, but you can't nest
8497 \begin_layout Standard
8498 Here's a list of the three types of nesting behavior, and which paragraph
8499 environments have them:
8502 \begin_layout Description
8503 Unnestable Can't nest them.
8504 Can't nest into them.
8505 \begin_inset Separator parbreak
8512 \begin_layout Itemize
8518 \begin_layout Itemize
8524 \begin_layout Itemize
8530 \begin_layout Itemize
8536 \begin_layout Itemize
8543 \begin_layout Description
8545 \begin_inset space ~
8548 Nestable You can nest them.
8549 You can nest other things into them.
8550 \begin_inset Separator parbreak
8557 \begin_layout Itemize
8563 \begin_layout Itemize
8569 \begin_layout Itemize
8575 \begin_layout Itemize
8581 \begin_layout Itemize
8587 \begin_layout Itemize
8593 \begin_layout Itemize
8599 \begin_layout Itemize
8606 \begin_layout Itemize
8613 \begin_layout Description
8614 Nestable-Inside You can nest them inside other things.
8615 You can't nest anything into them.
8616 \begin_inset Separator parbreak
8623 \begin_layout Itemize
8629 \begin_layout Itemize
8635 \begin_layout Itemize
8641 \begin_layout Itemize
8647 \begin_layout Itemize
8653 \begin_layout Itemize
8659 \begin_layout Itemize
8665 \begin_layout Itemize
8671 \begin_layout Itemize
8677 \begin_layout Itemize
8683 \begin_layout Itemize
8689 \begin_layout Itemize
8695 \begin_layout Itemize
8701 \begin_layout Itemize
8705 \begin_inset space ~
8711 \begin_layout Itemize
8718 \begin_layout Standard
8719 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
8722 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8727 Although it is possible, for example, to nest numbered section headings
8737 \begin_inset space ~
8740 into lists, it is highly recommended not to do this because the aim is to
8741 create well-structured documents following typesetting guidelines whereas
8742 nested section headings violate this.
8750 \begin_layout Subsection
8751 Nesting Other Things: Tables, Math, Floats, etc.
8752 \begin_inset Index idx
8755 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8756 Nesting ! Tables etc.
8764 \begin_layout Standard
8765 There are several things that aren't paragraph environments, but which are
8766 affected by nesting anyhow.
8770 \begin_layout Itemize
8774 \begin_layout Itemize
8778 \begin_layout Itemize
8782 \begin_layout Standard
8784 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
8787 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8792 Figures and tables in
8796 are not affected by this.
8801 Have a look at section
8802 \begin_inset space ~
8806 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
8808 reference "sec:Floats"
8812 for more information about
8819 \begin_layout Standard
8821 can treat these three objects as either a word or as a paragraph.
8822 If a figure, table, or an equation is inline, it goes wherever the paragraph
8826 \begin_layout Standard
8827 On the other hand, if you have an equation, figure or table in a
8828 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8832 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8835 of its own, it behaves just like a
8836 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8840 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8843 paragraph environment.
8844 You can nest it into any environment, but you obviously can't nest anything
8848 \begin_layout Standard
8849 Here's an example with a table:
8852 \begin_layout Enumerate
8854 \begin_inset Separator parbreak
8861 \begin_layout Enumerate
8862 This is (a) and it's nested.
8863 \begin_inset Separator parbreak
8870 \begin_layout Standard
8871 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
8877 \begin_layout Standard
8879 \begin_inset Tabular
8880 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
8881 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
8882 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
8883 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
8885 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
8888 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8903 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
8906 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8923 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
8926 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8941 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
8944 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8967 \begin_layout Standard
8968 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
8975 \begin_layout Enumerate
8977 The table is actually nested inside (a).
8981 \begin_layout Enumerate
8985 \begin_layout Standard
8986 If we hadn't nested the table at all, the list would look like this:
8989 \begin_layout Enumerate
8991 \begin_inset Separator parbreak
8998 \begin_layout Enumerate
8999 This is (a) and it's nested.
9003 \begin_layout Standard
9004 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9010 \begin_layout Standard
9012 \begin_inset Tabular
9013 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
9014 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
9015 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9016 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9018 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9021 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9036 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
9039 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9056 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9059 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9074 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
9077 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9100 \begin_layout Standard
9101 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9107 \begin_layout Enumerate
9114 In fact, it's not nested at all.
9117 \begin_layout Enumerate
9121 \begin_layout Standard
9122 Notice how item (b) is not only no longer nested, but is also the first
9126 \begin_layout Standard
9127 There's another trap you can fall into: Nesting the table, but not going
9130 then turns anything after the table into a new sublist.
9133 \begin_layout Enumerate
9135 \begin_inset Separator parbreak
9142 \begin_layout Enumerate
9143 This is (a) and it's nested.
9146 \begin_layout Standard
9147 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9153 \begin_layout Standard
9155 \begin_inset Tabular
9156 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
9157 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
9158 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9159 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9161 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9164 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9179 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
9182 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9199 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9202 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9217 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
9220 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9244 \begin_layout Standard
9245 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9251 \begin_layout Enumerate
9253 The table is actually nested inside Item One, but
9260 \begin_layout Enumerate
9264 \begin_layout Standard
9265 As you can see, item (b) turned into the first item of a new list, but a
9271 The same thing would have happened to a figure or an equation.
9272 So, if you nest tables, figures or equations, make sure you go to the right
9276 \begin_layout Subsection
9277 Usage and General Features
9280 \begin_layout Standard
9281 Speaking of levels, \SpecialChar LyX
9282 can perform up to a six-fold nesting.
9284 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9288 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9291 is the innermost possible depth.
9292 Here's an example to illustrate what we mean:
9295 \begin_layout Enumerate
9296 level #1 – outermost
9297 \begin_inset Separator parbreak
9304 \begin_layout Enumerate
9306 \begin_inset Separator parbreak
9313 \begin_layout Enumerate
9315 \begin_inset Separator parbreak
9322 \begin_layout Enumerate
9324 \begin_inset Separator parbreak
9331 \begin_layout Itemize
9333 \begin_inset Separator parbreak
9340 \begin_layout Itemize
9349 \begin_layout Standard
9350 There are two exceptions to the six-fold nesting limit, and you can see
9351 both of them in the example.
9352 Unlike the other fully-nestable environments, you can only perform a four-fold
9362 For example, if we tried to nest another
9367 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9371 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9374 , we would get errors.
9377 \begin_layout Subsection
9379 \begin_inset Index idx
9382 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9391 \begin_layout Standard
9392 The best way to explain just what you can do with nesting is by illustration.
9393 We have several examples of nested environments.
9394 In them, we explain how we created the example, so that you can reproduce
9398 \begin_layout Subsubsection
9399 Example 1: The Six-fold Way and Mixed Nesting
9402 \begin_layout Labeling
9403 \labelwidthstring MMM
9404 #1-a This is the outermost level.
9410 \begin_inset Separator parbreak
9417 \begin_layout Labeling
9418 \labelwidthstring MMM
9419 #2-a This is level #2.
9420 We created it by using
9423 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9429 arg "depth-increment"
9433 \begin_inset Separator parbreak
9440 \begin_layout Labeling
9441 \labelwidthstring MMM
9442 #3-a This is level #3.
9443 This time, we just enter
9450 arg "depth-increment"
9454 We could have also created it the same way as we did the previous level,
9458 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9464 arg "depth-increment"
9468 \begin_inset Separator parbreak
9475 \begin_layout Standard
9480 environment, nested inside of
9481 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9485 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9489 So, it's at level #4.
9490 We did this by entering
9493 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9499 arg "depth-increment"
9502 , then changing the paragraph environment to
9507 Do this to create list items with more than one paragraph — it also works
9523 \begin_layout Standard
9528 paragraph, also at level #4, made with just a
9531 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9537 \begin_layout Labeling
9538 \labelwidthstring MMM
9539 #4-a This is level #4.
9543 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9546 and changed the paragraph environment back to
9551 Remember — we can't nest anything inside a
9555 environment, which is why we're still at level #4.
9560 keep nesting things inside
9561 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9565 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9569 \begin_inset Separator parbreak
9576 \begin_layout Labeling
9577 \labelwidthstring MMM
9578 #5-a This is level #5\SpecialChar ldots
9580 \begin_inset Separator parbreak
9587 \begin_layout Labeling
9588 \labelwidthstring MMM
9589 #6-a \SpecialChar ldots
9590 and this is level #6.
9591 By now, you should know how we made these two.
9595 \begin_layout Labeling
9596 \labelwidthstring MMM
9597 #5-b Back to level #5.
9601 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9607 arg "depth-decrement"
9614 \begin_layout Labeling
9615 \labelwidthstring MMM
9619 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9625 arg "depth-decrement"
9628 , we're back at level #4.
9632 \begin_layout Labeling
9633 \labelwidthstring MMM
9634 #3-b Back to level #3.
9635 By now it should be obvious how we did this.
9639 \begin_layout Labeling
9640 \labelwidthstring MMM
9641 #2-b Back to level #2.
9646 \begin_layout Labeling
9647 \labelwidthstring MMM
9648 #1-b And last, back to the outermost level, #1.
9649 After this sentence, we will enter
9653 and change the paragraph environment back to
9660 \begin_layout Standard
9661 We could have also used the
9677 environment in place of the
9682 The example would have worked exactly the same.
9685 \begin_layout Subsubsection
9686 Example 2: Inheritance
9689 \begin_layout LyX-Code
9690 This is the \SpecialChar LyX
9691 -Code environment, at level #1, the outermost
9694 \begin_layout LyX-Code
9703 arg "depth-increment"
9707 \begin_inset Newline newline
9710 which, we will change to the
9715 \begin_inset Separator parbreak
9722 \begin_layout Enumerate
9727 environment, at level #2.
9730 \begin_layout Enumerate
9731 Notice how the nested
9735 not only inherits its margins from its parent environment (
9740 ), but also inherits its font and spacing!
9744 \begin_layout Standard
9745 We ended this example by entering
9750 After that, we needed to reset the paragraph environment to
9754 and reset the nesting depth by using
9757 arg "depth-decrement"
9763 \begin_layout Subsubsection
9764 Example 3: Labels, Levels, and the
9773 \begin_inset Argument 1
9776 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9777 Example #3: Labels, Levels and other list environments
9785 \begin_layout Enumerate
9786 This is level #1, in an
9790 paragraph environment.
9791 We're actually going to nest a bunch of these.
9792 \begin_inset Separator parbreak
9799 \begin_layout Enumerate
9804 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9810 arg "depth-increment"
9814 Now, what happens if we nest an
9818 environment inside of this one? It will be at level #3, but what will its
9819 label be? An asterisk?
9820 \begin_inset Separator parbreak
9827 \begin_layout Itemize
9837 environment, even though it's at level #3.
9838 So, its label is a bullet.
9839 (We got here by using
9842 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9848 arg "depth-increment"
9851 , then changing the environment to
9856 \begin_inset Separator parbreak
9863 \begin_layout Itemize
9864 Here's level #4, produced using
9867 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9873 arg "depth-increment"
9877 We will do that again\SpecialChar ldots
9879 \begin_inset Separator parbreak
9886 \begin_layout Enumerate
9889 This time, however, we also changed the paragraph environment back to
9894 Notice the type of numbering, it is
9898 , because we are in the
9906 environment (that is, it is an
9921 \begin_layout Enumerate
9926 change the paragraph environment, but decrease the nesting depth? What
9927 type of numbering does \SpecialChar LyX
9931 \begin_layout Enumerate
9932 Oh, as if you couldn't guess by now, we're just using
9935 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9938 to keep the current environment and depth but create a new item.
9941 \begin_layout Enumerate
9945 arg "depth-decrement"
9948 to decrease the depth after the next
9951 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9958 \begin_layout Enumerate
9960 Look what type of label \SpecialChar LyX
9965 \begin_layout Enumerate
9967 Even though we've changed levels, \SpecialChar LyX
9968 is still using a lowercase Roman numeral
9972 \begin_layout Enumerate
9973 Because, even though the nesting depth has changed, the paragraph is
9982 Notice, however, that \SpecialChar LyX
9987 reset the counter for the label.
9991 \begin_layout Enumerate
9995 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10001 arg "depth-decrement"
10004 sequence, and we're back to level #2.
10005 This time, we not only changed the nesting depth, but we also moved back
10006 into the twofold-nested
10014 \begin_layout Enumerate
10015 The same thing happens if we do another
10018 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10024 arg "depth-decrement"
10027 sequence and return to level #1, the outermost level.
10030 \begin_layout Standard
10031 Lastly, we reset the environment to
10036 As you can see, the level number doesn't correspond to what type of labeling
10047 The number of other
10051 environments surrounding it determines what kind of label \SpecialChar LyX
10058 The same rule applies for the
10062 environment, as well.
10065 \begin_layout Subsubsection
10066 Example 4: Going Bonkers
10069 \begin_layout Enumerate
10070 We're going to go totally nuts now.
10071 We will not nest as deep as in the other examples, nor will we go into
10072 the same detail with how we did it.
10078 \begin_inset Separator parbreak
10085 \begin_layout Standard
10093 arg "depth-increment"
10100 : level #2) We will stick an encapsulated description of how we created
10101 the example in parentheses someplace.
10102 For example, the two key bindings are how we changed the depth.
10103 The environment name is the name of the current environment.
10104 Either before or after this, we will put in the level.
10108 \begin_layout Enumerate
10113 : level #1) This is the next item in the list.
10114 \begin_inset Separator parbreak
10121 \begin_layout Verse
10122 Now we will add verse.
10123 \begin_inset Newline newline
10126 It will get much worse.
10127 \begin_inset Newline newline
10137 arg "depth-increment"
10147 \begin_layout Verse
10148 Fiddle dee, Fiddle doo.
10149 \begin_inset Newline newline
10152 Bippitey boppitey boo!
10153 \begin_inset Newline newline
10159 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10167 \begin_layout Verse
10168 Here comes a table:
10169 \begin_inset Separator parbreak
10176 \begin_layout Standard
10177 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
10183 \begin_layout Standard
10185 \begin_inset Tabular
10186 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
10187 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
10188 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
10189 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
10191 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
10194 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10209 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10212 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10229 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
10232 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10247 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10250 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10274 \begin_layout Verse
10278 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10288 arg "depth-increment"
10294 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10300 \begin_inset Newline newline
10308 arg "depth-decrement"
10315 \begin_layout Enumerate
10320 : level #1) This is another item.
10321 Note that selecting a
10325 resets the nesting depth to level #1, so we increased the nesting depth
10326 3 times to put the table inside the
10334 \begin_layout Quotation
10335 We're now ending the
10339 list and changing to
10344 We're still at level #1.
10345 We want to show you some of the things you can do by mixing environments.
10346 The next set of paragraphs is a
10347 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10351 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10354 We will nest both the
10361 \begin_inset space ~
10366 environments inside of this one, then use another nested
10370 for the letter body.
10374 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10377 to preserve the depth.
10378 Remember that you need to use
10381 arg "newline-insert newline"
10384 to create multiple lines inside the
10391 \begin_inset space ~
10398 \begin_inset Separator parbreak
10405 \begin_layout Right Address
10407 \begin_inset Newline newline
10410 Moosegroin, MT 00100
10411 \begin_inset Newline newline
10417 \begin_layout Address
10419 \begin_inset space ~
10425 \begin_layout Quotation
10426 We regret to inform you that we cannot fill your order for 50
10427 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10430 L of compressed methane gas due to circumstances beyond our control.
10431 Unfortunately, several of our cows have mysteriously exploded, creating
10432 a backlog in our orders for methane.
10433 We will place your name on the waiting list and try to fill your order
10434 as soon as possible.
10435 In the meantime, we thank you for your patience.
10438 \begin_layout Quotation
10439 We do, however, now have a special on beef.
10440 If you are interested, please return the enclosed pricing and order form
10441 with your order, along with payment.
10444 \begin_layout Quotation
10445 We thank you again for your patience.
10448 \begin_layout Address
10450 \begin_inset Newline newline
10457 \begin_layout Quotation
10458 That ends that example!
10461 \begin_layout Standard
10462 As you can see, nesting environments in \SpecialChar LyX
10463 gives you a lot of power with just
10465 We could have easily nested an
10486 You have a huge variety of options at your disposal.
10489 \begin_layout Subsection
10491 \begin_inset Index idx
10494 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10495 Nesting ! Separation
10501 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10503 name "subsec:Separate-Nestings"
10510 \begin_layout Standard
10511 It is sometimes necessary to have two consecutive environments of the same
10513 For example you need two different enumerations:
10516 \begin_layout Enumerate
10518 \begin_inset Separator parbreak
10525 \begin_layout Enumerate
10527 \begin_inset Separator parbreak
10534 \begin_layout Enumerate
10538 \begin_layout Standard
10539 \begin_inset Separator parbreak
10545 \begin_layout Itemize
10551 \begin_layout Standard
10552 \begin_inset Separator parbreak
10558 \begin_layout Enumerate
10562 \begin_layout Enumerate
10566 \begin_layout Enumerate
10570 \begin_layout Standard
10571 To tell \SpecialChar LyX
10572 that there are two lists and not one, set the cursor at the end
10573 of the last item and use the menu
10575 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
10576 Start New Parent Environment
10579 This adds an environment separator and a new list behind it.
10580 If you use instead the menu
10582 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
10583 Start New Environment
10585 a new list will also be created, but in the same nesting level.
10588 \begin_layout Standard
10589 To split an existing list into two lists, set the cursor at the end of a
10591 \change_deleted -1966299584 1432227810
10593 \change_inserted -1966299584 1432227815
10599 arg "paragraph-break"
10603 \change_deleted -1966299584 1432227824
10608 in the pull-down box for environments in \SpecialChar LyX
10610 \change_inserted -1966299584 1432229616
10611 until you get an environment separator in the form of a small angled arrow.
10612 The only difference between this separator and the one you obtain by using
10613 the menu (a reddish line) is that it will also insert a blank line in the
10619 \change_inserted -1966299584 1432230601
10620 However, each kind of separator can be turned into the other kind by right-clic
10621 king it and choosing the wanted type through the context menu that opens.
10622 In general, you get an environment separator when you press
10625 arg "paragraph-break"
10628 in a Standard environment immediately after a non-Standard one.
10629 Thus, in a normal workflow, you can insert two consecutive environments
10630 of the same type by simply pressing
10633 arg "paragraph-break"
10636 until you get an environment separator, after which any other kind of environme
10637 nt can be inserted (even of the same type).
10640 \begin_layout Standard
10642 \change_inserted -1966299584 1432231566
10643 If you load documents produced with a previous version of \SpecialChar LyX
10645 that the angled-arrow separator may appear at the end of a line.
10646 In this case it is not used to separate environments but rather to assure
10647 that the same \SpecialChar LaTeX
10648 output is obtained.
10649 Indeed, previous versions of \SpecialChar LyX
10650 could insert spurious blank lines in the
10652 output, which are now avoided.
10653 As those blank lines may affect vertical spacing, \SpecialChar LyX
10654 takes care that you
10655 obtain the same results as before.
10656 You can safely remove the separators automatically inserted for this purpose
10657 if you like better the resulting vertical spacing.
10662 \begin_layout Section
10663 Spacing, pagination and line breaks
10664 \begin_inset Index idx
10667 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10676 \begin_layout Standard
10677 What is a space? While you might be used to pressing the space key anytime
10678 you want to separate two words in ordinary word processors, \SpecialChar LyX
10680 more spaces: spaces of different widths and spaces which can or cannot
10681 be broken at the end of a line.
10682 The following sections will show you some examples where those spaces are
10686 \begin_layout Subsection
10688 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10690 name "subsec:Protected-Space"
10695 \begin_inset Index idx
10698 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10707 \begin_layout Standard
10708 The protected space: It is used to tell \SpecialChar LyX
10709 (and \SpecialChar LaTeX
10710 ) not to break the line at
10712 This may be necessary to avoid unlucky line breaks, like in:
10715 \begin_layout Quote
10716 Further documentation is given in section
10717 \begin_inset Newline newline
10721 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
10723 reference "sec:Bibliography"
10731 \begin_layout Standard
10732 Obviously, it would be a good thing to put a protected space between
10733 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10737 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10741 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10745 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
10747 reference "sec:Bibliography"
10752 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10756 A protected space is set with
10758 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
10759 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
10761 \begin_inset space ~
10769 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
10775 \begin_layout Subsection
10777 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10779 name "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
10784 \begin_inset Index idx
10787 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10788 Spacing ! Horizontal
10796 \begin_layout Standard
10797 All horizontal spaces can be inserted with the menu
10799 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
10800 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
10804 The length units are listed in Appendix
10805 \begin_inset space ~
10809 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
10811 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
10818 \begin_layout Subsubsection
10820 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10822 name "subsec:Inter-word-Space"
10827 \begin_inset Index idx
10830 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10831 Spaces ! Inter-word
10839 \begin_layout Standard
10840 With the introduction of typewriters, it became conventional in some countries
10841 to type two spaces after a period to mimic the wider spaces used by typesetters
10842 at the ends of sentences.
10843 There is no need to do this as \SpecialChar LyX
10844 automatically takes care about this.
10845 However, you do not want an end of sentence space after an abbreviation
10846 followed by a period; see section
10847 \begin_inset space ~
10851 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
10853 reference "subsec:Abbreviations"
10858 To insert a normal space, select
10860 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
10861 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
10863 \begin_inset space ~
10871 arg "space-insert normal"
10877 \begin_layout Subsubsection
10879 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10881 name "subsec:Thin-Space"
10886 \begin_inset Index idx
10889 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10898 \begin_layout Standard
10900 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10904 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10907 is a blank which has half the size of a normal space (and it is also
10908 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10912 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10916 The typographical conventions in a lot of languages propose the use of
10917 thin spaces in cases where normal spaces would be too wide, for instance,
10918 inside abbreviations:
10921 \begin_layout Quote
10923 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10927 Knuth has developed our beloved typesetting program.
10930 \begin_layout Standard
10931 or between values and units.
10932 Compare for example this:
10933 \begin_inset Newline newline
10937 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10941 \begin_inset Newline newline
10944 10 kg (normal space
10947 \begin_layout Standard
10948 You can insert thin spaces with the menu
10950 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
10951 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
10953 \begin_inset space ~
10961 arg "space-insert thin"
10967 \begin_layout Subsubsection
10971 \begin_layout Standard
10972 You can also insert the following space types:
10975 \begin_layout Description
10977 \begin_inset space ~
10981 \begin_inset space ~
10984 space A line with a
10985 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10989 \begin_inset space \negthinspace{}
10993 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10996 negative thin space between the arrows.
10999 \begin_layout Description
11001 \begin_inset space ~
11005 \begin_inset space ~
11008 space A line with a
11009 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11013 \begin_inset space \negmedspace{}
11017 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11020 negative medium space between the arrows.
11023 \begin_layout Description
11025 \begin_inset space ~
11029 \begin_inset space ~
11032 space A line with a
11033 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11037 \begin_inset space \negthickspace{}
11041 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11044 negative thick space between the arrows.
11047 \begin_layout Description
11049 \begin_inset space ~
11053 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11057 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11061 \begin_inset space \enskip{}
11065 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11069 \begin_inset space ~
11073 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11076 em) space between the arrows.
11079 \begin_layout Description
11081 \begin_inset space ~
11085 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11089 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11093 \begin_inset space \quad{}
11097 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11101 \begin_inset space ~
11105 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11108 em) space between the arrows.
11111 \begin_layout Description
11113 \begin_inset space ~
11117 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11121 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11125 \begin_inset space \qquad{}
11129 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11133 \begin_inset space ~
11137 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11140 em) space between the arrows.
11143 \begin_layout Description
11145 \begin_inset space ~
11149 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11153 \begin_inset space \hspace{}
11158 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11162 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11165 cm space between the arrows.
11168 \begin_layout Standard
11170 \begin_inset space ~
11174 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11176 reference "tab:Width-of-the"
11180 lists the different space sizes.
11183 \begin_layout Standard
11184 \begin_inset Float table
11189 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11190 \begin_inset Caption Standard
11192 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11193 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11195 name "tab:Width-of-the"
11199 Width of the different horizontal spaces.
11207 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11209 \begin_inset Tabular
11210 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="10" columns="2">
11211 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
11212 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
11213 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
11215 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11218 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11226 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11229 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11239 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11242 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11248 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11251 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11253 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11263 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11266 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11272 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11275 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11277 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11287 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11290 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11296 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11299 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11301 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11311 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11314 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11320 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11323 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11325 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11329 \begin_inset Formula $\thinspace=\thinspace$
11333 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11343 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11346 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11352 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11355 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11357 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11367 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11370 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11376 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11379 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11381 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11391 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11394 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11396 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11404 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11407 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11409 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11419 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11422 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11424 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11432 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11435 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11437 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11447 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11450 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11452 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11460 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11463 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11465 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11486 \begin_layout Subsubsection
11488 \begin_inset Index idx
11491 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11500 \begin_layout Standard
11501 Horizontal fills (HFills) are a special \SpecialChar LyX
11502 feature for adding extra space
11503 in a uniform fashion.
11504 An HFill is actually a variable length space, whose length always equals
11505 the remaining space between the left and right margins.
11506 If there is more than one HFill on a line, they divide the available space
11507 equally between themselves.
11510 \begin_layout Standard
11511 Here are a few examples of what you can do with them:
11514 \begin_layout Quote
11516 This is on the left side
11517 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11520 This is on the right
11523 \begin_layout Quote
11526 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11530 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11536 \begin_layout Quote
11539 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11543 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11547 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11553 \begin_layout Standard
11554 That was an example in the
11560 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11564 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11568 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11571 is one in a standard paragraph.
11572 It may or may not be apparent in the printed text, but it
11576 sitting in-between the two arrows.
11579 \begin_layout Standard
11580 HFills can be made visible when you choose one of the
11583 \begin_inset space ~
11588 s in the space dialog: The following patterns are available:
11591 \begin_layout Standard
11593 \begin_inset space \dotfill{}
11597 \begin_inset space ~
11603 \begin_layout Standard
11605 \begin_inset space \hrulefill{}
11609 \begin_inset space ~
11615 \begin_layout Standard
11617 \begin_inset space \leftarrowfill{}
11621 \begin_inset space ~
11627 \begin_layout Standard
11629 \begin_inset space \rightarrowfill{}
11633 \begin_inset space ~
11639 \begin_layout Standard
11641 \begin_inset space \downbracefill{}
11645 \begin_inset space ~
11651 \begin_layout Standard
11653 \begin_inset space \upbracefill{}
11657 \begin_inset space ~
11663 \begin_layout Standard
11664 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
11667 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11672 If an HFill is at the beginning of a line, and
11676 in the first line in a paragraph, \SpecialChar LyX
11678 This prevents HFills from accidentally being wrapped onto a new line.
11679 If you need space in this case anyway, set the
11683 option in the space dialog.
11691 \begin_layout Subsubsection
11693 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11695 name "subsec:Phantom-Space"
11700 \begin_inset Index idx
11703 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11712 \begin_layout Standard
11713 Sometimes you want to insert space with exactly the length of a phrase.
11714 For example, you want to create the following multiple choice question:
11717 \begin_layout Standard
11718 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
11721 What is correct English?:
11722 \begin_inset Newline newline
11726 \begin_inset Newline newline
11730 \begin_inset space ~
11733 Edge would have been jumps the gun.
11734 \begin_inset Newline newline
11738 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
11741 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11749 \begin_inset Newline newline
11753 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
11756 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11764 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
11770 \begin_layout Standard
11772 so that the choices appear exactly after the phrase
11773 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11777 \begin_inset space ~
11781 \begin_inset space ~
11785 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11789 To get this, you can use the phantom insets available via the menu
11791 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
11792 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
11796 In our case insert a horizontal phantom at the beginning of the last two
11798 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11802 \begin_inset space ~
11806 \begin_inset space ~
11810 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11813 into the phantom inset (note the space after
11814 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11818 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11822 A phantom insets prints only the space of its content (like a placeholder).
11823 That is why it is named
11824 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11828 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11832 The normal phantom outputs the width and height of the content as space,
11833 while the horizontal and vertical variant only outputs the corresponding
11837 \begin_layout Subsection
11839 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11841 name "subsec:Vertical-Space"
11846 \begin_inset Index idx
11849 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11858 \begin_layout Standard
11859 To add extra vertical space above or below a paragraph, use the
11861 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
11862 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
11864 \begin_inset space ~
11870 There you find the following sizes:
11873 \begin_layout Standard
11886 are \SpecialChar LaTeX
11887 sizes which depend on the font size of the document.
11892 is the skip adjusted in the dialog
11894 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
11895 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
11897 \begin_inset space ~
11903 \begin_inset Index idx
11906 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11907 Document ! Settings
11912 for the paragraph separation.
11913 If you use indentation to separate paragraphs
11924 \begin_layout Standard
11930 \begin_inset Index idx
11933 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11939 is a variable space, set so that the space is maximal within one page.
11940 An example: you have only two short paragraphs on one page with a
11945 Then the first paragraph is placed at the top of the page and the second
11946 one at the bottom, because the space between them is then maximal.
11955 s: they fill the remaining vertical space on a page with blank space.
11959 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11964 s are described in section
11965 \begin_inset space ~
11969 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11971 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
11980 If there are several
11984 s on a page, they divide the remaining vertical space equally between themselves.
11985 You can therefore use
11989 s to center text on a page, or even place text 2/3 down a page.
11992 \begin_layout Standard
11997 are custom spaces in units explained in Appendix
11998 \begin_inset space ~
12002 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12004 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
12011 \begin_layout Standard
12012 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
12015 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12022 If the extra vertical space would be in the output at the top/bottom of
12023 a page, the space is only added if you have also checked the option
12035 \begin_layout Subsection
12036 Paragraph Alignment
12037 \begin_inset Index idx
12040 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12041 Paragraph ! Alignment
12049 \begin_layout Standard
12050 You can change the paragraph alignment with the
12052 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
12055 dialog (toolbar button
12058 arg "layout-paragraph"
12062 There are five possibilities:
12065 \begin_layout Itemize
12073 arg "paragraph-params \\align block"
12079 \begin_layout Itemize
12087 arg "paragraph-params \\align left"
12093 \begin_layout Itemize
12101 arg "paragraph-params \\align right"
12107 \begin_layout Itemize
12115 arg "paragraph-params \\align center"
12121 \begin_layout Itemize
12129 arg "paragraph-params \\align default"
12135 \begin_layout Standard
12136 The default in most cases is justified alignment, in which the inter-word
12137 spacing is variable and each line of a paragraph fills the region between
12138 the left and right margins.
12139 The other three alignments should be self-explanatory, and look like this:
12140 \begin_inset Separator parbreak
12146 \begin_layout Standard
12148 This paragraph is right aligned,
12151 \begin_layout Standard
12153 this one is centered,
12156 \begin_layout Standard
12158 this one is left aligned.
12161 \begin_layout Subsection
12163 \begin_inset Index idx
12166 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12167 Page breaks ! Forced
12173 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12175 name "subsec:Forced-Page-Breaks"
12182 \begin_layout Standard
12183 If you don't like the way \SpecialChar LaTeX
12184 does the page breaks in your document, you can
12185 force a page break where you want one.
12186 Normally this will not be necessary, because \SpecialChar LaTeX
12187 is good at page breaking.
12188 Only if you use a lot of
12192 , \SpecialChar LaTeX
12193 's page breaking algorithm can fail.
12196 \begin_layout Standard
12197 We recommend you not to use forced page breaks until the text is finished
12198 and you have checked in the preview to see if you
12202 have to change the page breaking.
12205 \begin_layout Standard
12206 There are two types of page breaks: One that ends the page without any special
12208 This can be inserted above or below a paragraph via the menu
12210 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12211 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12213 \begin_inset space ~
12219 The second type, that is inserted via the menu
12221 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12222 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12224 \begin_inset space ~
12229 , ends a page but stretches the content of the page, so that it fills out
12231 This type is useful to avoid whitespace when a page break produces a page
12232 on which only the last few lines are absent.
12235 \begin_layout Standard
12236 You might try to use a page break to ensure that a figure or table appears
12237 at the top of a page.
12238 This is, of course, the wrong way to do it.
12240 gives you a way of automatically ensuring that your figures and tables
12241 appear at the top of a page (or the bottom, or on their own page) without
12242 having to worry about what precedes or follows your figure or table.
12244 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12246 reference "chap:Floats-and-Notes"
12250 to learn more about
12257 \begin_layout Subsubsection
12259 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12261 name "subsec:Clear-Page-Breaks"
12266 \begin_inset Index idx
12269 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12270 Page breaks ! Clear
12278 \begin_layout Standard
12279 Rather than forced page breaks where the content behind the break is placed
12280 directly on the next page, you can also clear pages while breaking them.
12281 That means that the current paragraph is terminated and everything, including
12282 unprocessed floats, from the earlier part of the document are placed after
12283 it, if necessary by adding pages.
12286 \begin_layout Standard
12287 You can insert a clear page break with the menu
12289 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12290 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12292 \begin_inset space ~
12298 When you have a two-sided document like a book, you can use the menu
12300 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12301 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12303 \begin_inset space ~
12307 \begin_inset space ~
12312 to insert a clear page break that assures that the next page is a right-hand
12313 page (odd-numbered), if necessary by adding a page.
12316 \begin_layout Subsection
12318 \begin_inset Index idx
12321 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12328 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12330 name "subsec:Forced-Line-Breaks"
12337 \begin_layout Standard
12338 Similar to page breaks there are two types of line breaks: one simply breaks
12340 You can force this line break within a paragraph by selecting
12342 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12343 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12345 \begin_inset space ~
12349 \begin_inset space ~
12357 arg "newline-insert newline"
12361 Another type that is inserted via the menu
12363 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12364 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12366 \begin_inset space ~
12370 \begin_inset space ~
12378 arg "newline-insert linebreak"
12381 breaks the line and stretches it so that it fills out the whole space between
12383 This is useful to avoid
12384 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12388 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12391 in justified paragraphs due to possible whitespace introduced by line breaks.
12394 \begin_layout Standard
12395 You shouldn't use forced line breaks to correct \SpecialChar LaTeX
12396 's line breaking, as \SpecialChar LaTeX
12398 very good at line breaking.
12399 There are, however, a number of situations where it is necessaryactively
12400 to set a line break, for example, in a poem or for an address (see sections
12401 \begin_inset space ~
12405 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12407 reference "sec:Quote"
12412 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12414 reference "sec:Verse"
12419 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12421 reference "sec:Address-Usage"
12428 \begin_layout Subsection
12430 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12432 name "subsec:Horizontal-Lines"
12437 \begin_inset Index idx
12440 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12449 \begin_layout Standard
12451 \begin_inset CommandInset line
12462 \begin_layout Standard
12466 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12467 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12469 \begin_inset space ~
12474 you can insert horizontal lines.
12475 The line offset is the vertical distance between the line and the baseline
12476 of the current text line or the paragraph.
12477 The line settings can be changed by left-clicking on the line.
12480 \begin_layout Standard
12482 \begin_inset CommandInset line
12493 \begin_layout Section
12494 Characters and Symbols
12497 \begin_layout Standard
12498 You can directly enter all characters that are available on your keyboard.
12499 You can also use special keyboard maps to be able to enter, for example,
12500 characters needed for French with an English keyboard.
12502 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12506 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12508 reference "subsec:Keyboard-mapping"
12512 for information on how this is done.
12515 \begin_layout Standard
12516 For the case where you need a character that is not on your keyboard, you
12521 dialog via the menu
12523 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12524 Special Character\SpecialChar menuseparator
12530 \begin_layout Standard
12531 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
12534 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12539 Maybe not all symbols inserted with the symbols dialog can be displayed
12540 when you are using a special screen font in \SpecialChar LyX
12542 But the inserted symbols will in every case be displayed in the output.
12550 \begin_layout Section
12551 Fonts and Text Styles
12552 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12554 name "sec:Fonts-and-Text"
12561 \begin_layout Subsection
12563 \begin_inset Index idx
12566 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12575 \begin_layout Standard
12576 There are two types of fonts:
12579 \begin_layout Description
12581 \begin_inset space ~
12585 \begin_inset Index idx
12588 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12594 are built from outlines of the single glyphs (e.
12595 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12599 characters) in the font.
12600 This means that each glyph is defined using mathematical curves that are
12601 well suited for scaling to any requested size.
12602 This mathematical definition is interpreted by the font renderer and the
12603 curve is filled out with pixels according to the size and glyph.
12604 This means that vector fonts will look pretty good in all sizes.
12605 Only at very small sizes where each pixel has to be very carefully computed
12606 to provide a good image might it be hard to provide a good rendering.
12607 \begin_inset Newline newline
12610 That could mean that one only needs to define one font size and scale them.
12611 But to achieve a better quality, many fonts define several font sizes.
12612 That improves the appearance because you need more details at large font
12613 sizes than at small ones.
12614 \begin_inset Newline newline
12628 \begin_inset space ~
12636 \begin_layout Description
12638 \begin_inset space ~
12642 \begin_inset Index idx
12645 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12651 on the other hand, are defined by bitmap graphics from the start; so they
12652 will look good at all the sizes they are meant for.
12653 However, they don't scale well, because in order to scale a glyph, each
12654 pixel is enlarged into several pixels.
12655 It is the same effect that happens if you try to enlarge a picture in an
12656 image manipulation program.
12657 In order to mitigate this effect, bitmap fonts are typically provided in
12658 several fixed sizes typically from around 8
12659 \begin_inset space ~
12662 pixels high up to 34
12663 \begin_inset space ~
12666 pixels or so high in steps according to what is believed to be useful.
12667 The advantage of bitmap fonts is that no complicated computations are necessary
12668 to display each glyph; so bitmap fonts display therefore more quickly than
12670 The disadvantage is that sizes that don't exist as fixed versions have
12671 to be scaled by doubling pixels, and thus look bad.
12672 \begin_inset Newline newline
12675 Bitmap fonts are named
12678 \begin_inset space ~
12683 in PostScript- and PDF-documents.
12686 \begin_layout Standard
12687 The result of all this is that bitmap fonts are best for the size they are
12688 designed for, while scalable fonts are good for nearly all sizes.
12689 So one needs fewer font size definitions for scalable fonts.
12690 That's the reason why nearly all text rendering and typesetting programs
12691 use scalable fonts.
12694 \begin_layout Standard
12695 To see which fonts are used in a PDF-document, look at its document properties.
12698 \begin_layout Standard
12699 Many modern typesetting and markup languages have begun to move towards
12700 specifying character styles rather than specifying a particular font.
12701 For example, instead of changing to an italicized version of the current
12702 font to emphasize text, you use an
12703 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12707 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12711 This concept fits in perfectly with \SpecialChar LyX
12713 In \SpecialChar LyX
12714 , you do things based on contexts, rather than focusing on typesetting
12718 \begin_layout Subsection
12721 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12723 name "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
12730 \begin_layout Standard
12731 Traditionally, \SpecialChar LaTeX
12732 used its own fonts.
12733 That is to say, you cannot directly access the fonts installed on your
12734 operating system, but you have to use specific fonts provided by your \SpecialChar LaTeX
12737 The reason is that \SpecialChar LaTeX
12738 needs some extra information about the fonts, which
12739 have to be provided by additional files and packages.
12740 The downside of this is that your font choice is somewhat limited compared
12741 to a word processor.
12742 On the other hand this comes with the advantage that the provided fonts
12743 are generally of very good quality, and that \SpecialChar LaTeX
12744 files are very portable across
12745 different machines.
12746 Also, the range of fonts supported by traditional \SpecialChar LaTeX
12747 has increased a lot
12748 in the meantime; so you can find packages for many free and commercial
12751 supports the fonts that are under a free license via the user interface
12753 \begin_inset space ~
12757 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12759 reference "subsec:Document-Font"
12764 Other fonts are available if you enter the relevant \SpecialChar LaTeX
12765 code in the document
12766 preamble (please refer to the documentation of your desired font).
12769 \begin_layout Standard
12770 Recent developments brought some new \SpecialChar LaTeX
12771 engines that are also able directly
12772 to access fonts that are installed for your operating system, namely Xe\SpecialChar TeX
12774 and Lua\SpecialChar TeX
12776 Both engines are supported by \SpecialChar LyX
12778 By using them, you can theoretically use any OpenType or TrueType font
12779 that is installed on your system.
12780 The next section describes how to use these fonts.
12783 \begin_layout Standard
12784 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
12787 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12792 In practice, some fonts might fail due to bad metrics and other font deficienci
12793 es; so you might have to experiment.
12801 \begin_layout Standard
12802 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
12805 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12811 and especially Lua\SpecialChar TeX
12812 , are still rather new and thus not as mature as tradition
12813 al \SpecialChar LaTeX
12814 or PDF\SpecialChar TeX
12823 \begin_layout Subsection
12824 Document Font and Font size
12825 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12827 name "subsec:Document-Font"
12832 \begin_inset Index idx
12835 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12842 \begin_inset Index idx
12845 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12854 \begin_layout Standard
12855 You can set the document fonts in the
12857 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
12861 \begin_inset Index idx
12864 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12865 Document ! Settings
12875 section of the dialog, you can specify which font should be used for the
12876 three different font shapes — roman (serif),
12879 \begin_inset space ~
12888 (monospaced) — and you can specify the base font size and scaling factors
12890 \begin_inset space ~
12893 serif and typewriter fonts if this is necessary to fit with the roman font.
12896 \begin_layout Standard
12903 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12912 , you will have access to the fonts installed on your operating system.
12913 This requires that you use
12919 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12934 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12949 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12958 as the output format, i.
12959 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12963 \begin_inset space \space{}
12966 you will have to have either Xe\SpecialChar TeX
12967 or Lua\SpecialChar TeX
12968 installed (see section
12969 \begin_inset space ~
12973 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12975 reference "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
12980 You will then not have access to \SpecialChar TeX
12982 Note that \SpecialChar LyX
12983 then lists all available fonts in each of the three lists (roman,
12985 \begin_inset space ~
12988 serif, and typewriter), since \SpecialChar LyX
12989 cannot determine the family.
12990 Also note that the output might fail with some of the listed fonts, due
12991 to the encoding of the fonts and\SpecialChar breakableslash
12994 cannot determine this in advance, so you might need to experiment.
12997 \begin_layout Standard
12998 If you use \SpecialChar TeX
12999 fonts (which is the default), the possible options for the font
13004 and a list of fonts available with your \SpecialChar LaTeX
13010 the font that is preset by the current document class is used.
13011 In most cases, this will be the standard \SpecialChar TeX
13013 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13019 \begin_inset space ~
13025 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13033 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13038 European Computer Modern
13041 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13048 ), but some classes preset different default fonts.
13051 \begin_layout Standard
13060 are bitmap fonts, they often look pixelated in PDF output, especially when
13061 you read the PDF in a zoomed size.
13065 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13066 This problem does not appear if you read PDFs in
13069 \begin_inset space ~
13074 version 6 or later, because this program includes a special bitmap font
13080 To get rid of pixelated fonts, you have to use a vector font.
13081 Depending on how your document should look, you can either:
13084 \begin_layout Itemize
13088 \begin_inset space ~
13093 fonts, which is the recommended choice if you want to keep the look of
13106 \begin_inset space ~
13111 was developed for the \SpecialChar LaTeX
13112 community in order to replace
13116 as the default font.
13117 It covers a huge range of glyphs and several font shapes.
13118 Except for some details, where the appearance was improved,
13121 \begin_inset space ~
13134 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13135 One difference is improved kerning.
13143 \begin_layout Itemize
13147 \begin_inset space ~
13151 \begin_inset space ~
13156 fonts in (the rare) case that
13159 \begin_inset space ~
13164 is not available to you or does not work, and you still want to emulate
13179 Virtual means that it
13180 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13184 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13191 -glyphs from other fonts.
13192 This has the disadvantage that some characters are missing, like the French
13194 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13198 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13202 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13206 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13213 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13214 Loading the \SpecialChar LaTeX
13220 \begin_inset Index idx
13223 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13225 -packages ! aeguill
13230 with the document preamble line
13231 \begin_inset Newline newline
13238 usepackage[ec]{aeguill}
13239 \begin_inset Newline newline
13244 will fix the guillemet problem.
13249 and that accented characters are not
13253 glyph, but built of
13257 characters, the accent and the letter.
13258 Therefore you cannot search for words with accented characters in documents
13264 If you search for example for the French word
13265 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13269 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13272 in a PDF, you will not get any result, because the PDF-viewer searches
13274 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13278 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13281 and not for the glyph
13282 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13286 \begin_inset space ~
13290 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13296 \begin_layout Itemize
13297 If you do not like the look of
13305 , you can of course select one of the other vector fonts provided, e.
13306 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13310 \begin_inset space ~
13316 \begin_inset space ~
13326 Most roman vector fonts will automatically select matching sans
13327 \begin_inset space ~
13330 serif and typewriter fonts,
13334 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13335 These are sometimes just matching other fonts (e.
13336 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13342 \begin_inset space ~
13351 for sans serif text), or different shapes of the same font, i.
13352 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13356 \begin_inset space \space{}
13364 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13368 \begin_inset space \space{}
13374 \begin_inset space ~
13382 \begin_inset space ~
13392 but you can also select your own.
13393 \begin_inset Newline newline
13396 The differences between roman,
13399 \begin_inset space ~
13408 fonts are explained in section
13409 \begin_inset space ~
13413 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13415 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
13420 \begin_inset Newline newline
13426 \begin_inset space ~
13431 was originally designed for newspapers.
13432 Its glyphs are thus smaller than glyphs from other fonts in order to fit
13433 into the small newspaper columns.
13437 \begin_inset space ~
13442 is not the optimal choice for larger documents like books.
13445 \begin_layout Standard
13446 For the font size there are generally four possible values:
13459 Some classes provide additional sizes.
13464 depends on the class you are using.
13465 In the standard classes it is equal to the font size 10.
13468 \begin_layout Standard
13469 Note that the font size is the
13474 That means that \SpecialChar LyX
13475 scales all other possible font sizes (such as those used
13476 in footnotes, super-, and subscripts) by this value.
13477 You can fine-tune the font size of text parts via the
13480 \begin_inset space ~
13486 The possible font sizes for text parts are explained in section
13487 \begin_inset space ~
13491 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13493 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
13500 \begin_layout Standard
13504 \begin_inset space ~
13509 selection lets you specify whether the base font of your document should
13511 \begin_inset space ~
13514 serif or typewriter.
13519 selection uses what is preset by the class, the other selections override
13529 , but some classes (such as presentation classes) use other defaults.
13532 \begin_layout Standard
13541 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13550 selection is an expert setting which lets you change the value passed to
13551 the \SpecialChar LaTeX
13557 \begin_inset Index idx
13560 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13562 -packages ! fontenc
13568 \begin_inset space ~
13572 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13574 reference "subsec:LaTeX-settings"
13579 Normally, you do not need to change (or even understand) this.
13580 Unless you have specific reasons, use
13587 \begin_layout Standard
13588 With some fonts, the checkboxes
13590 Use Old Style Figures
13594 Use True Small Caps
13597 These are extra features some fonts provide.
13600 Use Old Style Figures
13602 is checked, old style figures (also known as medieval or text figures)
13604 Old style figures are the numerals (0
13605 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13609 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13612 9) with ascenders and descenders, which makes them fit nicely with lowercase
13616 Use True Small Caps
13618 determines that real small caps are used instead of faked small caps made
13619 of scaled capitals.
13620 Real small caps are often part of expert font sets; they generally look
13621 better than faked small caps but might have to be purchased separately.
13624 \begin_layout Standard
13629 allows users of the languages Chinese, Japanese, Korean (CJK) to specify
13630 a font to display the script characters.
13634 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13635 The font will be the argument for the commands of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
13641 \begin_inset Index idx
13644 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13651 So this has no effect for the document language
13665 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
13669 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
13672 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13677 When you choose a new font or font size, \SpecialChar LyX
13682 change the screen font! You will only see a difference in the printed output;
13683 this is part of the WYSIWYM concept.
13685 's screen fonts can be adjusted in the
13687 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
13690 dialog, see section
13691 \begin_inset space ~
13695 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13697 reference "subsec:Screen-Fonts"
13709 \begin_layout Subsection
13713 \begin_layout Standard
13714 In \SpecialChar LaTeX
13715 the font used for characters in equations is different from the document
13717 For the case that you use \SpecialChar TeX
13718 fonts for your document, you can explicitly
13719 choose a math font in the dialog
13721 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
13725 \begin_inset Index idx
13728 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13729 Document ! Settings
13735 The default setting is that \SpecialChar LyX
13736 automatically selects a math font.
13737 For most cases this will be \SpecialChar LaTeX
13738 's default – the math variant of \SpecialChar LaTeX
13741 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13747 \begin_inset space ~
13753 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13758 will automatically only load another math font if a math variant of the
13759 document font is available.
13762 \begin_layout Standard
13763 Note that the math font will not be used for
13767 (which is inserted with the shortcut
13773 or by the insertion of the command
13780 Also note that some math fonts are sans
13781 \begin_inset space ~
13785 Your document might therefore look strange when the document text has serifs
13786 while the math characters do not.
13788 \begin_inset space ~
13791 serif math fonts make therefore in most cases only sense if you select
13794 \begin_inset space ~
13802 \begin_inset space ~
13807 in the document font settings.
13810 \begin_layout Standard
13811 If you use non-\SpecialChar TeX
13812 fonts for the document, you can only choose for math to
13813 use either the document's class default \SpecialChar TeX
13814 font (in most cases
13815 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13821 \begin_inset space ~
13827 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13830 ) or to use the non-\SpecialChar TeX
13831 variant of the document's class default font (in most
13833 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13839 \begin_inset space ~
13845 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13851 \begin_layout Subsection
13852 Using Different Character Styles
13853 \begin_inset Index idx
13856 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13863 \begin_inset Index idx
13866 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13875 \begin_layout Standard
13876 As we've already seen, \SpecialChar LyX
13877 automatically changes the character style for certain
13878 paragraph environments.
13880 supports two character styles,
13889 You can activate both of these styles via key bindings, the menus, and
13893 \begin_layout Standard
13898 style, do one of the following:
13901 \begin_layout Itemize
13902 click on the toolbar button
13911 \begin_layout Itemize
13912 use the key binding
13921 \begin_layout Standard
13922 These commands are all toggles.
13927 style is already active, they deactivate it.
13930 \begin_layout Standard
13931 One typically uses the
13935 style for proper names.
13937 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13944 is the original author of \SpecialChar LyX
13946 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13952 \begin_layout Standard
13953 A more widely used character style is the
13958 You can activate (or deactivate — it's also a toggle) the
13965 \begin_layout Itemize
13966 clicking on the toolbar button
13975 \begin_layout Itemize
13976 using the keybindings
13985 \begin_layout Standard
13990 style is equivalent to an italic font but some document classes or \SpecialChar LaTeX
13992 use a different font.
13995 \begin_layout Standard
13996 We've been using the
14000 style all over the place in this document.
14001 Here's one more example:
14004 \begin_layout Quotation
14007 Do not overuse character styles!
14010 \begin_layout Standard
14011 It's also a warning in addition to an example.
14012 One's writing should parallel ordinary conversation.
14013 Since we don't all constantly scream at each other, we should also avoid
14014 the common tendency to overuse character styles.
14018 \begin_layout Standard
14019 You can always reset to the default font using the key binding
14027 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
14029 \begin_inset space ~
14032 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
14038 arg "dialog-show character"
14044 \begin_layout Subsection
14045 Fine-Tuning with the
14050 \begin_inset CommandInset label
14052 name "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
14057 \begin_inset Index idx
14060 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14069 \begin_layout Standard
14070 There are always occasions when you will need to do some fine-tuning; so
14072 gives you a way to create a custom character style.
14073 For example, an academic journal or a corporation may have a style sheet
14074 requiring a sans-serif font be used in certain situations.
14075 Also, writers sometimes use a different font to offset a character's thoughts
14076 from ordinary dialog.
14079 \begin_layout Standard
14080 Before we document how to use custom character style, we want to issue a
14081 warning yet again: Don't overuse character styles!
14082 \begin_inset Newline newline
14085 Documents that overuse different fonts and sizes are not easy to read and
14086 tend to look as if someone has knocked huge holes in them.
14089 \begin_layout Standard
14090 To use custom character styles, open the
14092 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
14094 \begin_inset space ~
14097 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
14100 dialog or press the toolbar button
14103 arg "dialog-show character"
14107 There are several boxes in this dialog, each corresponding to a different
14108 font property that you can choose.
14109 You can choose an option for one of these properties, or select
14112 \begin_inset space ~
14117 , which keeps the current state of that property.
14122 will reset the property to whatever is the default.
14123 You can use this to reset attributes across a bunch of different paragraph
14124 environments all at once.
14127 \begin_layout Standard
14128 The font properties, and their options (in addition to
14131 \begin_inset space ~
14143 \begin_layout Labeling
14144 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14150 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14154 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14158 The possible options are:
14159 \begin_inset Separator parbreak
14166 \begin_layout Labeling
14167 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14172 This is the Roman font family.
14173 Normally a serif font.
14174 It's also the default family.
14184 \begin_layout Labeling
14185 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14189 \begin_inset space ~
14196 This is the Sans Serif font family.
14208 \begin_layout Labeling
14209 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14216 This is the Typewriter font family.
14222 arg "font-typewriter"
14231 \begin_layout Labeling
14232 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14237 This corresponds to the print weight.
14239 \begin_inset Separator parbreak
14246 \begin_layout Labeling
14247 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14252 This is the Medium font series.
14253 It's also the default series.
14256 \begin_layout Labeling
14257 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14264 This is the Bold font series.
14277 \begin_layout Labeling
14278 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14283 As the name implies.
14285 \begin_inset Separator parbreak
14292 \begin_layout Labeling
14293 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14298 This is the Upright font shape.
14299 It's also the default shape.
14302 \begin_layout Labeling
14303 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14317 s the Italic font shape
14323 \begin_layout Labeling
14324 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14331 This is the Slanted font shape
14333 (although it might not be visible in \SpecialChar LyX
14334 , this is different from italic).
14337 \begin_layout Labeling
14338 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14342 \begin_inset space ~
14349 This is the Small caps font shape
14356 \begin_layout Labeling
14357 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14362 Alters the text color.
14363 Note that not all DVI-viewers are able to display colors.
14367 \begin_inset space ~
14372 , which means that the document default color set in
14374 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
14375 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
14381 \begin_inset space ~
14386 is used, you can choose between
14419 \begin_inset Index idx
14422 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14431 \begin_layout Labeling
14432 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14437 This is used to mark regions of text as having a different language from
14438 the language of the document.
14439 Text marked in this way will be underlined in blue to indicate the change
14440 (only within \SpecialChar LyX
14442 \begin_inset Newline newline
14445 If you have for example, an extract of German text in a non-German document,
14447 respects the German hyphenation rules automatically.
14448 When using the spell checking (see section
14449 \begin_inset space ~
14453 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
14455 reference "sec:Spellchecking"
14459 ) the German-marked text will be checked according to the German dictionary.
14462 \begin_layout Labeling
14463 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14468 Alters the size of the font.
14469 You will find no numerical values here; all possible sizes are actually
14470 proportional to the document font size.
14471 Once again, you don't feed \SpecialChar LyX
14472 the details, but a general description of what
14475 \begin_inset Separator parbreak
14482 \begin_layout Labeling
14483 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14491 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14495 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14504 arg "font-size tiny"
14510 \begin_layout Labeling
14511 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14519 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14523 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14532 arg "font-size scriptsize"
14538 \begin_layout Labeling
14539 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14547 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14551 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14560 arg "font-size footnotesize"
14566 \begin_layout Labeling
14567 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14575 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14579 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14588 arg "font-size small"
14594 \begin_layout Labeling
14595 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14601 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14605 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14609 It's also the default size.
14613 arg "font-size normal"
14619 \begin_layout Labeling
14620 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14628 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14632 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14641 arg "font-size large"
14647 \begin_layout Labeling
14648 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14656 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14660 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14669 arg "font-size larger"
14675 \begin_layout Labeling
14676 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14684 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14688 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14697 arg "font-size largest"
14703 \begin_layout Labeling
14704 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14712 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14716 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14725 arg "font-size huge"
14731 \begin_layout Labeling
14732 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14740 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14744 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14753 arg "font-size giant"
14759 \begin_layout Labeling
14760 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14765 This increases the size by one step (for instance, from
14766 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14770 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14774 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14778 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14785 arg "font-size increase"
14791 \begin_layout Labeling
14792 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14797 This decreases the size by one step (for instance, from
14798 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14802 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14806 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14810 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14817 arg "font-size decrease"
14824 \begin_layout Standard
14829 : don't go crazy with this feature.
14830 You should almost never need to change the font size.
14832 automatically changes the font size for different paragraph environments
14833 — use those instead.
14834 This is here for fine-tuning only!
14837 \begin_layout Labeling
14838 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14843 Here you can change a few other things at the character level.
14845 \begin_inset Separator parbreak
14852 \begin_layout Labeling
14853 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14860 This is text with emphasize on
14863 This might seem like the same as
14867 , but it is actually a bit different.
14873 That means every document class can define its own font used for emphasized
14875 Normally this font is equal to italic.
14878 \begin_layout Labeling
14879 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14886 This is text with Underbar on.
14892 arg "font-underline"
14898 \begin_inset Newline newline
14903 Avoid using underbar if you can! It is a hangover from the typewriter days,
14904 when you could not change fonts.
14905 One no longer needs to emphasize text by underscoring characters.
14906 This is only possible in \SpecialChar LyX
14907 because some people
14911 need it in order to follow style sheets for journal submissions.
14914 \begin_layout Labeling
14915 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14919 \begin_inset space ~
14926 This is text with Double underbar on.
14932 arg "font-underunderline"
14936 \begin_inset Newline newline
14939 As we just warned you against using underbar, you can imagine what we think
14940 about double underbar.
14943 \begin_layout Labeling
14944 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14948 \begin_inset space ~
14955 This is text with Wavy underbar on.
14961 arg "font-underwave"
14965 \begin_inset Newline newline
14968 Use this only if a journal absolutely insists on it.
14969 Keep antinausea pills handy.
14972 \begin_layout Labeling
14973 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14980 This is text with Strikeout on.
14986 arg "font-strikeout"
14990 \begin_inset Newline newline
14993 This is frequently used to indicate an older version of text that has been
14994 changed in the meantime.
14997 \begin_layout Labeling
14998 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15005 This is text with Noun on.
15012 , this is a logical attribute.
15013 Normally it's equivalent to
15016 \begin_inset space ~
15025 \begin_layout Standard
15026 So you have a huge number of combinations to choose from.
15027 Once you have chosen a new character style via the
15029 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
15031 \begin_inset space ~
15034 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
15040 arg "dialog-show character"
15043 ) dialog, the settings are saved.
15044 You can activate them by using the toolbar button
15047 arg "textstyle-apply"
15051 The button lets you apply your custom character style even when the dialog
15055 \begin_layout Standard
15056 To completely reset the character style to the default, use
15063 If you want to toggle only those properties that you have just changed
15064 (suppose you just set the shape to
15065 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15069 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15073 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15077 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15083 \begin_inset space ~
15095 \begin_layout Standard
15096 You should also know something about the differences between the three main
15104 \begin_inset space ~
15116 \begin_layout Itemize
15122 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15126 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15129 font, which means every character has the same width; the
15130 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15134 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15138 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15142 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15147 \begin_inset Newline newline
15151 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
15154 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15165 \begin_inset Note Note
15168 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15169 For more on phantoms see section
15170 \begin_inset space ~
15174 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15176 reference "subsec:Phantom-Space"
15186 \begin_inset Newline newline
15192 \begin_layout Itemize
15197 fonts use characters with serifs.
15198 These are the small
15199 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15203 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15206 at the ends of the strokes that form the character.
15207 The following example shows the difference:
15208 \begin_inset Newline newline
15212 \begin_inset Newline newline
15217 text without serifs
15220 \begin_inset Newline newline
15223 Serifs facilitate quick and easy reading.
15224 These fonts are therefore used as default (named
15231 \begin_layout Itemize
15236 is not recommended for use as a base type.
15237 This font type is therefore often only used for headings and short texts.
15238 We use it in this document to highlight menu names.
15241 \begin_layout Standard
15242 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15246 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15249 refers to applying or removing font properties.
15250 When a property is marked for toggling in the
15253 \begin_inset space ~
15258 dialog, applying the style to text that already has the property will cause
15259 the property to be removed.
15260 If you, for example, apply a style with properties A, B and C to text that
15261 currently has font properties B, C, F and G, and if B is set to toggle
15262 and C is set not to toggle, the text ends up with properties A, C, F and
15265 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15269 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15273 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15277 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15280 mean that you do not control the toggling behavior.
15281 For the properties on the left side of the dialog (
15282 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15286 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15289 etc.), toggling behavior is up to you.
15293 \begin_inset space ~
15298 is checked, all of the left side properties are toggled; by default, none
15301 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15305 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15309 If you, for example, set
15310 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15314 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15318 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15322 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15328 \begin_inset space ~
15333 , then apply the style to bold face text, the text will revert to the default
15335 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15339 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15342 ), no matter how many times you apply the style.
15345 \begin_layout Standard
15346 We conclude with the same warning once again: Do not overuse the fonts!
15347 They are, more often than not, a kludge and a bad substitute for good writing.
15350 \begin_layout Section
15351 Printing and Previewing
15354 \begin_layout Subsection
15358 \begin_layout Standard
15359 Now that we have covered some of the basic features of document preparation
15360 using \SpecialChar LyX
15361 , you probably want to know how to print out your masterpiece.
15362 Before we tell you that, we want to give you a quick explanation of what
15363 goes on behind-the-scenes.
15364 We cover this information in much greater detail in the
15366 Additional Features
15371 \begin_layout Standard
15373 uses the program \SpecialChar LaTeX
15376 is just a macro package for the \SpecialChar TeX
15377 typesetting system, but to prevent confusion,
15378 we will only refer to \SpecialChar LaTeX
15381 is what you use to do your actual writing.
15382 Then, \SpecialChar LyX
15383 calls \SpecialChar LaTeX
15384 to turn your writing into printable output.
15385 This happens in two stages:
15388 \begin_layout Enumerate
15389 First, \SpecialChar LyX
15390 converts your document to a series of text commands for \SpecialChar LaTeX
15392 a file with the extension,
15393 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15401 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15407 \begin_layout Enumerate
15408 Next, \SpecialChar LyX
15409 calls \SpecialChar LaTeX
15410 to use the commands in the
15414 file to produce printable output.
15417 \begin_layout Subsection
15418 Output file formats
15419 \begin_inset Index idx
15422 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15429 \begin_inset CommandInset label
15431 name "subsec:Output-file-formats"
15438 \begin_layout Subsubsection
15439 Simple text (ASCII)
15440 \begin_inset Index idx
15443 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15444 File formats ! ASCII
15452 \begin_layout Standard
15453 This file type has the extension
15454 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15462 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15466 It contains your document as plain text following the rules of the
15467 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15470 American Standard Code for Information Interchange
15471 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15477 \begin_layout Standard
15478 You can export your document to ASCII with the menu
15480 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
15481 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
15483 \begin_inset space ~
15489 However, this will not export any externally generated material such as
15490 a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
15491 bibliography (section
15492 \begin_inset space ~
15496 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15498 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
15503 If your document includes such material, use
15505 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
15506 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
15508 \begin_inset space ~
15512 \begin_inset space ~
15516 \begin_inset space ~
15524 \begin_inset space ~
15528 \begin_inset space ~
15534 This will first internally export your document to PostScript (generating
15535 thereby the external material) and then do the conversion to ASCII.
15538 \begin_layout Subsubsection
15541 \begin_inset Index idx
15544 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15545 File formats ! \SpecialChar LaTeX
15554 \begin_layout Standard
15555 This file type has the extension
15556 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15564 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15567 and contains all commands that are necessary for the \SpecialChar LaTeX
15570 If you know \SpecialChar LaTeX
15571 , you can use it to find out \SpecialChar LaTeX
15572 -Errors or to process it manually
15573 with console commands.
15574 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
15575 -file is automatically created in \SpecialChar LyX
15576 's temporary directory whenever you
15577 view or export your document.
15580 \begin_layout Standard
15581 You can export your document as a \SpecialChar LaTeX
15582 -file using the menu
15584 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
15585 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
15590 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15600 The different \SpecialChar LaTeX
15601 export variants are explained in section
15602 \begin_inset space ~
15606 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15608 reference "subsec:Export"
15615 \begin_layout Subsubsection
15617 \begin_inset Index idx
15620 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15629 \begin_layout Standard
15630 This file type has the extension
15631 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15639 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15644 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15648 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15651 (DVI), because it is completely portable; you can move them from one machine
15652 to another without needing to do any sort of conversion.
15653 DVIs are used for quick previews and as a pre-stage for other output formats,
15657 \begin_layout Standard
15658 DVI files do not contain images, they only link to them.
15659 So don't forget to deliver the images together with your DVIs.
15660 Because the DVI-viewer has to convert the images in the background to make
15661 them visible when you scroll the DVI, this can slow down your computer
15662 when you view the DVI.
15663 So we recommend using PDF for files with many images.
15666 \begin_layout Standard
15667 You can export your document to DVI by the menus
15669 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
15670 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
15675 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
15676 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
15678 \begin_inset space ~
15685 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15695 The latter option uses the program
15697 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
15703 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
15706 is an engine that provides direct Unicode support and support for direct
15707 font access (see section
15708 \begin_inset space ~
15712 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15714 reference "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
15719 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
15720 is still a work in progress, but it might develop into the next standard
15725 \begin_layout Subsubsection
15727 \begin_inset Index idx
15730 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15731 File formats ! PostScript
15739 \begin_layout Standard
15740 This file type has the extension
15741 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15749 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15753 PostScript was developed by the company
15757 as a printer language.
15758 The file therefore contains commands that the printer uses to print the
15760 PostScript can be seen as a
15761 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15764 programming language
15765 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15768 ; you can calculate with it and draw diagrams and images.
15772 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15773 If you are interested in learning more about this, have a look at the \SpecialChar LaTeX
15780 \begin_inset Index idx
15783 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15785 -packages ! pstricks
15795 As a result of this, the files are often bigger than PDFs.
15798 \begin_layout Standard
15799 PostScript can only contain images in the format
15800 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15803 Encapsulated PostScript
15804 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15807 (EPS, file extension
15808 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15816 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15820 As \SpecialChar LyX
15821 allows you to use any known image format in your document, it has to
15822 convert them in the background to EPS.
15823 If, for example, you have 50
15824 \begin_inset space ~
15827 images in your document, \SpecialChar LyX
15829 \begin_inset space ~
15832 conversions when you view or export your document the first time.
15833 This might slow down your workflow with \SpecialChar LyX
15835 So if you plan to use PostScript, you can insert your images directly as
15836 EPS to avoid this problem.
15839 \begin_layout Standard
15840 You can export to PostScript using the menu
15842 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
15843 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
15849 \begin_layout Subsubsection
15851 \begin_inset Index idx
15854 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15861 \begin_inset Index idx
15864 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15873 \begin_layout Standard
15874 This file type has the extension
15875 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15883 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15888 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15891 Portable Document Format
15892 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15899 was derived from PostScript.
15900 It is more compressed and it uses fewer commands than PostScript.
15902 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15906 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15909 implies, it can be processed on any computer system and the printed output
15910 looks exactly the same.
15913 \begin_layout Standard
15914 PDF can contain images in its own PDF format and in the formats
15915 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15918 Joint Photographic Experts Group
15919 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15922 (JPG, file extension
15923 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15931 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15935 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15943 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15947 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15950 Portable Network Graphics
15951 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15954 (PNG, file extension
15955 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15963 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15967 You can also use any other image format, because \SpecialChar LyX
15968 converts them in the
15969 background to one of these formats.
15970 But as described in the section about PostScript, the image conversion
15971 will slow down your workflow.
15972 So we recommend using images in one of the three formats mentioned above.
15975 \begin_layout Standard
15976 You can export your document to PDF via the menu
15978 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
15984 \begin_layout Description
15986 \begin_inset space ~
15989 (pdflatex) This uses the program
15993 which converts your file directly to PDF.
15996 \begin_layout Description
15998 \begin_inset space ~
16005 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16012 X) This uses the program
16014 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
16017 which converts your file directly to PDF.
16020 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
16023 is a new engine, derived from
16027 , that also provides direct Unicode support and support for direct font
16028 access (see section
16029 \begin_inset space ~
16033 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
16035 reference "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
16040 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
16041 is still a work in progress, but it might develop into the next standard
16046 \begin_layout Description
16048 \begin_inset space ~
16055 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16062 X) This uses the program
16067 that converts your file directly to PDF.
16073 is a new engine that provides direct Unicode support and support for direct
16074 font access (see section
16075 \begin_inset space ~
16079 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
16081 reference "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
16086 It is particularly good at typesetting different scripts, for example,
16087 vertically written Japanese.
16090 \begin_layout Description
16092 \begin_inset space ~
16095 (cropped) This is the same as
16098 \begin_inset space ~
16103 but the result is a PDF with cropped page margins.
16104 This is for example useful if you want to use \SpecialChar LyX
16105 to generate good-looking
16106 formulas to use them in other programs like for presentations.
16109 \begin_layout Description
16111 \begin_inset space ~
16114 (dvipdfm) This uses the program
16118 that converts your file in the background to DVI and in a second step to
16122 \begin_layout Description
16124 \begin_inset space ~
16127 (ps2pdf) This uses the program
16131 that creates a PDF from a PostScript-version of your file.
16132 The PostScript-version is produced by the program
16136 which uses a DVI-version as intermediate step.
16137 So this export variant consists of three conversions.
16140 \begin_layout Standard
16144 \begin_inset space ~
16153 supports all the features of actual PDF-versions, is quick, stable, and
16154 works without problems.
16155 If you rely on multiscript support and\SpecialChar breakableslash
16156 or specific OpenType fonts, you might
16160 \begin_inset space ~
16167 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16179 \begin_inset space ~
16186 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16195 instead, bearing in mind that these two programs are not yet as mature
16203 \begin_layout Subsubsection
16205 \begin_inset Index idx
16208 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16209 FileFormats ! XHTML
16215 \begin_inset Index idx
16218 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16227 \begin_layout Standard
16228 This file type has the extension
16229 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16237 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16241 It is a file suitable for viewing in web browsers.
16242 It does not itself contain images and the like but only links to them.
16243 When \SpecialChar LyX
16244 produces XHTML, it also generates corresponding images in formats
16245 suitable for the purpose.
16246 For the math output you can choose in the menu
16248 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
16249 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
16252 between different formats, which are described in section
16254 Math Output in XHTML
16259 \begin_inset space ~
16267 \begin_layout Standard
16268 XHTML output remains
16269 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16273 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16276 , and not all \SpecialChar LyX
16277 features are supported yet.
16281 and the World Wide Web
16285 Additional Features
16287 manual, for more information.
16290 \begin_layout Standard
16291 You can export your document as an XHTML file using the menu item
16293 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
16294 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
16301 \begin_layout Subsection
16303 \begin_inset Index idx
16306 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16315 \begin_layout Standard
16316 To get a look at the final version of your document, with all of the page
16317 breaks in place, the footnotes correctly numbered, and so on, use the menu
16326 or use the toolbar button
16333 A viewing program will pop up showing the output in the defined default
16334 output format, which is globally set in the preferences (see sec.
16335 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
16339 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
16341 reference "sec:File-Formats"
16345 ) and can also be altered for single documents in the document settings
16347 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
16351 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
16353 reference "sec:Doc-Output"
16358 Further output formats can be selected via
16360 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
16361 View (Other Formats)
16363 or the toolbar button
16364 \begin_inset Graphics
16365 filename ../images/view-others.png
16367 groupId toolbarbuttons
16374 \begin_layout Standard
16375 If you have changed your document, you can refresh the output in the same
16376 viewer window using the menu
16378 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
16383 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
16384 Update (Other Formats)
16389 \begin_layout Standard
16390 When you preview a file, the output file is only generated in \SpecialChar LyX
16393 To have a real output, export your document.
16396 \begin_layout Subsection
16397 Printing the File from within \SpecialChar LyX
16399 \begin_inset CommandInset label
16401 name "subsec:Printing-the-File"
16408 \begin_layout Standard
16409 Instead of exporting your file and then printing it, you can also print
16410 it directly from within \SpecialChar LyX
16412 To print a file, select the menu
16414 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
16420 arg "dialog-show print"
16423 ) or click on the toolbar button
16426 arg "dialog-show print"
16431 will internally call \SpecialChar LaTeX
16433 This file is then processed by the program
16437 to a PostScript-file, which is finally printed using the program
16442 Due to these steps in the background, this method is not the fastest.
16445 \begin_layout Standard
16446 You can set the following print parameters in the
16449 \begin_inset space ~
16457 \begin_layout Labeling
16458 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16463 This is the name of the printer to print to.
16467 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16468 Note that this printer name is for the program
16477 has to be configured for this printer name.
16478 The default printer can be set in \SpecialChar LyX
16479 's preferences dialog, see section
16480 \begin_inset space ~
16484 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
16486 reference "subsec:Printer"
16495 The printer should understand PostScript.
16498 \begin_layout Labeling
16499 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16504 The name of a file to print to.
16505 The output will be a PostScript file.
16506 It will be written in \SpecialChar LyX
16507 's working directory unless you specify the full
16511 \begin_layout Standard
16512 You can choose to print only a range of pages, only even-numbered or only
16513 odd-numbered pages or to print the pages in reverse — the latter options
16514 are useful for printing on two sides with a printer without a duplexer:
16515 you re-insert the pages after printing one set to print on the other side.
16516 Some printers spit out pages face-up, others, face-down.
16517 By choosing a particular order to print in, you can take the entire stack
16518 of pages out of the printer without needing to reorder them.
16521 \begin_layout Section
16522 A few Words about Typography
16523 \begin_inset Index idx
16526 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16535 \begin_layout Subsection
16536 Hyphens, Dashes and Minus Signs
16537 \begin_inset Index idx
16540 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16547 \begin_inset Index idx
16550 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16559 \begin_layout Standard
16560 In \SpecialChar LyX
16562 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16570 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16573 character comes in four lengths: the
16585 , and the minus sign:
16586 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
16592 \begin_layout Standard
16593 \begin_inset Tabular
16594 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="5" columns="3">
16595 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
16596 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
16597 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
16598 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
16599 <row interlinespace="3mm">
16600 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
16603 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16609 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
16612 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16618 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
16621 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16628 <row interlinespace="3mm">
16629 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16632 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16638 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16641 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16647 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16650 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16651 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16659 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16668 <row interlinespace="3mm">
16669 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16672 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16678 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16681 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16687 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16690 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16693 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
16695 \begin_inset space ~
16698 Character\SpecialChar menuseparator
16705 <row interlinespace="3mm">
16706 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16709 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16715 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16718 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16724 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16727 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16730 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
16732 \begin_inset space ~
16735 Character\SpecialChar menuseparator
16743 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16746 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16752 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16755 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16756 \begin_inset Formula $-$
16764 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16767 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16768 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16776 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16790 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
16796 \begin_layout Standard
16797 You can alternatively generate the en and em dash by inserting the
16798 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16806 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16809 character multiple times in a row.
16810 They will automatically be converted to the appropriate length dash in
16811 the final output, but not in \SpecialChar LyX
16814 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16818 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
16822 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16826 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16830 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
16834 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
16838 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16844 \begin_layout Standard
16845 The three dash types are distinct from the minus sign, which appears in
16846 math mode and has a length of its own.
16847 Here are some examples:
16850 \begin_layout Enumerate
16851 line- and page-breaks
16852 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
16862 \begin_layout Enumerate
16864 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
16874 \begin_layout Enumerate
16875 Oh — there's a dash.
16876 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
16886 \begin_layout Enumerate
16887 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}-y^{2}=z^{2}$
16891 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
16901 \begin_layout Subsection
16903 \begin_inset Index idx
16906 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16913 \begin_inset CommandInset label
16915 name "subsec:Hyphenation"
16922 \begin_layout Standard
16923 Words are not hyphenated within \SpecialChar LyX
16924 but automatically in the output.
16925 Hyphenation is done by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
16931 \begin_inset Index idx
16934 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16941 following the rules of the document language.
16944 \begin_layout Standard
16946 hyphenates almost perfectly; it only has problems with text in the
16950 font and with unusual constructs, like
16951 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16955 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16959 If \SpecialChar LaTeX
16960 cannot break a word correctly, you can set hyphenation points manually.
16961 This is done with the menu
16963 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
16964 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
16966 \begin_inset space ~
16972 These extra hyphenation points are only recommendations to \SpecialChar LaTeX
16974 If no hyphenation is necessary, \SpecialChar LaTeX
16978 \begin_layout Standard
16979 Sometimes you want to prevent words or constructs from being hyphenated.
16980 Imagine that you are describing keybindings/shortcuts in your document
16982 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16986 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16991 would then see the hyphen
16992 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16996 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16999 as a hyphenation possibility.
17000 Hyphenating at this point would look ugly.
17001 To prevent the shortcut from being hyphenated, you can put it into a makebox
17002 as described in section
17003 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17006 Prevent Hyphenation
17007 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17013 \begin_inset space ~
17021 \begin_layout Subsection
17023 \begin_inset Index idx
17026 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17035 \begin_layout Subsubsection
17036 Abbreviations and End of Sentence
17037 \begin_inset CommandInset label
17039 name "subsec:Abbreviations"
17046 \begin_layout Standard
17047 When \SpecialChar LyX
17048 calls \SpecialChar LaTeX
17049 to generate the final version of your document, \SpecialChar LaTeX
17051 distinguishes between words, sentences, and abbreviations.
17054 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17057 appropriate amount of space.
17058 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17061 That means sentences get a little bit more space between the period and
17063 Abbreviations get the same amount of space after the period that a word
17064 gets after another word.
17067 \begin_layout Standard
17068 Unfortunately, the algorithm for figuring out what's an abbreviation does
17069 not work in all cases.
17071 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17079 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17082 is at the end of a lowercase letter, it's the end of a sentence; if it's
17083 at the end of a capitalized letter, it's an abbreviation.
17086 \begin_layout Standard
17087 Here are some examples of
17091 abbreviations and of the end of a sentence:
17094 \begin_layout Itemize
17099 \begin_layout Itemize
17104 \begin_layout Standard
17105 And here is an example of the algorithm going wrong:
17108 \begin_layout Itemize
17110 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
17114 this is too much space!
17117 \begin_layout Itemize
17122 \begin_layout Standard
17123 You will not see anything wrong until you view a final version of your document.
17126 \begin_layout Standard
17127 To fix this problem, use one of the following:
17130 \begin_layout Enumerate
17134 \begin_inset space ~
17139 after lowercase abbreviations (see section
17140 \begin_inset space ~
17144 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
17146 reference "subsec:Inter-word-Space"
17151 \begin_inset Index idx
17154 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17155 Spaces ! inter-word
17163 \begin_layout Enumerate
17167 \begin_inset space ~
17172 between two tokens of an abbreviation (see section
17173 \begin_inset space ~
17177 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
17179 reference "subsec:Thin-Space"
17184 \begin_inset Index idx
17187 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17196 \begin_layout Enumerate
17200 \begin_inset space ~
17204 \begin_inset space ~
17208 \begin_inset space ~
17215 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
17217 \begin_inset space ~
17222 menu to force the use of inter-sentence spacing.
17223 This function is also bound to
17226 arg "specialchar-insert end-of-sentence"
17232 \begin_layout Standard
17233 With the corrections, our earlier examples look like this:
17236 \begin_layout Itemize
17238 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
17242 \begin_inset space \space{}
17245 this is too much space!
17248 \begin_layout Itemize
17249 This is I\SpecialChar endofsentence
17253 \begin_layout Standard
17254 Some languages don't use extra spacing between sentences.
17255 If your language is such a language, you don't need to worry, because \SpecialChar LaTeX
17257 will take care of this.
17260 \begin_layout Standard
17261 For those that do need to bother, there is help to catch those sneaky errors:
17265 \begin_inset space ~
17271 feature described in the section
17273 Checking \SpecialChar TeX
17278 Additional Features
17283 \begin_layout Subsubsection
17285 \begin_inset Index idx
17288 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17289 Typography ! Quotes
17295 \begin_inset Index idx
17298 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17303 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17314 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17329 \begin_layout Standard
17331 usually sets quotes correctly.
17332 Specifically, it will use an opening quote at the beginning of quoted text,
17333 and use a closing quote at the end.
17335 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17339 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17343 The keyboard character,
17347 , generates this automatically.
17350 \begin_layout Standard
17351 You can specify what character the
17355 key produces using the submenu
17361 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
17365 \begin_inset Index idx
17368 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17369 Document ! Settings
17379 There are six choices:
17382 \begin_layout Labeling
17383 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
17386 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17390 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17396 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17400 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17406 \begin_layout Labeling
17407 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
17410 \begin_inset Quotes sld
17414 \begin_inset Quotes srd
17420 \begin_inset Quotes sld
17424 \begin_inset Quotes srd
17430 \begin_layout Labeling
17431 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
17434 \begin_inset Quotes gld
17438 \begin_inset Quotes grd
17444 \begin_inset Quotes gld
17448 \begin_inset Quotes grd
17454 \begin_layout Labeling
17455 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
17458 \begin_inset Quotes pld
17462 \begin_inset Quotes prd
17468 \begin_inset Quotes pld
17472 \begin_inset Quotes prd
17478 \begin_layout Labeling
17479 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
17482 \begin_inset Quotes fld
17486 \begin_inset Quotes frd
17492 \begin_inset Quotes fld
17496 \begin_inset Quotes frd
17502 \begin_layout Labeling
17503 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
17506 \begin_inset Quotes ald
17510 \begin_inset Quotes ard
17516 \begin_inset Quotes ald
17520 \begin_inset Quotes ard
17526 \begin_layout Standard
17527 For single quotes you have to use the shortcut
17530 arg "quote-insert single"
17536 \begin_layout Subsection
17538 \begin_inset Index idx
17541 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17542 Typography ! Ligatures
17548 \begin_inset Index idx
17551 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17556 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17567 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17580 \begin_inset CommandInset label
17582 name "subsec:Ligatures"
17589 \begin_layout Standard
17590 It is standard typesetting practice to group certain letters together and
17591 print them as single characters.
17592 These groups are known as
17597 Since \SpecialChar LaTeX
17598 knows about ligatures, your documents will contain them too in the
17600 Here are the standard ligatures:
17603 \begin_layout Itemize
17607 \begin_layout Itemize
17611 \begin_layout Itemize
17615 \begin_layout Itemize
17619 \begin_layout Itemize
17623 \begin_layout Standard
17624 Some languages uses other ligatures if the document font supports them.
17627 \begin_layout Standard
17628 Sometimes, you don't want a ligature in a word.
17629 While a ligature may be okay in the word,
17630 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17634 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17637 it looks really weird in compound words, such as
17638 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17642 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17646 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17650 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17653 To break a ligature, use
17655 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
17656 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
17658 \begin_inset space ~
17665 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17669 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17673 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17676 cuff\SpecialChar ligaturebreak
17678 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17682 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17686 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17690 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17693 Dorf\SpecialChar ligaturebreak
17695 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17701 \begin_layout Subsection
17704 \begin_inset Index idx
17707 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17715 \begin_inset CommandInset label
17717 name "subsec:LyX's-Proper-Names"
17724 \begin_layout Standard
17725 You will certainly have noticed that the word “\SpecialChar LaTeX
17726 ” always appears with characters
17727 in different sizes and positions.
17729 is the name of the program used by \SpecialChar LyX
17730 and is therefore recognized as a proper
17731 name when you type it in \SpecialChar LyX
17733 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17740 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17748 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17752 \begin_inset Note Note
17755 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17756 The braces in \SpecialChar TeX
17757 Code are here to avoid that the Text appears as proper name
17758 in the output, see the last paragraph of this section.
17763 Note the order of the upper- and lowercase letters! \SpecialChar LyX
17764 recognizes the following
17768 \begin_layout Description
17770 The name of the game, write
17771 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17778 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17786 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17792 \begin_layout Description
17794 The program used by \SpecialChar LaTeX
17796 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17803 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17811 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17817 \begin_layout Description
17819 The program used by \SpecialChar LyX
17821 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17828 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17836 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17842 \begin_layout Description
17843 \SpecialChar LaTeX2e
17844 The actual version of \SpecialChar LaTeX
17846 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17853 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17861 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17867 \begin_layout Standard
17868 You might wonder why the \SpecialChar LaTeX
17870 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17874 \begin_inset Formula $\epsilon$
17878 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17882 It is an old tradition in the \SpecialChar TeX
17883 -world to give programs geek version numbers.
17884 For example the version number of \SpecialChar TeX
17885 converges to the number
17886 \begin_inset Formula $\pi$
17889 : The actual version is
17890 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17895 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17898 , the previous one was
17899 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17904 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17910 \begin_layout Standard
17911 If you don't want to use proper names, for example, in section headings,
17912 you can insert two empty braces in \SpecialChar TeX
17914 In \SpecialChar LyX
17915 this will look like
17916 \begin_inset Graphics
17917 filename clipart/LaTeX.png
17923 \begin_inset Newline newline
17926 For more about \SpecialChar TeX
17928 \begin_inset space ~
17932 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
17934 reference "sec:TeX-Code"
17941 \begin_layout Subsection
17943 \begin_inset Index idx
17946 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17955 \begin_layout Standard
17956 Generally the space between units and the number is smaller than the normal
17957 space between two words.
17958 As you can see in the example below, it looks better when the space is
17961 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17965 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17968 for units use the menu
17970 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
17971 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
17973 \begin_inset space ~
17981 arg "space-insert thin"
17987 \begin_layout Standard
17988 Here is an example to show the differences:
17991 \begin_layout Standard
17992 \begin_inset Tabular
17993 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
17994 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
17995 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
17996 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
17998 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
18001 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18003 \begin_inset space ~
18007 \begin_inset Formula $\cdot$
18015 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
18018 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18019 space between number and unit
18026 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
18029 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18031 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
18035 \begin_inset Formula $\cdot$
18043 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
18046 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18047 half space between number and unit
18060 \begin_layout Subsection
18062 \begin_inset Index idx
18065 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18066 Typography ! Widows and orphans
18074 \begin_layout Standard
18075 In the early days of word processors, page breaks went wherever the page
18077 There was no regard for what was actually going on in the text.
18078 For example the heading for a new section was printed at the very bottom
18079 of the page, the first line of a new paragraph all alone at the bottom
18080 of a page, or the last line of a paragraph at the top of a new page.
18081 These bits of text became known as
18092 \begin_layout Standard
18093 Clearly, \SpecialChar LyX
18094 can avoid breaking pages after a section heading.
18095 That's part of the advantage of paragraph environments.
18096 But what about widows and orphans, where the page breaks leave one line
18097 of a paragraph all alone at the top or bottom of a page? There are rules
18098 built into \SpecialChar LaTeX
18099 governing page breaks, and some of those rules are there specifical
18100 ly to prevent widows and orphans.
18101 If they appear nevertheless and you don't like them, you can add the commands
18102 \begin_inset Newline newline
18110 \begin_inset Newline newline
18118 \begin_inset Newline newline
18121 to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
18122 preamble of your document to avoid them.
18123 Some \SpecialChar LaTeX
18125 \begin_inset space ~
18129 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
18131 key "latexcompanion"
18136 \begin_inset space ~
18140 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
18146 ) have more information about the technical details of \SpecialChar LaTeX
18147 's page break mechanism.
18150 \begin_layout Chapter
18151 Notes, Graphics, Tables and Floats
18152 \begin_inset CommandInset label
18154 name "chap:Floats-and-Notes"
18161 \begin_layout Standard
18162 The issues of this chapter are described in detail in the
18165 \begin_inset space ~
18171 There you will also find tips and tricks for special cases.
18174 \begin_layout Section
18176 \begin_inset Index idx
18179 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18186 \begin_inset CommandInset label
18195 \begin_layout Standard
18197 offers you a few types of notes to add to your document:
18200 \begin_layout Description
18203 \begin_inset space ~
18206 Note This note type is for internal notes that will not appear in the output.
18207 \begin_inset Newline newline
18211 \begin_inset Note Note
18214 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18215 This is text in a note box that doesn't appear in the output.
18223 \begin_layout Description
18224 Comment This note also doesn't appear in the output but it does appear as
18225 a \SpecialChar LaTeX
18226 -comment when you export the document to \SpecialChar LaTeX
18229 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
18230 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
18235 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18243 \begin_inset space ~
18249 \begin_inset Newline newline
18253 \begin_inset Note Comment
18256 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18257 This is text in a note box that only appears as a comment in \SpecialChar LaTeX
18266 \begin_layout Description
18268 \begin_inset space ~
18271 Out This note will appear in the output as text in a color which you can
18272 set in the document settings under
18274 Colors\SpecialChar menuseparator
18276 \begin_inset space ~
18282 \begin_inset Newline newline
18286 \begin_inset Newline newline
18290 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
18293 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18298 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18299 This is an example footnote within a greyed out note.
18300 In this document the color of this note type is set to blue.
18305 of a comment that appears in the output.
18311 \begin_inset Newline newline
18315 \begin_inset Newline newline
18318 As you can see in the example, greyed out notes can have footnotes.
18321 \begin_layout Standard
18322 Notes are inserted with the toolbar button
18330 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
18334 Right-click on the note box that appears to select the note type.
18337 \begin_layout Section
18339 \begin_inset Index idx
18342 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18349 \begin_inset CommandInset label
18351 name "sec:Footnotes"
18358 \begin_layout Standard
18360 uses boxes to display footnotes: When you insert a footnote using the menu
18363 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
18366 or the toolbar button
18369 arg "footnote-insert"
18381 \begin_inset Graphics
18382 filename clipart/footnoteQt4.png
18391 This box is \SpecialChar LyX
18392 's representation of your footnote.
18402 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18410 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18421 label, the box will
18425 be opened and you can enter the footnote text into it.
18426 Clicking on the box label again will close
18439 If you want to turn existing text into a footnote, simply highlight it
18440 and click on the footnote
18455 \begin_layout Standard
18456 Here is an example footnote:
18464 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18465 To close a footnote, click on the footnote box label.
18473 \begin_layout Standard
18474 The footnote will appear in the output as a superscript number at the text
18475 position where the footnote box is placed.
18476 The footnote text is placed at the bottom of the current page.
18477 The footnote number is calculated by \SpecialChar LyX
18478 according to the document class.
18480 does not yet support a particular numbering scheme, but you can get other
18481 schemes using special \SpecialChar LaTeX
18487 ey are described in the
18490 \begin_inset space ~
18498 \begin_layout Section
18500 \begin_inset Index idx
18503 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18510 \begin_inset CommandInset label
18512 name "sec:Marginal-Notes"
18519 \begin_layout Standard
18520 Marginal notes look and behave just like footnotes in \SpecialChar LyX
18522 When you insert a margin note via the menu
18524 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
18526 \begin_inset space ~
18531 or the toolbar button
18534 arg "marginalnote-insert"
18553 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18557 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18560 appearing within your text.
18561 This box is \SpecialChar LyX
18562 's representation of your margin
18571 \begin_layout Standard
18572 At the side of this sentence is an example marginal note.
18576 \begin_inset Marginal
18579 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18581 This is a marginal note.
18589 \begin_layout Standard
18590 Marginal notes appear at the right side in single-sided documents.
18591 In double-sided documents they appear in the outer margin – left on even
18592 pages, right on odd pages.
18595 \begin_layout Standard
18596 For further information about marginal notes see the section
18599 \begin_inset space ~
18607 \begin_inset space ~
18615 \begin_layout Section
18616 Graphics and Images
18617 \begin_inset Index idx
18620 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18627 \begin_inset Index idx
18630 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18637 \begin_inset CommandInset label
18639 name "sec:Graphics"
18646 \begin_layout Standard
18647 To insert an image in your document, place the cursor at the text position
18648 you want and click on the toolbar icon
18651 arg "dialog-show-new-inset graphics"
18656 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
18660 Then a dialog will appear to choose the file to load.
18663 \begin_layout Standard
18664 This dialog has numerous mostly self-explanatory parameters.
18669 tab allows you to choose your image file.
18670 The image can be transformed by setting a rotation angle and a scaling
18672 The scaling units are explained in Appendix
18673 \begin_inset space ~
18677 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
18679 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
18686 \begin_layout Standard
18691 it is possible to set image coordinates to adjust the height and width
18692 of the image in the output.
18693 The coordinates can also be calculated automatically by pressing the button
18697 \begin_inset space ~
18701 \begin_inset space ~
18710 \begin_inset space ~
18714 \begin_inset space ~
18718 \begin_inset space ~
18723 will only print the image region within the given coordinates.
18724 Normally you don't need to take care about image coordinates and can ignore
18732 \begin_layout Standard
18739 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18747 \begin_inset space ~
18751 \begin_inset space ~
18758 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18767 tab \SpecialChar LaTeX
18768 experts can specify additional \SpecialChar LaTeX
18770 In this tab you can also specify the appearance of the image inside \SpecialChar LyX
18775 \begin_inset space ~
18780 has the effect that the image doesn't appear in the output, only a frame
18781 with the image size is printed.
18785 \begin_inset space ~
18789 \begin_inset space ~
18793 \begin_inset space ~
18798 is explained in the
18801 \begin_inset space ~
18813 \begin_layout Standard
18814 The graphics dialog can be called at any time by clicking on an image.
18815 Images will appear in the output exactly at the position where they are
18817 This is an example image within a separate, horizontally centered paragraph:
18818 \begin_inset Separator parbreak
18824 \begin_layout Standard
18826 \begin_inset Graphics
18827 filename clipart/mobius.eps
18835 \begin_layout Standard
18836 If you need image captions or want to reference images, you have to put
18837 the image into a float, see section
18838 \begin_inset space ~
18842 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
18844 reference "subsec:Figure-Floats"
18851 \begin_layout Subsection
18853 \begin_inset Index idx
18856 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18863 \begin_inset CommandInset label
18865 name "subsec:Image-Formats"
18872 \begin_layout Standard
18873 You can insert images in any known file format.
18874 But as we explained in section
18875 \begin_inset space ~
18879 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
18881 reference "subsec:Output-file-formats"
18885 , every output document format allows only a few image formats.
18887 therefore uses the program
18891 in the background to convert the images to the right format.
18892 To increase your workflow by avoiding these conversions in the background,
18893 use only the image formats listed in the subsections of section
18894 \begin_inset space ~
18898 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
18900 reference "subsec:Output-file-formats"
18907 \begin_layout Standard
18908 Similar to fonts there are two types of image formats:
18911 \begin_layout Description
18913 \begin_inset space ~
18916 images consist of pixel values, often in a compressed form.
18917 They are therefore not fully scalable and look pixelated in large zooms.
18918 Well-known bitmap image formats are
18919 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18922 Graphics Interchange Format
18923 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18926 (GIF, file extension
18927 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18935 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18939 \begin_inset Index idx
18942 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18947 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18958 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18971 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18974 Portable Network Graphics
18975 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18978 (PNG, file extension
18979 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18987 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18991 \begin_inset Index idx
18994 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18999 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19010 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19023 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19026 Joint Photographic Experts Group
19027 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19030 (JPG, file extension
19031 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19039 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19043 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19051 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19055 \begin_inset Index idx
19058 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19063 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19074 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19089 \begin_layout Description
19091 \begin_inset space ~
19094 images consist of vectors and can therefore be scaled to any size without
19096 The scaling ability is desired if you want to create presentations, because
19097 presentations are always scaled by the beamer.
19098 Scaling is also useful for online documents to let the user zoom into diagrams.
19099 \begin_inset Newline newline
19102 Scalable image formats can be
19103 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19106 Scalable Vector Graphics
19107 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19110 (SVG, file extension
19111 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19119 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19123 \begin_inset Index idx
19126 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19131 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19142 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19155 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19158 Encapsulated PostScript
19159 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19162 (EPS, file extension
19163 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19171 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19175 \begin_inset Index idx
19178 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19183 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19194 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19207 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19210 Portable Document Format
19211 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19214 (PDF, file extension
19215 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19223 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19227 \begin_inset Index idx
19230 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19238 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19242 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19245 , because you can convert any bitmap image format to PDF or EPS and the
19246 result will not be scalable.
19247 In this case only a header with the image properties is added to the original
19252 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19253 In the case of PDF, the original image is additionally compressed.
19261 \begin_layout Standard
19262 Normally one cannot convert a bitmap image into a scalable one, only
19269 \begin_layout Subsection
19270 Grouping of Image Settings
19271 \begin_inset Index idx
19274 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19275 Images ! Settings grouping
19283 \begin_layout Standard
19284 Each image can define a new group of image settings or join an existing
19286 Images within such a group share their settings, so adjusting one image
19287 of the group automatically also adjusts all other images of the group in
19289 So you can for example change the size for a bunch of images without the
19290 need to manually change each of them.
19294 \begin_layout Standard
19295 A new group can be set by pressing the button
19298 \begin_inset space ~
19302 \begin_inset space ~
19317 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19325 \begin_inset space ~
19329 \begin_inset space ~
19336 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19346 Joining an existing group can be done using the context menu of the image
19347 and checking the name of the desired group.
19350 \begin_layout Section
19352 \begin_inset Index idx
19355 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19362 \begin_inset CommandInset label
19371 \begin_layout Standard
19372 You can insert a table using either the toolbar button
19375 arg "tabular-insert"
19380 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
19384 A dialog will appear, asking you for the number of rows and columns.
19385 The default table has lines around any cell and the first row appears separated
19386 from the rest of the table.
19387 This separation appears due to a double line: The cells of the first row
19388 have a line below them and the cells of the second row have a line above
19390 Here is an example table:
19391 \begin_inset Separator parbreak
19397 \begin_layout Standard
19399 \begin_inset Tabular
19400 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="4" columns="4">
19401 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
19402 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
19403 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
19404 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0in">
19405 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
19407 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19410 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19416 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19419 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19434 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19437 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19443 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19446 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19454 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19457 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19472 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19475 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19481 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19484 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19490 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19493 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19501 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19504 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19519 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19522 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19528 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19531 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19541 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19544 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19552 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19555 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19570 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19573 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19579 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19582 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19588 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19591 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19605 \begin_layout Subsection
19609 \begin_layout Standard
19610 You can alter a table by clicking on it with the right mouse button and
19613 More\SpecialChar menuseparator
19617 This brings up the table dialog.
19618 Here you can adjust the settings of the cell, row and/or column where the
19619 cursor is placed currently.
19620 Most of the dialog options also work on selections.
19621 This means that if you select more cells, columns or rows the action is
19622 done on all of your selection.
19625 \begin_layout Standard
19626 In addition to the table dialog, the
19629 \begin_inset space ~
19634 helps you in setting table properties.
19635 It appears if the cursor is inside a table.
19638 \begin_layout Standard
19642 \begin_inset space ~
19647 of the table dialog you can set the alignment for the current row.
19648 If you add a row or column, it will be inserted right beside or below the
19649 current cell respectively.
19650 The vertical alignment of a column can only be adjusted when a column width
19652 A given width will allow the cell to have line breaks and multiple paragraphs
19653 of text, see section
19654 \begin_inset space ~
19658 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
19660 reference "subsec:Table-Cells"
19667 \begin_layout Standard
19668 You can mark multiple cells of one row/column as a multicolumn/row cell
19669 using the check box
19678 This will merge the cells to
19682 cell, spread over more than one column/row.
19683 Multicolumn cells are treated as own rows, so that the alignment, width,
19684 and border settings affect only the multicolumn cell.
19685 Here is an example table with a multicolumn cell in the first row and one
19686 in the last row without the upper border:
19687 \begin_inset Separator parbreak
19693 \begin_layout Standard
19695 \begin_inset Tabular
19696 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="3" columns="4">
19697 <features firstHeadTopDL="true" firstHeadBottomDL="true" tabularvalignment="middle">
19698 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
19699 <column alignment="center" valignment="middle">
19700 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0in">
19701 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
19703 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19706 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19712 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="middle" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19715 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19721 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19724 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19730 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19733 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19741 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19744 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19759 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19762 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19768 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19771 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19777 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19780 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19788 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19791 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19797 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19800 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19806 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19809 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19815 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19818 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19832 \begin_layout Standard
19833 Adept users can declare special \SpecialChar LaTeX
19834 -arguments for the table.
19835 They are necessary for special table formatting, such as the multirow cells,
19836 explained in the chapter
19843 \begin_inset space ~
19849 You can also rotate the current cell or the whole table.
19850 These rotations are not visible in \SpecialChar LyX
19851 but are visible in the output.
19854 \begin_layout Standard
19855 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
19858 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19863 Most DVI-viewers are
19867 able to display rotations.
19875 \begin_layout Standard
19880 tab allows you to add and delete border lines for the current row/column.
19885 adds lines for all cell borders.
19888 \begin_layout Subsection
19890 \begin_inset Index idx
19893 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19894 Tables ! Longtables
19900 \begin_inset Index idx
19903 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19912 \begin_layout Standard
19913 If the table is too long to fit on one page, you can use the option
19916 \begin_inset space ~
19920 \begin_inset space ~
19929 of the table dialog to split the table automatically over more pages.
19930 Doing this enables some check boxes and you can now define:
19933 \begin_layout Description
19938 : The current row and all rows above, that don't have any special options
19939 defined, are defined to be the header rows of all pages of the longtable.
19940 except for the first page, if
19943 \begin_inset space ~
19951 \begin_layout Description
19955 \begin_inset space ~
19960 : The current row and all rows above, that don't have any special options
19961 defined, are defined to be the header rows of the first page of the longtable.
19964 \begin_layout Description
19969 : The current row and all rows below, that don't have any special options
19970 defined, are defined to be the footer rows of all pages of the longtable,
19971 except for the last page, if
19974 \begin_inset space ~
19982 \begin_layout Description
19986 \begin_inset space ~
19991 : The current row and all rows below, that don't have any special options
19992 defined, are defined to be the footer rows of the last page of the longtable.
19995 \begin_layout Description
19996 Caption: The first row is reset as a single column.
19997 You can now insert there the table caption via the menu
19999 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
20003 More about longtable captions can be found in the
20006 \begin_inset space ~
20014 \begin_layout Standard
20015 You can also specify a row where the table is split.
20016 If you set more than one option in the same table row, you should be aware
20017 that then only the first option is used; the others will be defined as
20023 In this context, first means first in this order:
20026 \begin_inset space ~
20038 \begin_inset space ~
20043 ; see the following longtable to see how it works:
20044 \begin_inset Separator parbreak
20050 \begin_layout Standard
20052 \begin_inset Tabular
20053 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="69" columns="3">
20054 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
20055 <column alignment="block" valignment="top" width="5cm">
20056 <column alignment="left" valignment="top" width="0pt">
20057 <column alignment="right" valignment="top" width="0pt">
20058 <row endfirsthead="true">
20059 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20062 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20065 Example Phone List (ignore the names)
20070 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20073 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20079 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20082 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20089 <row endfirsthead="true">
20090 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20093 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20101 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20104 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20110 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20113 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20122 <row endhead="true">
20123 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20126 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20134 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20137 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20143 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20146 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20153 <row endhead="true">
20154 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20157 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20165 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20168 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20174 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20177 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20186 <row endfoot="true">
20187 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20190 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20198 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20201 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20207 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20210 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20218 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20221 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20229 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20232 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20238 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20241 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20249 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20252 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20260 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20263 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20269 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20272 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20280 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20283 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20291 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20294 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20300 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20303 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20311 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20314 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20322 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20325 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20331 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20334 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20342 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20345 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20353 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20356 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20362 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20365 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20373 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20376 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20384 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20387 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20393 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20396 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20404 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20407 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20415 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20418 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20424 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20427 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20435 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20438 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20446 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20449 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20455 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20458 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20466 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20469 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20477 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20480 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20486 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20489 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20497 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20500 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20508 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20511 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20517 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20520 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20528 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20531 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20539 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20542 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20548 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20551 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20559 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20562 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20570 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20573 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20579 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20582 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20590 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20593 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20601 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20604 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20610 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20613 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20621 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20624 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20632 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20635 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20641 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20644 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20652 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20655 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20663 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20666 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20672 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20675 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20683 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20686 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20694 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20697 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20703 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20706 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20714 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20717 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20725 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20728 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20734 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20737 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20745 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20748 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20756 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20759 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20765 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20768 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20776 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20779 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20787 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20790 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20796 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20799 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20807 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20810 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20818 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20821 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20827 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20830 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20838 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20841 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20849 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20852 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20858 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20861 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20869 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20872 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20880 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20883 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20889 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20892 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20900 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20903 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20911 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20914 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20920 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20923 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20931 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20934 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20942 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20945 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20951 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20954 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20962 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20965 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20973 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20976 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20982 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20985 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20993 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20996 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21004 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21007 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21013 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21016 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21024 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21027 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21035 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21038 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21044 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21047 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21055 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21058 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21066 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21069 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21075 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21078 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21086 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21089 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21097 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21100 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21106 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21109 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21117 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21120 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21128 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21131 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21137 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21140 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21148 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21151 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21159 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21162 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21168 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21171 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21179 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21182 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21188 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
21191 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21197 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21200 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21208 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21211 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21219 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21222 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21228 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21231 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21239 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21242 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21250 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21253 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21259 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21262 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21270 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21273 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21281 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21284 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21290 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21293 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21301 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21304 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21312 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21315 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21321 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21324 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21332 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21335 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21343 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21346 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21352 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21355 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21363 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21366 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21374 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21377 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21383 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21386 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21394 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21397 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21405 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21408 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21414 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21417 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21425 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21428 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21436 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21439 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21445 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21448 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21456 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21459 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21467 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21470 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21476 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21479 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21487 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21490 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21498 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21501 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21507 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21510 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21518 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21521 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21529 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21532 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21538 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21541 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21549 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21552 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21560 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21563 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21569 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21572 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21580 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21583 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21591 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21594 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21600 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21603 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21611 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21614 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21622 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21625 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21631 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21634 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21642 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21645 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21653 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21656 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21662 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21665 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21673 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21676 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21684 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21687 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21693 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21696 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21704 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21707 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21715 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21718 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21724 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21727 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21735 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21738 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21746 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21749 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21755 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21758 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21766 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21769 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21777 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21780 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21786 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21789 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21797 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21800 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21808 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21811 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21817 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21820 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21828 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21831 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21839 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21842 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21848 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21851 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21859 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21862 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21870 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21873 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21879 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21882 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21890 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21893 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21901 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21904 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21910 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21913 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21921 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21924 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21932 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21935 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21941 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21944 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21952 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21955 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21963 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21966 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21972 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21975 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21983 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21986 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21994 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21997 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22003 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22006 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22014 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22017 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22025 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22028 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22034 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22037 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22045 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22048 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22056 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22059 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22065 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22068 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22076 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22079 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22087 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22090 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22096 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22099 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22107 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22110 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22118 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22121 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22127 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22130 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22138 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22141 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22149 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22152 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22158 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22161 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22168 <row endlastfoot="true">
22169 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="block" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22172 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22180 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
22183 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22189 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22192 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22206 \begin_layout Subsection
22208 \begin_inset Index idx
22211 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22218 \begin_inset CommandInset label
22220 name "subsec:Table-Cells"
22227 \begin_layout Standard
22228 A table cell can contain text, inline equations, a figure, or another table.
22229 All these kinds of objects can be placed in the same cell.
22230 Font sizes and shapes can also be altered.
22231 But you can't put a special environment in a cell (like
22235 , etc.), nor set spacing options for the cell's paragraph.
22238 \begin_layout Standard
22239 To have multi-line entries in table cells, you have to declare a fixed width
22240 for the column in the table dialog.
22241 Your text is then automatically split into multiple lines and the cell
22242 is enlarged vertically when the length of the text exceeds the given width.
22244 \begin_inset Separator parbreak
22250 \begin_layout Standard
22252 \begin_inset Tabular
22253 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="4" columns="3">
22254 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
22255 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
22256 <column alignment="block" valignment="top" width="3cm">
22257 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
22259 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22262 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22277 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22280 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22295 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22298 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22315 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22318 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22333 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22336 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22346 This is a multi-line entry in a table.
22351 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22354 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22371 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22374 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22389 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22392 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22402 This is longer now.
22407 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22410 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22427 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22430 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22445 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22448 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22458 This is a multi-line entry in a table.
22459 This is longer now.
22464 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22467 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22490 \begin_layout Standard
22491 Cutting and pasting between tables and table cells works reasonably well.
22492 You can even cut and paste more than one row.
22496 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22497 Note that you cannot paste into a multicell selection because it would not
22498 be clear what to do when pasting a single word in a selected 2×3.
22504 Selection with the mouse or with
22508 plus the arrow keys works as usual.
22509 You can also copy and paste the entire table as a single unit by starting
22510 the selection from outside the table.
22513 \begin_layout Section
22515 \begin_inset Index idx
22518 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22525 \begin_inset CommandInset label
22534 \begin_layout Subsection
22538 \begin_layout Standard
22539 A float is a block of text associated with some sort of label, which doesn't
22540 have a fixed location.
22542 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22546 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22549 forward or backward a page or two, to wherever it fits best.
22557 \begin_inset space ~
22562 are also floats, because they can float to the next page when there are
22563 too many notes on the current page.
22566 \begin_layout Standard
22567 Floats make it possible to get a high quality layout.
22568 Images and tables can be distributed evenly over the pages to avoid whitespace
22569 and pages without text.
22570 As the floating often destroys the spatial context between the text and
22571 the image/table, every float can be referenced in the text.
22572 Floats are therefore numbered.
22573 Referencing is described in section
22574 \begin_inset space ~
22578 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
22580 reference "sec:Cross-References"
22587 \begin_layout Standard
22588 To insert a float, use the menu
22590 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
22594 A box with a caption will be inserted into your document.
22595 The label will automatically be translated to the document language in
22597 After the label you can insert the caption text.
22598 \begin_inset Index idx
22601 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22607 The image or table is inserted above or below the caption in a separate
22608 paragraph within the float.
22609 To keep your \SpecialChar LyX
22610 -document readable, you can open and close the float box by
22611 left-clicking on the box label.
22612 A closed float box looks like this:
22613 \begin_inset Graphics
22614 filename clipart/floatQt4.png
22619 – a gray button with a red label.
22622 \begin_layout Standard
22623 You should insert floats in a separate paragraph to avoid possible \SpecialChar LaTeX
22625 that can occur when the surrounding text is specially formatted.
22628 \begin_layout Subsection
22630 \begin_inset CommandInset label
22632 name "subsec:Figure-Floats"
22637 \begin_inset Index idx
22640 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22641 Floats ! Figure floats
22649 \begin_layout Standard
22651 \begin_inset space ~
22655 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
22657 reference "fig:Platypus-distorted"
22661 was created using the menu
22663 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
22664 Float\SpecialChar menuseparator
22670 arg "float-insert figure"
22674 The image was inserted by setting the cursor above the caption label and
22677 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
22683 arg "dialog-show-new-inset graphics"
22687 The image in the float was horizontally centered by putting the cursor
22688 to the left or right of the image and using the menu
22690 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
22692 \begin_inset space ~
22700 arg "layout-paragraph"
22706 \begin_layout Standard
22707 \begin_inset Float figure
22712 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22714 \begin_inset Graphics
22715 filename clipart/platypus.eps
22724 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22725 \begin_inset Caption Standard
22727 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22728 \begin_inset CommandInset label
22730 name "fig:Platypus-distorted"
22734 A severely distorted platypus in a float.
22747 \begin_layout Standard
22748 This figure float also shows how to set a label and create a cross-reference
22749 to it: Insert a label into the caption using the menu
22751 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
22760 ) and refer to it using the menu
22762 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
22768 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
22772 It is important to use cross-references to figure floats rather than using
22773 vague references like
22774 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22778 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22781 , because, as \SpecialChar LaTeX
22782 will reposition the floats in the final document, it might
22784 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22788 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22792 For more about cross-references, see section
22793 \begin_inset space ~
22797 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
22799 reference "sec:Cross-References"
22806 \begin_layout Standard
22807 Normally only one image is inserted in a figure float, but sometimes you
22808 might want to use two images with separate subcaptions.
22809 This can be done by inserting image floats into existing image floats.
22810 Note that only the main caption of the float is added to the List of Figures
22811 as described in section
22812 \begin_inset space ~
22816 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
22818 reference "subsec:List-of-Figures"
22824 \begin_inset space ~
22828 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
22830 reference "fig:Two-distorted-images"
22834 is an example of a figure float with two images set side by side.
22835 You can also set the images one below the other.
22837 \begin_inset space ~
22841 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
22843 reference "fig:Undefinable"
22848 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
22850 reference "fig:Platypus"
22854 are the subfigures.
22857 \begin_layout Standard
22858 \begin_inset Float figure
22863 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22864 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
22868 \begin_inset Float figure
22873 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22874 \begin_inset Caption Standard
22876 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22877 \begin_inset CommandInset label
22879 name "fig:Undefinable"
22891 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22892 \begin_inset Graphics
22893 filename clipart/escher-lsd.eps
22904 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
22908 \begin_inset Float figure
22913 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22914 \begin_inset Caption Standard
22916 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22917 \begin_inset CommandInset label
22919 name "fig:Platypus"
22931 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22932 \begin_inset Graphics
22933 filename clipart/platypus.eps
22945 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
22951 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22952 \begin_inset Caption Standard
22954 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22955 \begin_inset CommandInset label
22957 name "fig:Two-distorted-images"
22961 Two distorted images.
22974 \begin_layout Subsection
22976 \begin_inset Index idx
22979 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22980 Floats ! Table floats
22988 \begin_layout Standard
22989 Table floats can be inserted using the menu
22991 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
22992 Float\SpecialChar menuseparator
22995 or the toolbar button
22998 arg "float-insert table"
23002 They have the same properties as figure floats except that the table in
23003 the float is normally placed below the caption and not above like for figures
23004 and that the label begins with “tab:”.
23006 \begin_inset space ~
23010 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
23012 reference "tab:Table-float"
23019 \begin_layout Standard
23020 \begin_inset Float table
23025 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23026 \begin_inset Caption Standard
23028 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23029 \begin_inset CommandInset label
23031 name "tab:Table-float"
23043 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23045 \begin_inset Tabular
23046 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="3" columns="3">
23047 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
23048 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
23049 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
23050 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
23052 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23055 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23070 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23073 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23088 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23091 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23108 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23111 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23126 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23129 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23144 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23147 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23164 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23167 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23177 \begin_inset Formula $\int x^{2}dx$
23185 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23188 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23198 \begin_inset Formula $\left[\begin{array}{cc}
23201 \end{array}\right]$
23209 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23212 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23222 \begin_inset Formula $1+1=2$
23243 \begin_layout Subsection
23245 \begin_inset Index idx
23248 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23257 \begin_layout Standard
23259 offers you further float types as well as rotated floats.
23260 It also allows you to change the float numbering scheme, to control the
23261 float placement and to change the formatting and placement of the float
23263 All these features are explained in detail with many examples in the chapter
23271 \begin_inset space ~
23279 \begin_layout Section
23281 \begin_inset Index idx
23284 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23293 \begin_layout Standard
23295 provides a mechanism essentially to produce a page within a page, called
23297 Within a minipage, all the usual rules of indentation, line wrapping, etc.
23298 \begin_inset space \space{}
23305 \begin_layout Standard
23306 Minipages in \SpecialChar LyX
23307 have their own collapsible box inserted via the menu
23309 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
23313 Right-clicking on the box label allows you to alter the width of the minipage
23314 and its alignment within the page.
23315 \begin_inset Separator parbreak
23321 \begin_layout Standard
23323 \begin_inset Box Frameless
23333 height_special "totalheight"
23338 backgroundcolor "none"
23341 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23344 This is a minipage.
23345 The text is set in an italic style.
23348 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23351 Minipages are often used for text in another language or text that needs
23352 another formatting.
23360 \begin_layout Standard
23361 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
23364 If you place two minipages side-by-side, you can use
23368 as described in section
23369 \begin_inset space ~
23373 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
23375 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
23380 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
23386 \begin_layout Standard
23387 \begin_inset Box Frameless
23397 height_special "totalheight"
23402 backgroundcolor "none"
23405 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23406 This is a minipage with some stupid dummy text.
23407 This dummy text is used to increase the size of the minipage.
23413 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
23417 \begin_inset Box Frameless
23427 height_special "totalheight"
23432 backgroundcolor "none"
23435 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23436 This is a minipage with some stupid dummy text.
23437 This dummy text is used to increase the size of the minipage.
23445 \begin_layout Standard
23446 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
23452 \begin_layout Standard
23453 When you right-click on a minipage box, you can transform the box to another
23455 All box types and their settings are explained in detail in chapter
23462 \begin_inset space ~
23470 \begin_layout Chapter
23471 Mathematical Formulas
23472 \begin_inset Index idx
23475 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23482 \begin_inset Index idx
23485 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23490 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23501 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23514 \begin_inset CommandInset label
23516 name "chap:Mathematical-Formulas"
23523 \begin_layout Standard
23524 The issues of this chapter are described in detail in the
23529 There you will also find tips and tricks for special cases.
23532 \begin_layout Section
23534 \begin_inset Index idx
23537 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23546 \begin_layout Standard
23547 To create a math formula, you can just click on the toolbar icon
23560 That will create a little blue rectangle, with purple markers around its
23562 That blue rectangle is the formula itself; the purple markers indicate
23563 what level of nesting within the formula you are at.
23564 You can also choose a particular formula type to insert via the
23566 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
23572 \begin_layout Standard
23573 Editing the parameters of a formula and adding math constructs can be done
23577 \begin_inset space ~
23582 , that appears if the cursor is in a formula.
23585 \begin_layout Standard
23586 There are two main types of formulas, inline formulas and display formulas.
23587 Inline formulas appear within a text line, like this one:
23590 \begin_layout Standard
23591 This is a line with an inline formula
23592 \begin_inset Formula $A=B$
23598 \begin_layout Standard
23599 Displayed formulas appear outside the text like if they were in a separate
23600 paragraph, like this one:
23601 \begin_inset Formula
23608 You can only number and reference displayed formulas.
23611 \begin_layout Standard
23613 also supports many \SpecialChar LaTeX
23615 For example, typing
23616 \begin_inset Quotes eld
23626 \begin_inset Quotes erd
23629 , followed by a space, in a formula will create the Greek letter
23630 \begin_inset Formula $\alpha$
23634 Typing commands might sometimes be faster than using the
23637 \begin_inset space ~
23645 \begin_layout Subsection
23646 Navigating in Formulas
23647 \begin_inset Index idx
23650 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23659 \begin_layout Standard
23660 The best control over the cursor position within an existing formula is
23661 achieved with the arrow keys.
23663 uses small rectangles to indicate places where something can be inserted.
23664 The arrow keys can be used to navigate between parts of a formula.
23669 will leave a formula construct (a square root
23670 \begin_inset Formula $\sqrt{2}$
23674 \begin_inset Formula $\left(f\right)$
23678 \begin_inset Formula $\left[\begin{array}{cc}
23681 \end{array}\right]$
23689 will leave the formula, placing the cursor after the formula.
23694 can be used to move horizontally in a formula; for example, through the
23695 cells of a matrix or the positions in a multi-line equation.
23698 \begin_layout Standard
23703 , printed in this document as
23704 \begin_inset Quotes eld
23708 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
23712 \begin_inset Quotes erd
23715 , seems to do nothing in a formula, since it does not add a space between
23716 characters, but it does exit a nested structure.
23717 For this reason, you have to be careful about using
23722 For example, if you want
23723 \begin_inset Formula $\sqrt{2x+1}$
23731 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
23741 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
23745 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
23750 , since in the latter case only the
23753 \begin_inset Formula $2x$
23758 will be under the square root sign:
23759 \begin_inset Formula $\sqrt{2x}+1$
23765 \begin_layout Standard
23766 You can leave many parts of a formula, like this matrix, partially filled
23768 \begin_inset Formula
23770 \left(\begin{array}{ccc}
23779 If you leave a fraction only partially filled in, or a subscript with nothing
23780 in it, the results will be unpredictable, but most constructs don't mind.
23783 \begin_layout Subsection
23787 \begin_layout Standard
23788 You can select text within a formula in two different ways.
23789 Place the cursor at one end of the string of text you want, and press
23793 and a cursor movement key to select text.
23794 It will be highlighted as with regular text selection.
23795 Alternatively, you can select text with the mouse in the usual way.
23796 That text can then be cut or copied, and then pasted within any formula,
23797 but not in a normal text region in \SpecialChar LyX
23801 \begin_layout Subsection
23802 Exponents and Subscripts
23803 \begin_inset Index idx
23806 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23813 \begin_inset Index idx
23816 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23825 \begin_layout Standard
23826 You can use the math panel to add super- or subscripts (buttons
23829 arg "math-superscript"
23835 arg "math-subscript"
23838 ), but it is often much easier to use a command.
23840 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}$
23843 , type in a formula
23846 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
23856 puts the cursor back down on the base line of the expression.
23862 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2y}$
23866 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}y$
23872 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
23878 If you use characters in the superscript, that could be accented with the
23880 \begin_inset Quotes eld
23884 \begin_inset Quotes erd
23887 , you have to use an extra
23891 to separate the circumflex and the character.
23892 For example, if you want
23893 \begin_inset Formula $x^{a}$
23899 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
23905 Subscripts are similar: To get
23906 \begin_inset Formula $a_{1}$
23912 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
23920 \begin_layout Subsection
23922 \begin_inset Index idx
23925 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23934 \begin_layout Standard
23935 Create a fraction either with the command
23941 or by using the icon
23944 arg "math-insert \\frac"
23950 \begin_inset space ~
23956 You will be presented with an empty fraction.
23957 The cursor is above the fraction line.
23958 To move it to the bottom, simply press
23963 To move back up, press
23968 Any math structure can be placed in a fraction, as this example shows:
23969 \begin_inset Formula
23971 \left[\frac{1}{\left(\begin{array}{cc}
23974 \end{array}\right)}\right]
23982 \begin_layout Subsection
23984 \begin_inset Index idx
23987 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23996 \begin_layout Standard
23997 Roots can be created using the
24000 \begin_inset space ~
24008 arg "math-insert \\sqrt"
24014 arg "math-insert \\root"
24036 you can produce roots of higher orders, like cube roots, while
24042 always produces a square root.
24045 \begin_layout Subsection
24046 Operators with Limits
24047 \begin_inset Index idx
24050 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24057 \begin_inset Index idx
24060 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24067 \begin_inset CommandInset label
24069 name "subsec:Operators-with-Limits"
24076 \begin_layout Standard
24078 \begin_inset Formula $\sum$
24082 \begin_inset Formula $\int$
24085 ) operators are very often decorated with limits.
24086 These limits can be entered in \SpecialChar LyX
24087 by entering them as you would enter a super-
24088 or subscript, directly after the symbol.
24089 The sum operator will automatically place its
24090 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24094 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24097 over and under the symbol in displayed formulas, and to the side in inline
24099 \begin_inset Formula $\sum_{n=0}^{\infty}\frac{1}{n!}=e$
24103 \begin_inset Formula
24105 \sum\nolimits _{n=0}^{\infty}\frac{1}{n!}=e
24110 Integral signs, however, will place the limits to the side in both formula
24114 \begin_layout Standard
24115 All operators with limits will be automatically re-sized when placed in
24117 The placement of the limits can be changed by placing the cursor directly
24118 behind the operator and using the menu
24120 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
24121 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
24123 \begin_inset space ~
24127 \begin_inset space ~
24141 \begin_layout Standard
24142 Certain other mathematical expressions also have this
24143 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24147 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24151 \begin_inset Index idx
24154 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24161 \begin_inset Formula
24163 \lim_{x\rightarrow\infty}f(x),
24168 which will place the
24169 \begin_inset Formula $x\rightarrow\infty$
24173 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24177 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24181 In inline formulas it looks like this:
24182 \begin_inset Formula $\lim_{x\rightarrow\infty}f(x)$
24188 \begin_layout Standard
24189 Note that the lim-function was entered as the function macro
24196 Have a look at section
24197 \begin_inset space ~
24201 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
24203 reference "subsec:Functions"
24207 for an explanation of function macros.
24210 \begin_layout Subsection
24212 \begin_inset Index idx
24215 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24224 \begin_layout Standard
24225 Most math symbols can be found in the
24228 \begin_inset space ~
24233 under one of several categories; including
24250 There are also the additional symbols provided by the American Mathematical
24254 \begin_layout Standard
24255 If you know the \SpecialChar LaTeX
24256 -command for a construct or symbol you wish to use, you
24257 don't have to use the
24260 \begin_inset space ~
24265 ; you can type the command directly into the formula.
24267 will convert it to the corresponding symbol or construct.
24270 \begin_layout Subsection
24272 \begin_inset Index idx
24275 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24284 \begin_layout Standard
24285 You may want to create spaces that differ from the standard spacing that
24291 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
24297 \begin_inset space ~
24305 arg "math-insert \\space"
24309 This generates a small space, and shows a small marker on the screen.
24310 For example, the sequence
24315 \begin_inset Formula $a\,b$
24318 appears in \SpecialChar LyX
24320 \begin_inset Graphics
24321 filename clipart/SpaceMarker.png
24326 You can change the space to different sizes when you set the cursor behind
24327 the space marker and enter space again several times.
24328 With every space enter the size will be changed.
24329 Some markers for the space size appear red in \SpecialChar LyX
24330 , because they are negative
24332 Here are two examples:
24335 \begin_layout Standard
24345 \begin_inset Formula $a\quad b$
24351 \begin_layout Standard
24361 \begin_inset Formula $a\!b$
24367 \begin_layout Subsection
24369 \begin_inset Index idx
24372 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24379 \begin_inset CommandInset label
24381 name "subsec:Functions"
24388 \begin_layout Standard
24392 \begin_inset space ~
24397 contains under the button
24400 arg "math-insert \\functions"
24403 a number of function macros, such as
24404 \begin_inset Formula $\sin$
24408 \begin_inset Formula $\lim$
24416 (you can also insert them in a formula by typing
24423 Standard mathematical practice is that functions are printed upright to
24424 avoid confusions, because
24425 \begin_inset Formula $sin$
24429 \begin_inset Formula $s\cdot i\cdot n$
24435 \begin_layout Standard
24436 Using the function macros will also produce correct spacing around the function:
24438 \begin_inset Formula $a\sin x$
24442 \begin_inset Formula $asinx$
24448 \begin_layout Standard
24449 For some mathematical objects, like limits, the macro changes where subscripts
24450 are placed, as described in section
24451 \begin_inset space ~
24455 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
24457 reference "subsec:Operators-with-Limits"
24464 \begin_layout Subsection
24466 \begin_inset Index idx
24469 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24478 \begin_layout Standard
24479 In a formula you can insert accented characters in the same way as in text
24481 This may depend on your keyboard, or the bindings file you use.
24482 You can also use \SpecialChar LaTeX
24483 commands, for example, to enter
24484 \begin_inset Formula $\hat{a}$
24487 even if your keyboard doesn't have the circumflex enabled.
24488 Our example is entered by typing
24493 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
24500 \begin_inset space ~
24504 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
24506 reference "tab:Accent-names-and"
24510 shows the equivalences between the accent names and the commands.
24513 \begin_layout Standard
24514 \begin_inset Float table
24519 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24520 \begin_inset Caption Standard
24522 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24523 \begin_inset CommandInset label
24525 name "tab:Accent-names-and"
24529 Accent names and the corresponding commands.
24537 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24539 \begin_inset Tabular
24540 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="11" columns="3">
24541 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
24542 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
24543 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
24544 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
24546 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24549 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24555 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24558 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24564 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24567 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24584 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24587 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24602 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24605 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24615 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24618 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24628 \begin_inset Formula $\hat{a}$
24638 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24641 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24656 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24659 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24669 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24672 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24682 \begin_inset Formula $\grave{a}$
24692 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24695 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24710 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24713 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24723 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24726 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24736 \begin_inset Formula $\acute{a}$
24746 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24749 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24764 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24767 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24777 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24780 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24790 \begin_inset Formula $\ddot{a}$
24800 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24803 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24818 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24821 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24831 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24834 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24844 \begin_inset Formula $\tilde{a}$
24854 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24857 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24872 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24875 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24885 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24888 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24898 \begin_inset Formula $\dot{a}$
24908 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24911 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24926 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24929 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24939 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24942 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24952 \begin_inset Formula $\breve{a}$
24962 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24965 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24980 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24983 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24993 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24996 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25006 \begin_inset Formula $\check{a}$
25016 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25019 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25034 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25037 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25047 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25050 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25060 \begin_inset Formula $\bar{a}$
25070 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25073 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25079 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25082 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25092 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25095 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25105 \begin_inset Formula $\vec{a}$
25126 \begin_layout Standard
25127 You can choose one of the accents by selecting an item from the
25130 \begin_inset space ~
25138 arg "math-insert \\hat"
25141 in the math panel; this will apply to any selection you have made within
25145 \begin_layout Section
25146 Brackets and Delimiters
25147 \begin_inset Index idx
25150 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25157 \begin_inset Index idx
25160 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25167 \begin_inset CommandInset label
25169 name "sec:Brackets-and-Delimiters"
25176 \begin_layout Standard
25177 There are several brackets available through \SpecialChar LyX
25179 For some purposes, using just the keys
25184 But if you want to surround a large structure, like a matrix or a fraction,
25185 or if you have several layers of brackets, it is better to use the math
25186 toolbar delimiter icon
25189 arg "dialog-show mathdelimiter"
25193 For example, if you construct the brackets around a matrix in this way:
25194 \begin_inset Formula
25196 \left[\begin{array}{cc}
25204 it makes it easier to see the layers of parentheses.
25205 Below, the expression on the left was entered using the delimiter icon
25209 arg "dialog-show mathdelimiter"
25212 and the expression on the right was entered using the
25218 \begin_inset Formula
25220 \frac{1}{\left(1+\left(\frac{1}{1+\left(\frac{1}{1+x}\right)}\right)\right)}\qquad\qquad\frac{1}{(1+(\frac{1}{1+(\frac{1}{1+x})}))}
25228 \begin_layout Standard
25229 If you use the delimiter icon, the parentheses, and other brackets from
25230 that menu will automatically re-size to accommodate the size of what is
25234 \begin_layout Standard
25235 To construct brackets click on the button for the bracket you want on the
25236 left side and right side.
25237 If you use the option
25240 \begin_inset space ~
25245 , the selected bracket type will be used for the left and the right side.
25246 The selection will be shown as \SpecialChar TeX
25248 If you want one side not to have a bracket, use
25253 It will appear in \SpecialChar LyX
25254 with a dotted line, but nothing will be printed.
25257 \begin_layout Standard
25258 If you want to place brackets around existing math structures, like a square
25259 root, you can do so by first highlighting (selecting) the structure that
25260 is to go inside the brackets.
25261 Then choose the appropriate brackets for left and right and click on
25266 The most common bracket combinations (parentheses, square brackets, and
25267 braces, on both sides) can be entered more quickly using keyboard shortcuts.
25268 For example, to insert a pair of parentheses, select the structure and
25272 arg "math-delim ( )"
25278 \begin_layout Section
25279 Arrays and Multi-line Equations
25280 \begin_inset Index idx
25283 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25290 \begin_inset Index idx
25293 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25300 \begin_inset Index idx
25303 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25304 Math ! Multi-line Equations
25312 \begin_layout Standard
25313 Matrices are entered in \SpecialChar LyX
25317 \begin_inset space ~
25325 arg "dialog-show mathmatrix"
25329 It will open a dialog for you to choose the number of rows/columns.
25330 Here is an example:
25331 \begin_inset Formula
25333 \left(\begin{array}{ccc}
25342 The parentheses aren't automatic, but you can add them as described in section
25343 \begin_inset space ~
25347 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25349 reference "sec:Brackets-and-Delimiters"
25354 When you construct the matrix, you can decide whether the column entries
25355 will be left-, right-, or center-justified.
25356 This alignment is set in the box
25361 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25369 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25373 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25381 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25385 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25393 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25399 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25407 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25410 for every column as default.
25411 For example, the sequence
25412 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25420 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25423 means that the first column will be left-justified, the second will be
25424 centered, and the third column will be right-justified, because each letter
25425 corresponds to the relevant column.
25426 The result will look like this:
25427 \begin_inset Formula
25430 this & this\,column & this\,column\\
25431 column & has & has\,right\\
25432 has\,left\,alignment & center\,alignment & alignment
25441 \begin_layout Standard
25442 You can add more rows to an existing matrix by entering
25445 arg "newline-insert newline"
25448 while the cursor is in the matrix.
25449 Adding or deleting columns can be done via the menu
25451 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
25454 or the math toolbar.
25457 \begin_layout Standard
25458 There are other arrays used in formulas, such as distinctions of cases.
25459 It can be created with the menu
25461 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
25462 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
25464 \begin_inset space ~
25476 Here is an example:
25477 \begin_inset Formula
25491 \begin_layout Standard
25492 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
25495 Multi-line formulas are created when you press
25498 arg "newline-insert newline"
25502 In an empty formula you can see that three blue boxes appear, one for each
25507 arg "newline-insert newline"
25510 in a non-empty formula, the part before the relation sign (equal sign
25511 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25515 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25518 etc.) will be inserted automatically in the first column, the relation sign
25519 is in the second column, and the rest in the third column.
25520 A new row is created by every further entry of
25523 arg "newline-insert newline"
25527 Multi-line formulas are always displayed formulas.
25528 Here is an example:
25529 \begin_inset Formula
25531 a^{2} & = & (b^{2}+c^{2})(b^{2}-c^{2})\nonumber \\
25532 a & = & \sqrt{b^{4}-c^{4}}\label{eq:asquared}
25537 Note that the middle column is designed for relation signs so structures
25538 in this column will be printed in a smaller size:
25539 \begin_inset Formula
25541 \frac{A}{B} & \frac{A}{B} & \frac{A}{B}
25549 \begin_layout Standard
25550 The multi-line formula type described here is called
25557 There are other multi-line types more suitable for certain situations,
25558 for example if you want a better inter-line spacing than in formula
25559 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25561 reference "eq:asquared"
25566 The other types are described in section
25567 \begin_inset space ~
25571 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25573 reference "subsec:AMS-Formula-Types"
25580 \begin_layout Section
25581 Formula Numbering and Referencing
25582 \begin_inset Index idx
25585 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25586 Math ! Formula numbering
25592 \begin_inset Index idx
25595 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25596 Math ! Referencing formulas
25602 \begin_inset CommandInset label
25604 name "sec:Formula-Numbering-and"
25611 \begin_layout Standard
25612 To number a formula, set the cursor in the formula and use the menu
25614 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
25615 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
25617 \begin_inset space ~
25621 \begin_inset space ~
25629 arg "math-number-toggle"
25633 The formula number appears in \SpecialChar LyX
25634 within parentheses.
25635 The number shown is temporary and may be different when the output is generated.
25636 The placement and format of the formula number in the output depends on
25637 the document class.
25638 In this document the number is printed together with the chapter number,
25639 separated by a dot:
25640 \begin_inset Formula
25650 arg "math-number-toggle"
25653 in a numbered formula will switch off the numbering.
25654 You can only number displayed formulas.
25657 \begin_layout Standard
25658 Multi-line formulas can be numbered line by line: Using the menu
25660 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
25661 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
25663 \begin_inset space ~
25667 \begin_inset space ~
25675 arg "math-number-line-toggle"
25678 will only toggle the numbering of the line where the cursor is:
25679 \begin_inset Formula
25682 2 & = & 4-2\nonumber \\
25688 To number all lines use the shortcut
25691 arg "math-number-toggle"
25697 \begin_layout Standard
25698 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
25701 Every displayed formula can be referenced by its number using a label.
25702 A label is inserted with the menu
25704 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
25713 ) when the cursor is in the formula.
25714 This opens a dialog to enter the label.
25715 It is recommended that you use the suggested
25716 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25724 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25727 as the first part of the label, because this helps later to identify the
25728 label type when you have many labels in your document.
25729 We inserted in the following example the label
25730 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25734 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25737 in the second line:
25738 \begin_inset Formula
25740 \tanh(x) & = & \frac{\sinh(x)}{\cosh(x)}\nonumber \\
25741 & = & \frac{\mathrm{e}^{2x}-1}{\mathrm{e}^{2x}+1}\label{eq:tanhExp}
25746 Every labeled line is automatically numbered.
25747 Therefore the label is shown behind the formula number.
25748 You can reference a labeled formula using the menu
25750 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
25752 \begin_inset space ~
25760 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
25764 A dialog appears to choose a label you want to refer to.
25765 The reference appears in \SpecialChar LyX
25766 as a gray cross-reference box and in the output
25767 as the formula number:
25770 \begin_layout Standard
25771 This is a cross-reference to equation (
25772 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25774 reference "eq:tanhExp"
25781 \begin_layout Standard
25782 The properties of \SpecialChar LyX
25783 's cross-reference box are described in section
25784 \begin_inset space ~
25788 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25790 reference "sec:Cross-References"
25795 To delete a label, set the cursor at the end in the labeled formula and
25803 \begin_layout Section
25804 User defined math macros
25805 \begin_inset Index idx
25808 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25817 \begin_layout Standard
25819 allows you to define macros for formulas which is very useful when you
25820 have equations of the same form in a document several times.
25821 Math macros are explained in section
25824 \begin_inset space ~
25836 \begin_layout Section
25840 \begin_layout Subsection
25842 \begin_inset Index idx
25845 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25854 \begin_layout Standard
25855 The standard font for text is italic, for numbers the standard is roman.
25856 To set a font in a formula, use the
25859 \begin_inset space ~
25867 arg "math-insert \\font"
25870 , or enter its command, listed in table
25871 \begin_inset space ~
25875 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25877 reference "tab:Typefaces-and-the"
25884 \begin_layout Standard
25885 \begin_inset Float table
25890 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25891 \begin_inset Caption Standard
25893 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25894 \begin_inset CommandInset label
25896 name "tab:Typefaces-and-the"
25900 Typefaces and the corresponding commands.
25908 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25910 \begin_inset Tabular
25911 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="9" columns="2">
25912 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
25913 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
25914 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
25916 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25919 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25925 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25928 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25936 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25939 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25946 \begin_inset Formula $\mathrm{Roman}$
25954 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25957 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25969 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25972 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25973 \begin_inset Formula $\mathbf{\mathbf{Bold}}$
25981 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25984 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25996 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25999 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26000 \begin_inset Formula $\mathit{Italic}$
26008 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26011 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26023 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26026 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26033 \begin_inset Formula $\mathtt{Typewriter}$
26041 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26044 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26056 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26059 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26060 \begin_inset Formula $\mathbf{\mathbb{BLACKBOARD}}$
26068 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26071 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26083 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26086 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26087 \begin_inset Formula $\mathfrak{Fraktur}$
26095 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26098 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26110 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26113 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26121 \begin_inset Formula $\mathcal{CALLIGRAPHIC}$
26129 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26132 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26144 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26147 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26148 \begin_inset Formula $\mathsf{SansSerif}$
26156 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26159 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26182 \begin_layout Standard
26183 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
26186 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26191 You can only print capital letters in the typefaces
26207 \begin_layout Standard
26208 When you use a typeface, a blue box is inserted in the formula.
26209 Every character in this box will be printed in this typeface.
26214 within the box will set the cursor outside, so that you have to use a protected
26215 space when you need a space in the box.
26216 Here is an example where
26217 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26221 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26228 denotes the set of numbers:
26229 \begin_inset Formula
26231 f(x)=\sqrt{x}\:;\:x\in\mathbb{N}
26239 \begin_layout Standard
26240 The typefaces are nestable, which can cause confusion.
26241 You can, for example, put a character in
26250 \begin_inset Formula $\mathtt{abc\mathfrak{d}e}$
26254 \begin_inset Newline newline
26257 So it is better not to use this feature.
26260 \begin_layout Standard
26261 The typefaces have no effect on Greek letters:
26262 \begin_inset Formula $\mathfrak{abc\delta e}$
26266 \begin_inset Newline newline
26269 You can only print them emboldened using the command
26275 , which works like the other typeface commands:
26276 \begin_inset Formula $\alpha\beta\gamma\boldsymbol{\alpha\beta\gamma}$
26282 \begin_layout Standard
26289 works for all symbols, letters, and numbers.
26292 \begin_layout Standard
26293 A number of other font options are available as well, in the menu
26295 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
26296 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
26298 \begin_inset space ~
26306 \begin_layout Subsection
26308 \begin_inset Index idx
26311 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26320 \begin_layout Standard
26321 Typefaces are useful for entering some characters in some given font, but
26323 For typing longer pieces of text use the math text, which is obtained using
26327 \begin_inset space ~
26331 \begin_inset space ~
26339 \begin_inset space ~
26347 arg "math-insert \\font"
26351 Math text appears in \SpecialChar LyX
26352 in black instead of blue.
26353 You can use spaces and accents in math text as in normal text.
26354 Here is an example:
26355 \begin_inset Formula
26358 x & \mbox{if I say so}\\
26359 -x & \mbox{under Umständen}
26368 \begin_layout Subsection
26370 \begin_inset Index idx
26373 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26382 \begin_layout Standard
26383 There are four font styles (relative sizes) used in math-mode, which are
26384 automatically chosen in most situations.
26402 For most characters,
26410 are actually the same size, but fractions, superscripts and subscripts,
26411 and certain other structures, are set larger in
26416 Except for some operators, which resize themselves to accommodate various
26417 situations, all text will be set in the styles that \SpecialChar LaTeX
26418 thinks are appropriate.
26419 These choices can be overridden by using the math panel button
26422 arg "math-insert \\style"
26426 A box for the size will be created in which you can insert the math structure.
26427 For example, you can set
26428 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{1}{2}$
26431 , which is normally in
26440 \begin_inset Formula ${\displaystyle \frac{1}{2}}$
26444 The four styles are used in the following example:
26447 \begin_layout Standard
26448 \begin_inset Formula $displaystyle$
26452 \begin_inset Formula ${\textstyle textstyle}$
26456 \begin_inset Formula ${\scriptstyle scriptstyle}$
26460 \begin_inset Formula ${\scriptscriptstyle scriptscriptstyle}$
26466 \begin_layout Standard
26467 All these math-mode font sizes are relative so that if the whole math inset
26468 is set in a particular size with the menu
26470 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
26472 \begin_inset space ~
26477 , all sizes in the formula will be adjusted relative to this size.
26478 Similarly, if the base font size of the document is changed, all fonts
26479 will be adjusted to correspond.
26480 As an example here is a formula in the font size
26481 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26485 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26491 \begin_layout Standard
26495 \begin_inset Formula $\mathrm{e}=\sum_{n=0}^{\infty}\frac{1}{n!}$
26501 \begin_layout Section
26502 AMS-\SpecialChar LaTeX
26504 \begin_inset Index idx
26507 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26514 \begin_inset Index idx
26517 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26526 \begin_layout Standard
26528 supports the packages provided by the American Mathematical Society (AMS)
26529 that are in common use.
26532 \begin_layout Subsection
26533 Enabling AMS-Support
26536 \begin_layout Standard
26537 You can make the facilities of the AMS-packages explicitly available in
26538 the document by selecting the checkbox
26541 \begin_inset space ~
26545 \begin_inset space ~
26549 \begin_inset space ~
26556 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
26560 \begin_inset Index idx
26563 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26564 Document ! Settings
26572 \begin_inset space ~
26578 AMS is needed for many math-constructs; so when you get \SpecialChar LaTeX
26579 -errors in formulas,
26580 ensure that you have enabled AMS.
26583 \begin_layout Subsection
26585 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26587 name "subsec:AMS-Formula-Types"
26592 \begin_inset Index idx
26595 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26596 Math ! Multi-line Equations
26604 \begin_layout Standard
26605 AMS-\SpecialChar LaTeX
26606 provides a selection of different formula types.
26608 allows you to choose between
26629 We refer you to the AMS-documentation,
26630 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
26636 , for an explanation of these formula types.
26639 \begin_layout Chapter
26643 \begin_layout Section
26645 \begin_inset Index idx
26648 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26655 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26657 name "sec:Cross-References"
26664 \begin_layout Standard
26665 One of \SpecialChar LyX
26666 's strengths is cross-references.
26667 You can reference every section, float, footnote, formula, and list in
26669 To reference a document part, you have to insert a label into it.
26670 The label is used as an anchor and a name for the reference.
26671 We want for example to refer to the second item of the following list:
26674 \begin_layout Enumerate
26678 \begin_layout Enumerate
26679 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26681 name "enu:Second-item"
26688 \begin_layout Enumerate
26692 \begin_layout Standard
26693 First we insert a label into the second item with the menu
26695 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
26698 or by pressing the toolbar button
26705 A gray label box like this:
26706 \begin_inset Graphics
26707 filename clipart/labelQt4.png
26712 is inserted and the label window pops up asking for the label text.
26714 offers as text the first words of the item with a prefix, in our case
26716 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26724 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26729 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26737 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26741 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26745 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26749 The prefix depends on the document part where the label is inserted; for
26750 example, if you insert a label into a section heading, the suggested prefix
26752 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26760 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26766 \begin_layout Standard
26767 To reference the item, we refer to its label using the menu
26769 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
26772 or the toolbar button
26775 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
26779 A gray cross-reference box like this:
26780 \begin_inset Graphics
26781 filename clipart/referenceQt4.png
26786 is inserted and the cross-reference window appears showing all the labels
26788 We can now sort the labels alphabetically and then choose the entry
26789 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26797 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26801 At the position of the cross-reference box the item number will appear
26805 \begin_layout Standard
26806 As an alternative to
26808 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
26811 , you can right-click on a label and in the popup menu select
26816 The cross-reference to this label is now in the clipboard and can be pasted
26817 to the actual cursor position via the menu
26819 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
26831 \begin_layout Standard
26832 Here is our cross-reference: Item
26833 \begin_inset space ~
26837 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26839 reference "enu:Second-item"
26846 \begin_layout Standard
26847 It is recommended to use a protected space
26851 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26852 described in section
26853 \begin_inset space ~
26857 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26859 reference "subsec:Protected-Space"
26868 between the cross-reference name and the cross-reference to avoid ugly
26869 line breaks between them.
26872 \begin_layout Standard
26873 There are six formats of cross-references:
26876 \begin_layout Description
26877 <reference>: prints the number, this is the default:
26878 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26880 reference "fig:Two-distorted-images"
26887 \begin_layout Description
26888 (<reference>): prints the number within two parentheses, this is the style
26889 normally used to reference formulas, especially when the reference name
26891 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26895 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26899 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26901 reference "eq:tanhExp"
26908 \begin_layout Description
26909 <page>: prints the page number: Page
26910 \begin_inset space ~
26914 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26915 LatexCommand pageref
26916 reference "fig:Two-distorted-images"
26923 \begin_layout Description
26925 \begin_inset space ~
26929 \begin_inset space ~
26932 <page>: prints the text “on page” and the page number:
26933 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26934 LatexCommand vpageref
26935 reference "fig:Two-distorted-images"
26940 \begin_inset Newline newline
26943 If the label is on the same page, it prints “on this page”; if the label
26944 is on a facing page in a two-sided document, it prints “on the facing page”;
26945 if it is on the previous page which is not a facing page, it prints “on
26946 the previous page”; if it is on the next page which is not a facing page,
26947 it prints “on the next page”.
26948 The wording of the printed text also depends on the used document class.
26951 \begin_layout Description
26953 \begin_inset space ~
26957 \begin_inset space ~
26961 \begin_inset space ~
26964 <page>: prints the number, the text “on page” and the page number:
26965 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26967 reference "fig:Two-distorted-images"
26972 \begin_inset Newline newline
26975 If the label is on the same page, this format behaves like
26981 ; otherwise it behaves like
26985 \begin_inset space ~
26989 \begin_inset space ~
26998 \begin_layout Description
27000 \begin_inset space ~
27003 reference: prints a self defined cross-reference format.
27004 \begin_inset Newline newline
27008 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
27011 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27016 This feature is only available when you have the \SpecialChar LaTeX
27026 \begin_inset Index idx
27029 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27031 -packages ! prettyref
27037 \begin_inset Index idx
27040 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27042 -packages ! refstyle
27053 \begin_inset Newline newline
27056 You can select which \SpecialChar LaTeX
27057 -package should be used for this feature by setting
27060 Use refstyle (not prettyref) for cross-references
27064 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
27065 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
27073 is the default and preferred because
27077 supports only English documents.
27078 The format is specified by using the command
27090 (refstyle) in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
27091 preamble of the document.
27092 For example redefining all references to figures (which have the label
27094 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27102 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27105 ) can be done with this command
27106 \begin_inset Newline newline
27113 newref{fig}{refcmd={Image on page
27118 \begin_inset Newline newline
27121 For more information about the format, have a look at the package documentations
27123 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
27125 key "prettyref,refstyle"
27132 \begin_layout Description
27134 \begin_inset space ~
27137 reference: prints the caption or the name of the reference:
27138 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27139 LatexCommand nameref
27140 reference "fig:Two-distorted-images"
27147 \begin_layout Standard
27148 The number and current page of the referenced document part in the output
27149 is automatically calculated by \SpecialChar LaTeX
27151 The varieties are adjusted in the field
27155 of the cross-reference window, that appears when you click on the cross-referen
27159 \begin_layout Standard
27160 You can only use the style
27164 to reference numbered document parts, while the reference style
27168 is always possible.
27171 \begin_layout Standard
27172 If you want to reference a section, put the label in the section heading;
27173 for floats put the label in the caption; for footnotes put the label in
27175 Referencing formulas is explained in section
27176 \begin_inset space ~
27180 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27182 reference "sec:Formula-Numbering-and"
27189 \begin_layout Standard
27190 Right-clicking on a cross-reference opens a context menu.
27194 \begin_inset space ~
27198 \begin_inset space ~
27203 sets the cursor before the referenced label.
27204 This entry will be renamed in the context menu of the label to
27207 \begin_inset space ~
27212 so that you can use it to set the cursor back to the cross-reference.
27213 You can also go back with the toolbar button
27216 arg "bookmark-goto 0"
27222 \begin_layout Standard
27223 You can change labels at any time.
27224 References to the changed label will automatically be updated so that you
27225 do not need to think about this.
27228 \begin_layout Standard
27229 If a cross-reference refers to a non-existent label, you will see in \SpecialChar LyX
27231 in the cross-reference label and two question marks in the output instead
27235 \begin_layout Standard
27236 References are described in detail in the section
27237 \begin_inset space ~
27241 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27245 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27251 \begin_inset space ~
27259 \begin_layout Section
27260 Table of Contents and other Listings
27261 \begin_inset Index idx
27264 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27271 \begin_inset Index idx
27274 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27281 \begin_inset CommandInset label
27290 \begin_layout Subsection
27292 \begin_inset CommandInset label
27294 name "subsec:Table-of-Contents"
27301 \begin_layout Standard
27302 The Table of Contents (TOC) is inserted with the menu
27304 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
27305 List/TOC\SpecialChar menuseparator
27307 \begin_inset space ~
27311 \begin_inset space ~
27317 It is displayed in \SpecialChar LyX
27319 If you click on it, the
27323 window appears, showing you the TOC entries as outline, which allows you
27324 to move and rearrange sections in your documents.
27325 So this operation is an alternative to the menu
27327 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
27329 \begin_inset space ~
27334 that is described in section
27335 \begin_inset space ~
27339 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27341 reference "subsec:The-Outliner"
27348 \begin_layout Standard
27349 The TOC in the document output lists every numbered section automatically.
27350 If you have declared a short title for a section heading, as described
27352 \begin_inset space ~
27356 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27358 reference "sec:Short-Titles"
27362 , it will be used in the TOC instead of the section heading.
27364 \begin_inset space ~
27368 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27370 reference "subsec:Numbering-depth"
27374 describes how the level is adjusted that defines which section types are
27376 Unnumbered sections are not listed in the TOC.
27379 \begin_layout Subsection
27380 List of Figures, Tables, Listings and Algorithms
27381 \begin_inset CommandInset label
27383 name "subsec:List-of-Figures"
27390 \begin_layout Standard
27391 Table, figure, listings and algorithm lists are very much like the table
27393 You can insert them via the
27395 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
27399 The list entries are the float captions and the float number.
27402 \begin_layout Section
27403 URLs and Hyperlinks
27404 \begin_inset Index idx
27407 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27414 \begin_inset Index idx
27417 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27426 \begin_layout Subsection
27428 \begin_inset CommandInset label
27437 \begin_layout Standard
27438 Links to web pages or email addresses can be inserted via the menu
27440 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
27446 \begin_layout Standard
27447 Here is an example URL: \SpecialChar LyX
27449 \begin_inset Flex URL
27452 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27462 \begin_layout Standard
27463 You cannot change the style of the link text, the URL text will always be
27469 To be able to format the URL text, use hyperlinks as explained in the next
27473 \begin_layout Standard
27474 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
27477 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27482 URLs must not end with a backslash, otherwise you get \SpecialChar LaTeX
27491 \begin_layout Subsection
27493 \begin_inset CommandInset label
27495 name "subsec:Hyperlinks"
27502 \begin_layout Standard
27503 Hyperlinks can be inserted with the menu
27505 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
27508 or with the toolbar button
27515 The appearing dialog has two fields:
27524 The name is the printed text for the hyperlink.
27525 The hyperlink type can be a weblink like this:
27526 \begin_inset CommandInset href
27528 name "LyX's homepage"
27529 target "http://www.lyx.org"
27533 , an Email address like this:
27534 \begin_inset CommandInset href
27536 name "lyx-docs mailing list"
27537 target "lyx-docs@lists.lyx.org?subject=LyX's documentation"
27542 , or a link to a file.
27545 \begin_layout Standard
27546 You can start applications via a hyperlink when you insert a weblink by
27548 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27556 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27559 to the link target.
27562 \begin_layout Standard
27563 Hyperlinks will automatically be hyphenated if necessary in the PDF output,
27564 and become clickable in the DVI and PDF-output.
27565 To set the format of the link text, highlight the hyperlink inset and use
27566 the text style dialog.
27567 This is for example a hyperlink with bold sans serif text:
27571 \begin_inset CommandInset href
27573 name "LyX's homepage"
27574 target "http://www.lyx.org"
27581 \begin_layout Standard
27582 The link text color can be changed, when the option
27586 is set in the PDF Properties dialog (menu
27588 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
27589 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
27593 The link text is for example set in this document to blue by adding the
27595 \begin_inset Newline newline
27603 \begin_inset Newline newline
27610 in the PDF Properties dialog.
27613 \begin_layout Section
27615 \begin_inset Index idx
27618 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27625 \begin_inset CommandInset label
27627 name "sec:Appendices"
27634 \begin_layout Standard
27635 Appendices are created with the menu
27637 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
27639 \begin_inset space ~
27643 \begin_inset space ~
27649 This menu sets the document from the current cursor position to the end
27650 as the appendix part of the book.
27651 This part is marked with a red borderline.
27654 \begin_layout Standard
27655 Every chapter (or section) within the appendix part is treated as an appendix,
27656 numbered with a capital Latin letter.
27657 The appendix subsections are numbered with this letter followed by a dot
27658 and the subsection number.
27659 All appendix sections can be referenced as if they were normal sections,
27663 \begin_layout Standard
27665 \begin_inset space ~
27669 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27671 reference "chap:Credits"
27676 \begin_inset space ~
27680 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27682 reference "subsec:Export"
27689 \begin_layout Section
27691 \begin_inset Index idx
27694 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27701 \begin_inset CommandInset label
27703 name "sec:Bibliography"
27710 \begin_layout Standard
27711 There are two ways of generating the bibliography in a \SpecialChar LyX
27713 You can include a bibliography database,
27717 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27718 Known under the name
27719 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27722 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
27724 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27732 which is explained in the next subsection, or you can insert the bibliography
27733 manually, using the paragraph environment
27737 , which was described in section
27738 \begin_inset space ~
27742 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27744 reference "subsec:Biblio_environment"
27749 If you want anything other than the numerical citations that are used in
27750 this document, like author-year citations, then you must
27754 use a bibliography database.
27757 \begin_layout Subsection
27758 The Bibliography Environment
27761 \begin_layout Standard
27766 environment, every paragraph begins with a gray bibliography box labeled
27768 If you click on it, you will get a dialog in which you can set a
27777 The key is the symbolic name by which you will refer to this bibliography
27779 For example, our second entry in the bibliography is a book about \SpecialChar LaTeX
27782 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27786 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27789 , a short form of its title, as the key.
27792 \begin_layout Standard
27793 You can cross-reference a bibliography entry using the menu
27795 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
27798 or the toolbar button
27801 arg "dialog-show-new-inset citation"
27805 A citation reference box is inserted and a citation window will appear
27806 containing the available citations.
27807 Select one or more keys from the list and
27817 The citation reference box will be labeled with the referenced key(s).
27818 If you click on the box, the citation window will appear and you can change
27822 \begin_layout Standard
27823 Citation references appear in the output as the number of the bibliography
27824 entry with surrounding brackets.
27829 for the entry, the label will appear instead of the number.
27830 Here are two examples; the first without a label, the second with the label
27832 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27836 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27842 \begin_layout Standard
27846 Companion Second Edition
27849 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
27851 key "latexcompanion"
27858 \begin_layout Standard
27859 The \SpecialChar LyX
27860 -Team members are listed in the Credits:
27861 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
27870 \begin_layout Standard
27871 To align all entries in the bibliography environment you can set a longest
27874 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
27876 \begin_inset space ~
27884 arg "layout-paragraph"
27888 All entries are then indented in the output by the width of the given label.
27891 \begin_layout Subsection
27892 Bibliography databases (Bib\SpecialChar TeX
27894 \begin_inset Index idx
27897 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27898 Bibliography ! Databases
27904 \begin_inset Index idx
27907 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27908 Bibliography ! Bib\SpecialChar TeX
27915 \begin_inset CommandInset label
27917 name "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
27924 \begin_layout Standard
27925 Bibliography databases are useful if you use the same bibliography in different
27930 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27931 They are also useful for keeping a database of articles and notes concerning
27933 Most of the database programs mentioned below allow you to store annotations
27934 and reviews along with bibliographical information.
27939 It also makes it very easy to have a uniform layout for all bibliography
27941 You can collect the bibliography of all relevant books and articles of
27942 your working field in a database.
27943 This database can be used for different documents, and by default only
27944 the entries cited in a particular document will appear in the bibliography
27945 list for that document.
27946 This relieves you of the need to keep track of which articles and books
27950 \begin_layout Standard
27951 The database is a text file with the file extension
27952 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27960 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27963 , containing the bibliography in a special format.
27964 The format is explained in
27965 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
27971 and in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
27973 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
27975 key "Mittelbach,Kopka,Lamport"
27980 The file can be created using any text editor, but normally one uses a
27981 special program to create and edit the entries in the database.
27982 A list of such programs is maintained on the \SpecialChar LyX
27984 \begin_inset Flex URL
27987 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27989 http://wiki.lyx.org/BibTeX/Programs
27997 \begin_layout Standard
27998 To use a database, use the menu
28000 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
28005 TOC\SpecialChar menuseparator
28010 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28018 \begin_inset space ~
28024 A gray box will be inserted and a window appears.
28025 In this window you can add one or more databases and select a
28032 Add bibliography to TOC
28034 adds a table of contents entry for the bibliography.
28039 drop box you can select whether to include all the entries in the database
28040 in the document or just the cited references.
28043 \begin_layout Standard
28044 The style file is a text file with the file extension
28045 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28053 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28056 that controls how the bibliography entries will appear.
28057 Your \SpecialChar LaTeX
28058 distribution should provide several of these, and many publishers
28059 provide their own style files, so that you don't have to take care of the
28061 It is of course possible to write your own style file, but this is something
28066 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28067 For information on how this is done, have a look at
28068 \begin_inset Newline newline
28072 \begin_inset CommandInset href
28074 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/biblio/bibtex/contrib/doc/btxhak.pdf"
28086 \begin_layout Standard
28087 Inserting a citation reference works as described in the previous section.
28090 \begin_layout Standard
28091 To generate the bibliography from a database, \SpecialChar LyX
28092 uses the program Bib\SpecialChar TeX
28094 You can choose which of its variants should be used by \SpecialChar LyX
28101 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
28102 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
28107 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
28108 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
28109 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
28114 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28124 The following variants are possible:
28127 \begin_layout Description
28128 biber provides full Unicode support, unlimited memory, but does not work
28129 with other bibliography packages (e.
28130 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
28134 \begin_inset space \space{}
28141 ), only with the package
28145 ; recommended for multilingual texts and for languages that don't use Latin
28149 \begin_layout Description
28150 bibtex the standard; does not allow special characters in bibliography entries
28151 that are not possible to encode in a 7-bit encoding, limited memory, works
28152 with all bibliography packages, except
28157 \begin_layout Description
28158 bibtex8 allows all characters that are possible to encode in an 8-bit encoding,
28163 , works with all bibliography packages
28166 \begin_layout Standard
28167 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
28168 can be controlled with options that you can add below the specification
28170 Before adding options, it is strongly recommended that you read the manual
28173 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
28177 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
28186 \begin_layout Standard
28187 When you select the option
28189 Sectioned bibliography
28193 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
28194 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
28197 dialog, it is possible to have multiple and sectioned bibliographies.
28198 This and other options are explained in detail in section
28200 Customizing Bibliographies
28204 with Bib\SpecialChar TeX
28209 Additional Features
28214 \begin_layout Standard
28215 We use two bibliographies in this document to show the difference between
28216 the two methods of creating them.
28217 As you can see, the bibliography that is created from a database lists
28218 only the database entries that are referenced in the document.
28219 We used the style file
28223 to get the complicated German reference key scheme in the bibliography.
28226 \begin_layout Subsection
28227 Bibliography layout
28228 \begin_inset Index idx
28231 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28232 Bibliography ! Layout
28240 \begin_layout Standard
28241 In the citation reference dialog you can set a special citation format.
28242 For this feature you need to enable the option
28248 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
28252 \begin_inset Index idx
28255 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28256 Document ! Settings
28266 Setting a citation style for a reference will overwrite the default.
28267 For the global citation format use the Bib\SpecialChar TeX
28268 style files as explained in
28269 the previous section.
28272 \begin_layout Standard
28273 You can also set text to appear before or after a citation reference, in
28274 the citation reference window.
28275 Here is an example where the text
28276 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28280 \begin_inset space ~
28284 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28287 appears after the reference:
28290 \begin_layout Standard
28292 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
28295 key "latexcompanion"
28302 \begin_layout Section
28304 \begin_inset Index idx
28307 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28314 \begin_inset CommandInset label
28323 \begin_layout Standard
28324 An index entry is created if you use the menu
28326 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
28328 \begin_inset space ~
28333 or the toolbar button
28340 A box is inserted containing the text that appears in the index.
28341 The word where the cursor is in or the currently highlighted text is proposed
28342 by \SpecialChar LyX
28343 as the index entry.
28346 \begin_layout Standard
28347 The index list is inserted in the document with the menu
28349 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
28350 List/TOC\SpecialChar menuseparator
28352 \begin_inset space ~
28358 A light blue box labeled
28359 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28367 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28370 will show the place where the index is printed in the output.
28371 The index list box is not clickable like other \SpecialChar LyX
28375 \begin_layout Standard
28376 We give a short overview of the index commands in the next subsections.
28377 For a detailed description of \SpecialChar LaTeX
28378 's index mechanism, have a look at one of
28379 the \SpecialChar LaTeX
28381 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
28383 key "latexcompanion,latexguide,latexbook"
28390 \begin_layout Subsection
28391 Grouping Index Entries
28392 \begin_inset Index idx
28395 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28404 \begin_layout Standard
28405 Index entries are often grouped to offer the reader a fast search in the
28407 We want to group for example the index entries for itemized and enumerated
28408 lists under the entry
28409 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28413 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28417 First we create the entry
28418 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28422 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28426 \begin_inset space ~
28430 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28432 reference "subsec:Lists"
28437 In the text field for the itemized list index entry in section
28438 \begin_inset space ~
28442 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28444 reference "sec:Itemize"
28448 , we insert the command
28451 \begin_layout Standard
28457 \begin_layout Standard
28461 \begin_layout Standard
28467 \begin_layout Standard
28468 for the enumerated list in section
28469 \begin_inset space ~
28473 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28475 reference "sec:Enumerate"
28482 \begin_layout Standard
28483 The exclamation mark
28484 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28488 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28491 marks the grouping levels.
28492 You can have three levels; every index level is indented a bit more.
28493 An index entry for the higher levels is not required.
28494 If we don't have an index entry for
28495 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28499 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28502 , it will be printed anyway, but without a page number.
28505 \begin_layout Subsection
28507 \begin_inset Index idx
28510 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28511 Index ! Page ranges
28519 \begin_layout Standard
28520 Normally an index entry will appear with the page number of the indexed
28522 But sometimes you want to index more pages under the same entry.
28523 For example, if we want to index the paragraph environments, we create
28524 an index entry in section
28525 \begin_inset space ~
28529 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28531 reference "sec:Paragraph-Environments"
28538 \begin_layout Standard
28541 Paragraph environments|(
28544 \begin_layout Standard
28545 and another entry at the end of section
28546 \begin_inset space ~
28550 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28552 reference "subsec:LyX-Code"
28559 \begin_layout Standard
28562 Paragraph environments|)
28565 \begin_layout Standard
28567 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28575 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28579 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28587 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28590 respectively start and end the index range.
28591 You can also add the same index entry at different places in the document.
28592 They appear in the output under one entry with a comma separated list of
28593 the pages of the indexed document parts.
28594 An example is the index entry
28595 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28598 Document ! Settings
28599 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28605 \begin_layout Subsection
28607 \begin_inset Index idx
28610 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28611 Index ! Cross referencing
28619 \begin_layout Standard
28620 It is also possible to refer to another index entry.
28621 We referred for example in the index entry
28622 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28626 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28630 \begin_inset space ~
28634 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28636 reference "subsec:Image-Formats"
28640 ) to the index entry
28641 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28645 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28648 in the same section using the entry
28651 \begin_layout Standard
28654 GIF|see{Image formats}
28657 \begin_layout Standard
28658 where the braces have to be inserted as \SpecialChar TeX
28660 The text within the braces is the referenced entry.
28661 The reference will appear in the output without a page number.
28664 \begin_layout Subsection
28666 \begin_inset Index idx
28669 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28670 Index ! Entry order
28678 \begin_layout Standard
28679 If you use accented characters in the index entry the entries might not
28680 follow the rules for the index order.
28681 The index entries are sorted alphabetically but \SpecialChar LaTeX
28686 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28687 The index generating is done in the background by an extra program, see
28689 \begin_inset space ~
28693 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28695 reference "subsec:Index-Program"
28704 does not know how to sort accents in different languages.
28705 We have created as an example the three dummy index entries
28706 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28710 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28714 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28718 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28722 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28726 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28730 \begin_inset Index idx
28733 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28734 Dummy entries ! maïs
28740 \begin_inset Index idx
28743 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28744 Dummy entries ! maître
28750 \begin_inset Index idx
28753 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28754 Dummy entries ! maïs@maison
28759 They will be sorted in the order maïs, maître, maison but we want the order
28760 maïs, maison, maître.
28761 To achieve this, we use the command
28764 \begin_layout Standard
28767 previous entry@current entry
28770 \begin_layout Standard
28771 In our case we want to have
28772 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28776 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28780 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28784 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28787 and write therefore for the index entry of maison:
28790 \begin_layout Standard
28796 \begin_layout Standard
28797 The previous entry need not be a real existing entry.
28798 You can also use another word to tell \SpecialChar LaTeX
28800 See the next subsection for an example.
28803 \begin_layout Standard
28804 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
28810 \begin_layout Standard
28811 In some cases the index entry order is not correct when you are using the
28816 to generate the index (see sec.
28817 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
28821 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28823 reference "subsec:Index-Program"
28832 would for example print the index entry for the \SpecialChar LaTeX
28833 -package aeguill in sec.
28834 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
28838 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28840 reference "subsec:Document-Font"
28844 after the index entries of the other \SpecialChar LaTeX
28845 -packages although all these index
28846 commands start with
28847 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28856 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28860 The reason is that the index entry for aeguill is in a footnote.
28865 bug, add these commands to the preamble of your document:
28868 \begin_layout Standard
28880 \begin_layout Standard
28892 \begin_layout Subsection
28894 \begin_inset Index idx
28897 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28898 Index ! Entry layout
28906 \begin_layout Standard
28907 You can change the appearance of index entries via the text style dialog.
28908 \begin_inset Index idx
28911 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28914 This is an italic dummy entry
28919 You can also format the page number using the character
28920 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28924 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28927 followed by a \SpecialChar LaTeX
28928 -command without a backslash.
28929 We can write for example
28932 \begin_layout Standard
28935 italic page number:|textit
28938 \begin_layout Standard
28939 to get the page number in italic.
28940 \begin_inset Index idx
28943 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28944 Dummy entries ! italic page number:|textit
28949 Normally all \SpecialChar LaTeX
28950 -commands begin with a backslash, but in this special case
28952 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28960 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28968 \begin_inset space ~
28974 Have a look at section
28975 \begin_inset space ~
28979 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28981 reference "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
28985 to learn more about the \SpecialChar LaTeX
28989 \begin_layout Standard
28990 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
28993 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28998 Formatting single index entries only works when you use the program
29002 to generate the index, see sec.
29003 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
29007 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29009 reference "subsec:Index-Program"
29018 , this will not work for anything other than bold or italic text.
29023 requires you to define semantic elements before they can be used, see
29024 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
29027 key "latexcompanion"
29039 \begin_layout Standard
29040 In general, we encourage you to not format page numbers directly as shown
29042 Instead, you should define a macro in the preamble and use that.
29043 Maybe you want all page references italic that refer to a definition of
29044 the indexed term, so that users can easily find definitions.
29045 If so, put the following in the preamble
29048 \begin_layout Standard
29060 \begin_layout Standard
29064 \begin_layout Standard
29070 \begin_layout Standard
29071 in the index entry.
29072 \begin_inset Index idx
29075 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29076 Dummy entries ! my entry|IndexDef
29081 The advantage is that, if you change your mind later or if your publisher
29082 insists that definitions must not be italic but bold, you just need to
29083 change the macro in the preamble, not every single index entry.
29086 \begin_layout Standard
29087 You can also change the layout for the whole index.
29088 For example, we marked the index list box of this document as bold to get
29089 a bold font for all index entries.
29090 For more advanced tasks you have to set up a so-called
29102 documentation for details,
29103 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
29105 key "makeindex,xindy"
29112 \begin_layout Subsection
29114 \begin_inset Index idx
29117 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29124 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29126 name "subsec:Index-Program"
29133 \begin_layout Standard
29134 If the index generation program
29138 is installed, \SpecialChar LyX
29139 uses it for index generation; otherwise the program
29143 , the program that is part of every \SpecialChar LaTeX
29144 distribution, is used.
29148 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29153 is very old, no longer under development and has many pitfalls, notably
29154 that it was developed with only the English language in mind.
29155 So it fails to sort anything other than a monolingual English text correctly.
29156 We have shown above how to fix this sorting.
29157 However, if you are writing in another than the English language, consider
29167 Both programs can be controlled by options that can be set in \SpecialChar LyX
29169 dialog, see section
29170 \begin_inset space ~
29174 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29176 reference "subsec:LaTeX-settings"
29181 The available options are listed and explained in
29182 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
29184 key "makeindex,xindy"
29189 In this dialog, you can also specify an alternative program to generate
29193 \begin_layout Standard
29194 If you need specific options or an alternative index program only for a
29195 given document, you can define the program and\SpecialChar breakableslash
29198 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
29199 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
29203 This is especially useful if you need to pass language-specific options
29204 to the index program or if you need a specific layout style.
29207 \begin_layout Subsection
29211 \begin_layout Standard
29212 In many fields it is common to have more than one index.
29213 For instance, you might need to set up a separate
29214 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29218 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29221 next to the standard index.
29223 does not provide this possibility out of the box, but there are packages
29224 that add this feature.
29231 \begin_inset Index idx
29234 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29236 -packages ! splitidx
29241 package to generate multiple indexes.
29242 The package is included in all recent \SpecialChar LaTeX
29247 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29248 If yours does not ship it, consult the \SpecialChar TeX
29250 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
29257 Note that the package does not only consist of a \SpecialChar LaTeX
29258 style, but it also includes
29259 specific preprocessor programs that need to be installed as well.
29260 Please consult the package's manual for details.
29268 \begin_layout Standard
29269 To set up \SpecialChar LyX
29270 for the use of multiple indexes, go to
29272 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
29273 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
29276 and select the option
29278 Use multiple Indexes
29285 already contains the standard index
29286 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29290 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29294 To add further indexes, add the name of the index (in the form that should
29295 also appear as a heading) to the
29299 input field and press the
29304 The new index now also appears in the list.
29305 If you like, you can attribute an alternative \SpecialChar LyX
29306 label color to the new index.
29309 \begin_layout Standard
29310 Once the document changes have been applied, you can find the new index
29313 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
29320 menu has a separate entry for each of the defined indexes.
29321 The workflow is basically the same as for the default index, but there
29322 are additional features:
29325 \begin_layout Itemize
29326 If you want to change the attribution of a specific index entry, right-clicking
29327 on the entry's label will open a dialog where you can do that.
29330 \begin_layout Itemize
29331 By right-clicking on an index, you can change its type.
29332 Furthermore, you can specify an index to be a
29333 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29337 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29340 If you do that, the heading of that list will be decreased by one level.
29341 For example, if you use a book class, where the standard index heading
29342 is defined as a chapter, subindexes will be defined as sections and can
29343 thus be nested to the non-subindexes.
29346 \begin_layout Section
29347 Nomenclature/Glossary
29348 \begin_inset Index idx
29351 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29358 \begin_inset Index idx
29361 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29366 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29377 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29390 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29392 name "sec:Nomenclature"
29399 \begin_layout Standard
29400 Sometimes you need to provide a list of technical terms or symbols that
29401 are mentioned in your document with a brief explanation of them – a so
29402 called nomenclature or glossary.
29405 \begin_layout Standard
29406 To be able to create nomenclatures or glossaries, you need the \SpecialChar LaTeX
29413 \begin_inset Index idx
29416 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29418 -packages ! nomencl
29424 You find it in the \SpecialChar TeX
29426 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
29432 or in the package manager of your \SpecialChar LaTeX
29436 \begin_layout Standard
29437 A nomenclature entry is created if you place the cursor after a symbol entry
29438 and then use the menu
29440 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
29446 \begin_inset space ~
29451 or the toolbar button
29454 arg "nomencl-insert"
29459 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29467 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29470 is inserted and a window pops up asking for the nomenclature entry.
29473 \begin_layout Standard
29474 A nomenclature entry consists of two main entries.
29475 The first is the term or
29479 that you wish to define.
29484 of the term or symbol.
29487 \begin_layout Standard
29488 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
29491 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29496 You have to enter valid \SpecialChar LaTeX
29497 -code for all fields of the nomenclature dialog.
29505 \begin_layout Subsection
29506 Nomenclature Definition and Layout
29507 \begin_inset Index idx
29510 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29511 Nomenclature ! Layout
29519 \begin_layout Standard
29520 If you have symbols in formulas, you have to define them in the
29524 field as \SpecialChar LaTeX
29527 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29531 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
29535 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29539 \begin_inset Newline newline
29547 \begin_inset Newline newline
29553 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29557 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29560 character starts/ends the formula.
29561 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
29562 -command for the Greek letter is the name of the letter beginning with
29564 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29570 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29574 For capital Greek letters, start the command also with a capital letter,
29584 \begin_layout Standard
29585 (A short introduction to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
29586 -syntax is given in section
29587 \begin_inset space ~
29591 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29593 reference "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
29600 \begin_layout Standard
29604 \begin_inset space ~
29609 dialog to format the description text; you have to use \SpecialChar LaTeX
29611 For example the description of the nomenclature entry for the
29612 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29616 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
29620 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29623 in this document is:
29624 \begin_inset Newline newline
29629 dummy entry for the character
29634 \begin_inset Newline newline
29646 \begin_inset space ~
29656 font use the command
29685 \begin_layout Standard
29686 If the characters |
29687 \begin_inset space \space{}
29691 \begin_inset space \space{}
29695 \begin_inset space \space{}
29699 \begin_inset space \space{}
29703 \begin_inset space \space{}
29706 should appear in nomenclature entries they need to be escaped by adding
29707 a quote character in front of them.
29708 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
29709 LatexCommand nomenclature
29710 symbol "\"@, \"|, \"!, \"\""
29711 description "The quote sign is output by writing ‘ \"\"\"\" '"
29718 \begin_layout Subsection
29719 Sort Order of Nomenclature Entries
29720 \begin_inset Index idx
29723 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29724 Nomenclature ! Sort order
29732 \begin_layout Standard
29733 The nomenclature entries are sorted alphabetically by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
29734 -code of the symbol
29736 This leads to undesired results when you, for example, have symbols in
29738 Suppose you have nomenclature entries for the symbols
29741 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
29742 LatexCommand nomenclature
29744 description "dummy entry for the character \"a\""
29751 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
29755 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
29756 LatexCommand nomenclature
29759 description "dummy entry for the character \\textsf{sigma}"
29764 They will be sorted by
29765 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29773 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29777 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29787 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29791 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
29794 will be sorted before the
29798 since the character
29799 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29803 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29806 is considered in sorting.
29809 \begin_layout Standard
29810 To control the sort order, you can edit the
29813 \begin_inset space ~
29818 field of the nomenclature dialog.
29819 Then the nomenclature entry will be sorted by this entry and not the symbol
29821 For the example given, you can insert
29825 in this field for the
29826 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
29833 will be located before
29834 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
29840 \begin_layout Standard
29841 For subgrouping and tips for using sort entries see the
29846 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
29855 \begin_layout Subsection
29856 Nomenclature Options
29857 \begin_inset Index idx
29860 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29861 Nomenclature ! Options
29869 \begin_layout Standard
29874 package offers some options to adjust the appearance of the nomenclature.
29875 Here are some of its options; for more have a look at its documentation:
29878 \begin_layout Description
29879 refeq Appends the phrase
29880 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29892 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29895 to every nomenclature entry, where
29901 is the number of the last equation in front of the nomenclature entry
29904 \begin_layout Description
29905 refpage Appends the phrase
29906 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29918 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29921 to every nomenclature entry, where
29927 is the number of the page on which the nomenclature entry appeared
29930 \begin_layout Description
29931 intoc Inserts the nomenclature in the Table of Contents
29934 \begin_layout Standard
29935 To use one or more of the options, add them to the comma-separated document
29936 class options list in the
29938 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
29942 In this document the options
29949 \begin_layout Standard
29950 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
29956 \begin_layout Standard
29957 You can also use the first two options above only for certain nomenclature
29958 entries when you add one of the following commands as last entry to the
29963 field in the nomenclature dialog:
29966 \begin_layout Description
29976 \begin_layout Description
29979 nomrefpage Like the
29986 \begin_layout Description
29989 nomrefeqpage Short notation of
29998 \begin_layout Description
30002 \begin_inset space ~
30008 \begin_inset space ~
30013 nomnorefeqpage Turns off the corresponding options
30016 \begin_layout Standard
30018 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30022 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30025 are automatically translated for some document languages.
30026 If not, add these lines to your \SpecialChar LaTeX
30030 \begin_layout Standard
30038 eqdeclaration}[1]{, see equation
30041 \begin_inset Newline newline
30048 pagedeclaration}[1]{, page
30053 \begin_inset Newline newline
30057 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30061 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30065 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30069 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30072 by their translation.
30075 \begin_layout Subsection
30076 Printing the Nomenclature
30077 \begin_inset Index idx
30080 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30081 Nomenclature ! Printing
30089 \begin_layout Standard
30090 To print the nomenclature, use the menu
30092 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
30093 Lists/TOC\SpecialChar menuseparator
30098 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30106 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30109 will show the place where the nomenclature is printed in the output.
30110 By right-clicking on it, the amount of space for symbols can be altered.
30111 You can choose between these settings:
30114 \begin_layout Description
30115 Default a space of 1
30116 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
30122 \begin_layout Description
30124 \begin_inset space ~
30128 \begin_inset space ~
30131 width the width of the widest symbol of all nomenclature entries is used
30134 \begin_layout Description
30135 Custom custom space
30138 \begin_layout Standard
30139 In the printed output the title of the nomenclature appears as
30140 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30144 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30148 If you are not happy with the name, you can change it by redefining the
30156 For example, in order to change the name to
30160 , add the following line to the preamble:
30163 \begin_layout Standard
30171 nomname}{List of Symbols}
30174 \begin_layout Subsection
30175 Nomenclature Program
30176 \begin_inset Index idx
30179 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30180 Nomenclature ! Program
30186 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30188 name "subsec:Nomenclature-Program"
30195 \begin_layout Standard
30201 , that is part of every \SpecialChar LaTeX
30202 distribution, to generate the nomenclature.
30204 's preferences dialog allows you to specify another program or to control
30209 by adding options, see section
30210 \begin_inset space ~
30214 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30216 reference "subsec:LaTeX-settings"
30221 The available options are listed and explained in
30222 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
30224 key "nomencl,makeindex"
30231 \begin_layout Section
30233 \begin_inset Index idx
30236 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30243 \begin_inset Index idx
30246 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30247 Document ! Branches
30253 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30255 name "sec:Branches"
30262 \begin_layout Standard
30263 Sometimes it is useful to hide some document parts in the output.
30264 For example a teacher who is setting an exam obviously doesn't want the
30265 pupils to see the answers, but having questions and answers in the same
30266 document will make the life of the markers of that exam much easier.
30269 \begin_layout Standard
30270 For these cases \SpecialChar LyX
30271 allows you to put text into branches.
30272 The text will then only appear in the output when its branch is activated.
30273 To create a branch, either select the menu
30275 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
30276 Branch\SpecialChar menuseparator
30279 (if you just want to specify a new branch) or go in the
30281 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
30288 , where you can specify and change the name of the branch, its activation
30289 state (whether the content of the branch is shown in the output or not),
30290 its background color inside \SpecialChar LyX
30291 and whether the name of the branch should
30292 be appended to the document file name on export if the branch is active
30293 (see below for an example).
30294 Furthermore, the dialog lets you merge two branches (just rename one branch
30295 to the name of the other) and to add
30296 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30300 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30304 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
30308 \begin_inset space ~
30311 branches that were added to the document via copy and paste from other documents
30312 , without having been defined) to the document's branch list.
30315 \begin_layout Standard
30316 Text that should be in a branch is set into branch inset boxes.
30317 These boxes are inserted via the menu
30319 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
30322 where you can choose a branch.
30323 You can later change the activation state of the branch by right-clicking
30327 \begin_layout Standard
30328 Here is an example, where only the question text appears, the answer branch
30329 is deactivated and therefore does not appear in the output:
30332 \begin_layout Standard
30333 \begin_inset Branch Question
30336 \begin_layout Standard
30337 Question: Who was the first physics Nobel prize winner?
30345 \begin_layout Standard
30346 \begin_inset Branch Answer
30349 \begin_layout Standard
30350 Answer: Wilhelm Conrad Röntgen
30358 \begin_layout Standard
30365 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
30366 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
30369 , the name of the active branches will be appended to the file name at export.
30370 Consider for example a file
30371 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30375 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30378 which has the above branches.
30380 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30384 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30387 is active, the PDF export file would be called
30388 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30392 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30396 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30400 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30404 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30408 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30411 branch were inactive,
30412 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30416 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30420 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30424 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30427 branch was active, likewise
30428 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30432 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30436 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30440 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30443 branch was active, and
30444 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30447 Exam-Question-Answer.pdf
30448 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30451 if both branches were active.
30452 This helps you to export different versions of your document easily.
30455 \begin_layout Standard
30456 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
30462 \begin_layout Standard
30463 To use conditional output inside places where you cannot insert branch insets,
30464 like inside equations, you can code special \SpecialChar LaTeX
30465 definitions for each branch.
30466 For example you can define for the question branch
30470 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30471 For an introduction to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
30472 -syntax, see section
30473 \begin_inset space ~
30477 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30479 reference "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
30491 \begin_layout Standard
30501 \begin_layout Standard
30511 \begin_layout Standard
30512 and for the answer branch
30515 \begin_layout Standard
30525 \begin_layout Standard
30535 \begin_layout Standard
30536 \begin_inset Branch Question
30539 \begin_layout Standard
30543 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30552 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30571 \begin_layout Standard
30572 \begin_inset Branch Answer
30575 \begin_layout Standard
30579 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30588 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30607 \begin_layout Standard
30608 Now it is possible to use the
30612 question{\SpecialChar ldots
30619 answer{\SpecialChar ldots
30622 commands to obtain conditional output.
30623 Here is an example formula where only the
30630 \begin_inset Formula
30632 x^{2}-2x-2\Rightarrow\question{x_{1}}\answer{x_{2}}=1\question{+\sqrt{3}}\answer{-\sqrt{3}}.
30640 \begin_layout Standard
30641 Inside math, the same effect can be achieved using math macros, see the
30649 \begin_layout Standard
30650 Each type of branch is allowed to have its specific style defined in layout
30652 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
30656 \begin_inset space \space{}
30659 any branch inset can be automatically wrapped by your own \SpecialChar LaTeX
30661 For this advanced usage, see the
30666 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30669 Flex insets and InsetLayout
30670 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30676 \begin_layout Section
30678 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30680 name "sec:PDF-Properties"
30685 \begin_inset Index idx
30688 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30697 \begin_layout Standard
30700 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
30701 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
30704 dialog allows you to set up special options for the PDF output of your
30706 All these options are provided by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
30712 \begin_inset Index idx
30715 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30717 -packages ! hyperref
30722 which will link all cross-references in the DVI- and PDF-output.
30723 This means that the reader of your document will be able to click on a
30724 table of contents entry or on a reference to move to the cross-referenced
30725 part of the document.
30729 \begin_layout Standard
30730 The header information in the dialog tab
30734 is saved together with the PDF as file properties.
30735 Many programs are able to extract this information, for example, automatically
30736 to recognize who the author is and what the PDF is about.
30737 This is very useful to sort, classify or use PDFs for bibliography issues.
30741 \begin_inset space ~
30745 \begin_inset space ~
30750 is set, \SpecialChar LyX
30751 tries to extract the header information from your document title
30752 and author entries.
30756 \begin_inset space ~
30760 \begin_inset space ~
30764 \begin_inset space ~
30769 will open the PDF in fullscreen mode, which is useful for presentations.
30772 \begin_layout Standard
30773 You can specify in the dialog tab
30777 how the links will look and if links for bibliographical backreferences
30782 \begin_inset space ~
30786 \begin_inset space ~
30790 \begin_inset space ~
30795 option allows long links to be split;
30798 \begin_inset space ~
30802 \begin_inset space ~
30806 \begin_inset space ~
30814 \begin_inset space ~
30819 both turn off the default behavior of enclosing all links in frames;
30822 \begin_inset space ~
30827 colors the different links.
30828 The default colors are:
30831 \begin_layout Labeling
30832 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
30837 for hyperlinks and URLs
30840 \begin_layout Labeling
30841 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
30849 \begin_layout Labeling
30850 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
30858 \begin_layout Standard
30859 but you can change these in the field
30864 For example, in this document they were changed with the additional options:
30867 \begin_layout Standard
30870 linkcolor=black, citecolor=black, urlcolor=blue, filecolor=blue
30873 \begin_layout Standard
30878 is set, the hyperlinks will appear in the bibliography after the different
30879 entries, showing, depending on the option selected, the number of the section,
30880 slide or page where the entry is referenced.
30883 \begin_layout Standard
30888 you can specify if PDF-bookmarks should be created for every section of
30889 your document to make it easier for readers to navigate through the document.
30890 You can decide if the bookmarks should be numbered like your document sections
30900 you can specify what sectioning level should be displayed in the bookmarks
30901 when opening the PDF.
30903 \begin_inset space ~
30906 2 will display all sections and subsections, while level
30907 \begin_inset space ~
30910 1 will only display the sections.
30913 \begin_layout Standard
30914 PDF properties are also used in this document.
30915 When you look in its document settings, you can see that some additional
30921 For an explanation of all them we refer you to the hyperref manual
30922 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
30931 \begin_layout Section
30933 Code and the \SpecialChar LaTeX
30935 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30937 name "sec:TeX-Code"
30944 \begin_layout Subsection
30947 \begin_inset Index idx
30950 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30958 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30960 name "subsec:TeX-Code-Boxes"
30967 \begin_layout Standard
30968 As \SpecialChar LyX
30969 uses \SpecialChar LaTeX
30970 in the background, it supports many \SpecialChar LaTeX
30971 commands and constructs,
30974 contains hundreds of packages that provide different commands.
30975 All the time packages are being updated and new ones added.
30976 This has the advantage that you can typeset nearly everything as there
30977 is a \SpecialChar LaTeX
30978 -package for every problem, though \SpecialChar LyX
30979 cannot support all packages and
30983 \begin_layout Standard
30984 But don't worry, you can use any \SpecialChar LaTeX
30985 -command directly in \SpecialChar LyX
30986 inside the \SpecialChar TeX
30990 Code box is created by the menu
30992 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
30997 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31005 \begin_inset space ~
31010 or by the toolbar button
31023 The box can be opened by left-clicking and closed by right-clicking on
31031 \begin_layout Standard
31032 You can insert complete or incomplete commands as \SpecialChar TeX
31034 Incomplete means that the command argument can be Standard \SpecialChar LyX
31036 For example, if you want to draw a frame around a word and are therefore
31037 using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
31044 , you can write the command part
31050 in a \SpecialChar TeX
31051 Code box before the word and the closing brace
31055 in a second \SpecialChar TeX
31056 Code box behind the word.
31057 The word between the two \SpecialChar TeX
31058 Code boxes is then the argument as it is in the
31062 \begin_layout Standard
31063 \begin_inset Graphics
31064 filename clipart/ERT.png
31072 \begin_layout Standard
31076 \begin_layout Standard
31077 This is a line with a
31081 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31094 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31104 \begin_layout Standard
31105 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
31108 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31113 At the end of \SpecialChar LaTeX
31114 -commands without parameters, you have to insert a space
31115 to let \SpecialChar LaTeX
31116 know that the command is finished.
31124 \begin_layout Subsection
31125 A Short Introduction to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
31127 \begin_inset Argument 1
31130 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31131 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
31138 \begin_inset Index idx
31141 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31149 \begin_inset CommandInset label
31151 name "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
31158 \begin_layout Standard
31159 When you write larger documents or books, you will need to know something
31160 about the \SpecialChar LaTeX
31161 -commands that \SpecialChar LyX
31162 uses in the background.
31163 Because \SpecialChar LaTeX
31164 is based on commands, you can
31165 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31169 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31173 This has the advantage that the layout of the document can be changed at
31174 any time if you know the right commands.
31175 For example, imagine you have to write a manual for a product and the deadline
31176 is the end of the day.
31177 Your boss has just complimented you for your good work but wants to have
31178 all caption labels bold.
31179 But you have over a hundred figure and table captions with non-bold labels
31181 Of course it is impossible to change all caption labels manually in one
31185 \begin_layout Standard
31186 Now \SpecialChar LaTeX
31188 As mentioned above, for every problem there exists a \SpecialChar LaTeX
31190 First you have to find out which and therefore look in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
31193 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
31202 \begin_layout Standard
31203 As result you find that the package
31208 \begin_inset Index idx
31211 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31213 -packages ! caption
31219 To use a package, you have to load it in the document preamble (menu
31221 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
31224 \SpecialChar menuseparator
31231 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31239 \begin_inset space ~
31247 \begin_layout Standard
31252 usepackage[options]{package name}
31255 \begin_layout Standard
31256 All \SpecialChar LaTeX
31257 commands begin with a backslash, the command argument is set within
31258 two braces and the options are set within two brackets.
31259 Note that not all commands have an argument and options.
31262 \begin_layout Standard
31263 In your case the package name is
31268 After a look in the documentation of the package, you know that the option
31273 will change the font of all caption labels to bold.
31274 So you add the command
31277 \begin_layout Standard
31282 usepackage[labelfont=bf]{caption}
31285 \begin_layout Standard
31286 to the preamble and the problem is solved.
31290 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31291 For more commands provided by the
31295 package, have a look at its documentation,
31296 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
31310 \begin_layout Standard
31311 Note that some document classes have built-in solutions for well-known problems
31313 For example if you use a
31317 class, you don't need the package
31321 , you can instead write
31324 \begin_layout Standard
31329 setkomafont{captionlabel}{
31334 \begin_layout Standard
31335 in the preamble and the problem is solved.
31336 So if you plan to write a large document, you should have a look at the
31337 documentation of the document class you want to use.
31344 is an example of a command with more than one argument.)
31347 \begin_layout Standard
31348 Commands in the preamble affect the whole document, while commands in the
31349 text affect only the text after the command or only the text used as command
31351 To insert a \SpecialChar LaTeX
31352 -command in text, use the \SpecialChar TeX
31353 Code box as described in the previous
31357 \begin_layout Standard
31358 If you want to learn more about \SpecialChar LaTeX
31359 and its syntax, have a look at the \SpecialChar LaTeX
31362 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
31364 key "latexcompanion,latexguide"
31371 \begin_layout Standard
31372 \begin_inset Newpage cleardoublepage
31378 \begin_layout Standard
31382 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31392 \begin_inset Note Note
31395 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31396 switches temporarily to a page style with custom header and footer line
31404 \begin_layout Left Header
31405 \begin_inset Argument 1
31408 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31418 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31428 \begin_inset Note Note
31431 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31432 defines the header line as described below
31440 \begin_layout Center Header
31441 \begin_inset Argument 1
31444 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31453 \begin_layout Right Header
31454 \begin_inset Argument 1
31457 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31461 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31478 \begin_layout Left Footer
31479 \begin_inset Argument 1
31482 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31486 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31503 \begin_layout Center Footer
31504 \begin_inset Argument 1
31507 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31519 \begin_inset Newline newline
31523 \begin_inset Formula $\Upsilon=\frac{\sqrt[3]{\aleph}}{\spadesuit}$
31529 \begin_layout Right Footer
31530 \begin_inset Argument 1
31533 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31543 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31555 \begin_layout Section
31556 Customized Page Headers and Footers
31557 \begin_inset CommandInset label
31559 name "sec:Customized-Page-Headers"
31564 \begin_inset Index idx
31567 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31568 Document ! Header/Footer line
31574 \begin_inset Index idx
31577 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31586 \begin_layout Standard
31587 To define a custom page header and footer line for your document, you need
31591 \begin_inset space ~
31602 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
31608 \begin_inset space ~
31614 As a second step add in the menu
31616 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
31617 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
31621 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31624 Custom Header/Footerlines
31625 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31629 This module offers the following 6
31630 \begin_inset space ~
31636 \begin_layout Description
31638 \begin_inset space ~
31642 \begin_inset space ~
31646 \begin_inset space ~
31650 \begin_inset space ~
31654 \begin_inset space ~
31660 \begin_layout Description
31662 \begin_inset space ~
31666 \begin_inset space ~
31670 \begin_inset space ~
31674 \begin_inset space ~
31678 \begin_inset space ~
31684 \begin_layout Standard
31685 for the different positions in the header/footer.
31688 \begin_layout Standard
31689 Normally, headers and footers are set up at the beginning of the document.
31690 But you can change them anywhere you want to.
31692 \begin_inset space ~
31696 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
31698 reference "fig:Page-layout"
31702 shows the page layout and where the header/footer styles will appear.
31705 \begin_layout Standard
31706 \begin_inset Float figure
31712 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31715 \begin_inset Tabular
31716 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="5" columns="3">
31717 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
31718 <column alignment="left" valignment="top" width="30line%">
31719 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="30line%">
31720 <column alignment="right" valignment="top" width="30line%">
31722 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
31725 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31731 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
31734 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31740 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
31743 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31751 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
31754 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31760 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
31763 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31769 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" rightline="true" usebox="none">
31772 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31780 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="left" valignment="top" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none" width="90line%">
31783 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31784 The normal text on the page goes here.
31785 The running header is above the text, and the footer is below (including
31787 Headers/footers typically contain things like the page number, title of
31788 the chapter, company logo but your can use almost anything, except of floats.
31793 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
31796 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31802 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" rightline="true" usebox="none">
31805 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31813 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
31816 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31822 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
31825 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31831 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" rightline="true" usebox="none">
31834 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31842 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
31845 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31851 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
31854 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31860 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" bottomline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
31863 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31877 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31878 \begin_inset Caption Standard
31880 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31881 \begin_inset CommandInset label
31883 name "fig:Page-layout"
31887 Page layout with custom header and footer line.
31900 \begin_layout Standard
31901 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
31904 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31909 : some document classes implement their own customized page headers and
31913 \begin_inset space ~
31918 is set to “Default”.
31919 Check what these are before you specify your own customized page headers
31928 \begin_layout Subsection
31932 \begin_layout Standard
31933 To define your header line, add all three header styles.
31934 The things you add to the styles appear on odd numbered pages, the things
31935 in the optional arguments on even numbered pages.
31936 For single-sided documents, the optional arguments will not be used and
31938 If you leave a style or its argument empty, nothing appears in the output.
31939 Defining the footer line works similarly.
31942 \begin_layout Standard
31943 For the definition, you will need some \SpecialChar LaTeX
31944 -commands that are inserted as \SpecialChar TeX
31948 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
31953 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31961 \begin_inset space ~
31969 \begin_layout Description
31972 thepage prints the current page number
31975 \begin_layout Description
31978 Roman{page} prints the current page number with capital roman numerals
31981 \begin_layout Description
31984 roman{page} prints the current page number with small roman numerals
31987 \begin_layout Description
31990 leftmark prints the current section number and title.
31991 If the document has chapters, it prints the current chapter number and
31994 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31998 \begin_inset Quotes prd
32001 because it usually goes in a left header.
32004 \begin_layout Description
32007 rightmark prints the current subsection number and title.
32008 If the document has chapters, it prints the current section number and
32010 It is normally used in the right header.
32013 \begin_layout Subsection
32014 Default header/footer
32017 \begin_layout Standard
32018 The custom header/footer is not empty by default.
32019 The default header contains the chapter and section title and the center
32020 footer has the page number.
32021 In order to remove unwanted entries from the header/footer, include the
32022 relevant header/footer style in your document, but leave it blank.
32023 So, if you do not want a page number in the footer, include a blank
32026 \begin_inset space ~
32034 \begin_layout Subsection
32038 \begin_layout Standard
32039 The header and footer will appear on normal pages.
32040 Some pages are different.
32041 The title page has a style of its own, and so does any page that starts
32042 a new part or chapter in your book.
32043 Such pages will not have the custom headers/footers, but that is normal.
32044 There is for example no need to print a header with the chapter name on
32045 the chapter page where the chapter heading is in big bold letters anyway.
32048 \begin_layout Subsubsection
32049 Header and footer decoration line
32052 \begin_layout Standard
32053 By default, you get a 0.4
32054 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
32057 pt thick line below the header and no footer line.
32058 This can be changed in the document preamble with the commands
32070 in the following way:
32073 \begin_layout Standard
32080 headrulewidth}{thickness}
32083 \begin_layout Standard
32084 where thickness is a size in standard units like
32093 If you don't want a line, set the thickness to 0
32094 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
32100 \begin_layout Standard
32101 The lines can also be colored, but this requires more knowledge of \SpecialChar LaTeX
32103 If you really need this, have a look at the Internet or in sec.
32104 \begin_inset space ~
32108 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
32117 \begin_layout Subsubsection
32118 Several header/footer lines
32121 \begin_layout Standard
32122 In case you need more than one text line as a header/footer, you can do
32123 this by adding a normal line break in the style definition.
32124 However, the default height of the header/footer is only the one of one
32126 To expand the height, redefine the \SpecialChar LaTeX
32141 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
32142 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
32147 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32155 \begin_inset space ~
32163 \begin_layout Standard
32170 headheight}{height}
32173 \begin_layout Standard
32174 where height is a size in standard units.
32175 If you don't know which amount of space is needed for the height, define
32176 your header/footer and preview your document as a PDF.
32177 Then open the \SpecialChar LaTeX
32178 logfile with the menu
32180 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
32185 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32198 \begin_inset space ~
32203 to see if you can find a warning about the package
32208 \begin_inset Index idx
32211 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32213 -packages ! fancyhdr
32219 If there is such a warning, it contains the space that you need at least
32220 for your header/footer.
32223 \begin_layout Subsection
32227 \begin_layout Standard
32228 This example demonstrates what can be done with custom header/footers.
32229 Don't use it for your document as it is just an example.
32230 This example consists of the following definition:
32233 \begin_layout Description
32235 \begin_inset space ~
32244 , empty optional argument
32247 \begin_layout Description
32249 \begin_inset space ~
32252 Header empty, empty optional argument
32255 \begin_layout Description
32257 \begin_inset space ~
32266 in the optional argument
32269 \begin_layout Description
32271 \begin_inset space ~
32280 in the optional argument
32283 \begin_layout Description
32285 \begin_inset space ~
32298 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32302 \begin_inset Newline newline
32306 \begin_inset Formula $\Upsilon=\frac{\sqrt[3]{\aleph}}{\spadesuit}$
32310 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32313 in the optional argument
32316 \begin_layout Description
32318 \begin_inset space ~
32327 , empty optional argument
32330 \begin_layout Description
32333 headrulewidth set to 2
32334 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
32340 \begin_layout Standard
32341 In principle you can use almost everything in headers/footers, except floats.
32342 For more specialized features, for example, thumb-indexes, see the manual
32348 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
32357 \begin_layout Standard
32358 \begin_inset Newpage clearpage
32364 \begin_layout Standard
32368 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32372 pagestyle{headings}
32378 \begin_inset Note Note
32381 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32382 switches back to page style with the default headings
32390 \begin_layout Section
32391 Previewing Snippets of your Document
32392 \begin_inset CommandInset label
32394 name "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
32399 \begin_inset Index idx
32402 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32409 \begin_inset Index idx
32412 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32421 \begin_layout Standard
32423 allows you to generate previews of sections of your document on the fly
32424 so you can see how they will look in the final document without having
32425 to break your train of thought with viewing the output.
32428 \begin_layout Subsection
32432 \begin_layout Standard
32433 To get previews working, you need the \SpecialChar LaTeX
32439 \begin_inset Index idx
32442 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32444 -packages ! preview-latex
32449 (on some systems named simply
32454 If it is not already installed, you will find it in the \SpecialChar TeX
32456 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
32462 or in the package manager of your \SpecialChar LaTeX
32464 You obtain prettier results if you install the program
32472 package; for \SpecialChar LyX
32473 on Windows this program and also the \SpecialChar LaTeX
32474 -package are automatically
32475 installed together with \SpecialChar LyX
32479 \begin_layout Subsection
32483 \begin_layout Standard
32484 If you would for example like to see in \SpecialChar LyX
32485 your math formulas typeset by \SpecialChar LaTeX
32487 activate the option
32490 \begin_inset space ~
32497 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
32503 \begin_inset space ~
32507 \begin_inset space ~
32510 feel\SpecialChar menuseparator
32517 \begin_inset space ~
32530 \begin_inset space ~
32535 is the multiplication factor for the size.
32538 \begin_layout Standard
32539 If you would like to see everything but your math formulas typeset by \SpecialChar LaTeX
32544 \begin_inset space ~
32552 \begin_inset space ~
32560 \begin_layout Standard
32561 Previews are generated when you load a document into \SpecialChar LyX
32562 and when you finish
32566 \begin_layout Standard
32567 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
32570 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32575 Previews of an already loaded document are not in every case immediately
32576 generated by activating the option
32579 \begin_inset space ~
32585 Reopening the document will fix such problems.
32593 \begin_layout Subsection
32594 Selected document parts
32597 \begin_layout Standard
32598 Besides math there are other cases where you might like to see a preview,
32599 for example things that \SpecialChar LyX
32600 cannot render like rotated parts or things that
32601 are not yet supported by \SpecialChar LyX
32603 To do this, insert a preview inset via the menu
32605 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
32609 Insert or paste the stuff that you want to preview into this inset.
32610 The preview will be generated when the cursor is outside the preview inset.
32611 If you click on the preview, you can edit the previewed stuff.
32614 \begin_layout Standard
32615 An example: To create rotated boxes, you use the \SpecialChar LaTeX
32622 which is not yet supported by \SpecialChar LyX
32627 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32634 is explained in section
32636 Rotated and Scaled Boxes
32641 \begin_inset space ~
32651 Instead of the \SpecialChar TeX
32652 Code boxes you want to see in \SpecialChar LyX
32653 the final rotated boxes,
32654 for example to adjust the rotation angle to fit with the surrounding text.
32655 Therefore you create a preview inset and copy the text with the rotated
32657 Here is the result:
32660 \begin_layout Standard
32661 \begin_inset Preview
32663 \begin_layout Standard
32668 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32672 rotatebox[origin=r]{-60}{
32678 \begin_inset Box Doublebox
32688 height_special "totalheight"
32693 backgroundcolor "none"
32696 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32706 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32717 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32721 rotatebox[origin=lb]{60}{
32727 \begin_inset Formula $\int A\,\mathrm{d}x=B$
32734 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32749 \begin_layout Standard
32750 Previewing works also for colors.
32751 In this example a special framed, colored box was created using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
32763 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32770 is explained in section
32777 \begin_inset space ~
32790 \begin_layout Standard
32791 \begin_inset Preview
32793 \begin_layout Standard
32797 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32812 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32816 fcolorbox{cyan}{magenta}{
32821 This is text within a colored, framed box.
32825 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32840 \begin_layout Standard
32841 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
32847 \begin_layout Standard
32848 If \SpecialChar LyX
32849 does not show a preview, make sure that you enabled previews as described
32850 above and also make sure that \SpecialChar TeX
32851 Code in the preview inset is valid and that
32852 you loaded the \SpecialChar LaTeX
32853 packages in your document preamble that are required by
32854 the \SpecialChar TeX
32856 If \SpecialChar LyX
32857 cannot create a preview, you will in most cases also not be able to
32858 view your document due to \SpecialChar LaTeX
32860 So if you have to use some \SpecialChar TeX
32861 Code and don't know if it is correct, the preview
32862 inset is a nice method to check it without the need to view the whole document.
32865 \begin_layout Subsection
32870 \begin_layout Standard
32871 You can preview the \SpecialChar LaTeX
32872 source of the whole document or parts of it.
32875 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
32877 \begin_inset space ~
32882 and a window will be shown where you can see the \SpecialChar LaTeX
32884 The window shows the source of the whole paragraph in which the cursor
32886 You can also select document parts in \SpecialChar LyX
32887 's main window, then only this selection
32888 (when it is more than one paragraph) is shown as source code.
32889 To view the whole document as source, enable the corresponding option in
32890 the source view window.
32895 , you can see the changes as you make them in \SpecialChar LyX
32896 ; but note that if you have
32897 several documents open, this will slow things down as \SpecialChar LyX
32899 not just the one which is open at the time.
32902 \begin_layout Section
32903 Advanced Find and Replace
32904 \begin_inset CommandInset label
32906 name "sec:Advanced-Find-and"
32911 \begin_inset Index idx
32914 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32921 \begin_inset Index idx
32924 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32933 \begin_layout Subsection
32937 \begin_layout Standard
32938 The advanced find and replace feature of \SpecialChar LyX
32939 allows for searching of complex,
32940 format-sensitive text segments and mathematics contents within \SpecialChar LyX
32942 It is an enhancement of the standard (quick) find and replace feature.
32943 The key-features are:
32946 \begin_layout Itemize
32947 Both searching of text and of mathematical formulas is allowed, where the
32948 latter is done by entering mathematics in the usual way; not only entire
32949 mathematical formulas are found, but also parts occurring within more complex
32953 \begin_layout Itemize
32954 Search may be format-insensitive, so that the searched text is found in
32955 any context/style (standard text, section headings, notes, and even mathematics
32956 ), or it may be format-sensitive, so that, for example, a word entered with
32957 a section heading will only be found within section headings
32960 \begin_layout Itemize
32961 Search may be restricted to mathematics environments only; this is useful
32962 for remangling math notation where one does not want to match any text
32963 outside of mathematics environments
32966 \begin_layout Itemize
32967 Search may be widened to a specific
32972 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
32976 \begin_inset space ~
32979 a set of files which may be all the children of the document being edited,
32980 all the open files, or all the manuals available from the
32987 \begin_layout Itemize
32988 Replace may optionally preserve capitalization, so that the replaced text
32989 capitalization is adapted to the matching text (i.
32990 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
32994 \begin_inset space ~
32997 all lowercase, all uppercase, first letter uppercase followed by lowercase)
33000 \begin_layout Subsection
33004 \begin_layout Standard
33005 The advanced find and replace feature is activated through the menu
33007 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
33020 arg "dialog-show findreplaceadv"
33023 ) or the toolbar button
33026 arg "dialog-toggle findreplaceadv"
33032 Advanced Find and Replace
33037 \begin_layout Subsubsection
33041 \begin_layout Standard
33047 mini-editor a simple word, and search for occurrences of it by clicking
33051 \begin_inset space ~
33056 button at the bottom of the dialog (or just press the
33059 arg "paragraph-break"
33063 The entered word is found both in text mode and in math mode, and in emphasized
33064 , bold or normal face, and in both in section titles and in standard text.
33068 arg "paragraph-break"
33071 repeatedly keeps searching forward while pressing
33075 searches backwards.
33078 \begin_layout Standard
33082 \begin_inset space ~
33087 option allows matches to occur only with the same case as entered in the
33096 \begin_inset space ~
33101 option allows matches to occur only at word boundaries.
33104 \begin_layout Subsubsection
33105 Searching for mathematics
33108 \begin_layout Standard
33109 Mathematical formulas, such as
33110 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}$
33113 or something more complex like
33114 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{x^{2}}{1+x^{2}}$
33117 , may be searched for by typing them in the
33122 When searching for a formula, it is found both when it is alone and when
33123 it occurs in sub-formulas and nested parts of sub-formulas.
33124 For example the mentioned segments would be found in something like
33125 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{x^{2}}{\sqrt{\frac{x^{2}}{1+x^{2}}}}.$
33131 \begin_layout Subsubsection
33135 \begin_layout Standard
33136 It is also possible to search for text with specific styles.
33137 This is done by switching to the
33141 tab of the dialog and unchecking the
33146 This way, entering in the
33153 \begin_layout Itemize
33154 a normal word and searching for it would not find instances of the word
33155 occurring in emphasized or boldface.
33158 \begin_layout Itemize
33159 an emphasized or boldface word and searching for it would find the respective
33160 instances with the same face only, and within the same text style only.
33163 \begin_layout Itemize
33164 a normal word in a section heading, and searching for it, would find occurrences
33165 of it only within section headings.
33166 Also, if the text to search is given an emphasized or bold face, in addition
33167 to a section style, then it is found only when occurring with the same
33171 \begin_layout Itemize
33172 a displayed formula will only find instances of this formula that are also
33173 displayed formulas (and not inline formulas).
33176 \begin_layout Subsubsection
33180 \begin_layout Standard
33181 The entries made in the
33185 editor can be replaced with entries made in the
33188 \begin_inset space ~
33194 In order to find the next occurrence and replace it, click on the
33198 button or alternatively press
33201 arg "paragraph-break"
33208 while the cursor is in the
33211 \begin_inset space ~
33219 \begin_layout Standard
33220 You can replace with fully-featured formatted \SpecialChar LyX
33222 Typical scenarios in which to use this capability might be (just to mention
33226 \begin_layout Itemize
33227 replacing occurrences of a word with a customized formatted version of the
33228 same word, for example replacing occurrences of a name like
33229 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33233 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33236 with its typewriter version
33237 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33245 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33251 \begin_layout Itemize
33252 performing a notation rework of mathematical symbols, for example replacing
33254 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33258 \begin_inset Formula $R$
33262 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33266 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33270 \begin_inset Formula $\mathbb{R}$
33274 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33277 (you may want to enable the
33280 \begin_inset space ~
33288 \begin_inset space ~
33293 options and disable the
33301 tab, in order to avoid replacing all
33302 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33306 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33309 letters occurring in normal text), or occurrences of
33310 \begin_inset Formula $x_{j}^{i}$
33314 \begin_inset Formula $x_{i,\,j}$
33317 , or occurrences of
33318 \begin_inset Formula $x[k]$
33322 \begin_inset Formula $x_{k}$
33328 \begin_layout Subsection
33332 \begin_layout Standard
33333 There is a regular expression (regexp) based searching facility.
33337 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33338 A good explanation of regular expressions is given in this Wikipedia entry:
33340 \begin_inset CommandInset href
33342 target "http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Regular_expression"
33351 You can search for a regular expression by inserting a regexp inset into
33357 This is done with the context menu
33359 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
33360 Insert Regular Expression
33362 while the cursor is in the
33367 Characters entered within regexp insets are matched according to the regular
33368 expression matching rules
33372 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33373 Under the constraint that any (sub)expression must match a well-formed \SpecialChar LyX
33376 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
33380 \begin_inset space ~
33383 when matching \SpecialChar LaTeX
33384 code, no segments with unbalanced {} braces are allowed to
33390 , while text entered outside regexp insets is matched exactly against the
33391 same text in the document.
33392 You can cut and paste regexp-mode insets.
33393 Examples of using such a feature may be:
33396 \begin_layout Enumerate
33397 Searching for all fractions with a given denominator: for example, entering
33402 editor the fraction
33403 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{.*}{1+x^{2}}$
33407 \begin_inset Formula $.*$
33410 on the numerator is the match-everything regular expression) finds all
33411 fractions with the given denominator.
33414 \begin_layout Enumerate
33415 Searching for all text with a given style: for example, after unchecking
33427 \begin_inset Formula $.*$
33432 regular expression and giving it an emphasized or bold face, finds all
33433 emphasized or bold face text respectively.
33434 Also, by inserting a
33435 \begin_inset Formula $.*$
33438 regular expression in a bullet or enumerated list or a section heading,
33439 you can find all bullet or enumerated lists or section headings.
33442 \begin_layout Standard
33443 Finally, references to (sub)expressions in regexp may be used as usual:
33444 Enclosing parts of the expression within round braces
33445 \begin_inset Formula $()$
33448 , and referring back to them through
33449 \begin_inset Formula $\backslash1$
33453 \begin_inset Formula $\backslash2$
33457 For example, try searching with the regexp
33458 \begin_inset Newline newline
33461 [[:space:]]([[:alpha:]]+)[[:space:]]
33464 \begin_inset Newline newline
33467 in order to find word repetitions, if there are any.
33470 \begin_layout Standard
33471 The usage of back references in the replaced text is not (yet) implemented.
33474 \begin_layout Standard
33475 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
33478 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33483 Back references work both when occurring within the same regexp, and when
33484 occurring in multiple different regexps, where the numbering of back-referenced
33485 sub-expressions is absolute.
33487 \begin_inset space ~
33491 \begin_inset Formula $\backslash1$
33494 always refers to the first occurrence of
33495 \begin_inset Formula $()$
33498 in all entered regexps.
33506 \begin_layout Section
33508 \begin_inset CommandInset label
33510 name "sec:Spellchecking"
33515 \begin_inset Index idx
33518 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33527 \begin_layout Standard
33529 has a built-in spell checker.
33532 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
33539 key or the toolbar button
33542 arg "dialog-show spellchecker"
33545 start the spell checking from either the current cursor position or the
33546 beginning of the currently selected text.
33547 A sidebar will appear showing any incorrect (or unknown) word found, allowing
33548 you to edit and replace it in a second line.
33549 Whenever an unknown word is found, the word is highlighted and the text
33550 scrolled so that it is visible.
33551 In the spellchecker sidebar, there is a box showing suggestions for a correctio
33552 n, if any could be found.
33553 Clicking on one of the corrections will copy it to the
33557 field, double-clicking directly invokes the replacement.
33558 Unknown but correctly typed words can be added to the personal dictionary.
33561 \begin_layout Standard
33562 By default, the dictionary file used is determined by the document language
33565 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
33569 You can specify the language of a word in the spellchecker dialog by choosing
33570 a different one at the top of the dialog.
33572 can correctly spell check documents containing multiple languages.
33573 This works if you have set the language of the text parts using the
33576 \begin_inset space ~
33584 arg "dialog-show character"
33587 ) and have the spell checker dictionaries installed.
33589 automatically switches to the appropriate dictionary file.
33592 \begin_layout Standard
33593 All spell-checker dictionaries supported by \SpecialChar LyX
33594 can be downloaded from here:
33595 \begin_inset Newline newline
33599 \begin_inset Flex URL
33602 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33604 http://sourceforge.net/projects/lyxwininstaller/files/hunspell/
33610 \begin_inset Newline newline
33614 \begin_inset space ~
33617 files for each language.
33618 To install a dictionary on Windows, copy the 2
33619 \begin_inset space ~
33622 files into \SpecialChar LyX
33623 's installation subfolder
33631 and restart \SpecialChar LyX
33633 \begin_inset Newline newline
33636 With Linux one needs to install the packages for the desired language.
33637 The number of these packages vary depending on the Linux distribution,
33638 but in most cases these are
33654 is the language code.
33657 \begin_layout Subsection
33661 \begin_layout Standard
33664 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
33665 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
33667 \begin_inset space ~
33670 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
33673 you can set the following things:
33676 \begin_layout Description
33678 \begin_inset space ~
33681 engine Select the library \SpecialChar LyX
33682 should use for spell checking.
33683 Depending on your platform,
33697 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33698 Enchant itself is a wrapper library having different configurable back-ends.
33699 Please consult the documentation or man-page of it to learn more.
33714 \begin_layout Description
33716 \begin_inset space ~
33719 language If this field is not empty, \SpecialChar LyX
33720 will always use the given language
33721 for the spell checking, no matter what the document language is.
33724 \begin_layout Description
33726 \begin_inset space ~
33729 characters Allows you to add non-standard characters that the spell checker
33731 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
33735 \begin_inset space \space{}
33739 This should normally not be needed.
33742 \begin_layout Description
33744 \begin_inset space ~
33748 \begin_inset space ~
33751 words Prevents the spell checker from complaining about compounded words
33753 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33757 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33763 \begin_layout Description
33765 \begin_inset space ~
33768 continuously Checks the spelling of your document as you type it.
33769 Misspelled words get underlined with a dotted red line.
33770 By right-clicking on an underlined word, suggestions from the spellchecker
33771 appear in a context menu.
33772 Choosing one of them will replace the misspelled word with the suggested
33776 \begin_layout Description
33778 \begin_inset space ~
33782 \begin_inset space ~
33786 \begin_inset space ~
33789 comments If enabled, the spelling of non-printed document content is checked
33793 \begin_layout Section
33795 \begin_inset Index idx
33798 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33805 \begin_inset CommandInset label
33807 name "sec:Thesaurus"
33814 \begin_layout Standard
33816 provides a multilingual thesaurus.
33817 It uses the same thesaurus framework as LibreOffice, OpenOffice and Firefox
33826 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33827 \begin_inset CommandInset href
33829 target "http://lingucomponent.openoffice.org/thesaurus.html"
33838 thesaurus library, which is included in \SpecialChar LyX
33840 Therefore, \SpecialChar LyX
33841 is able to directly access OpenOffice thesaurus dictionaries,
33842 which are available for many languages.
33845 \begin_layout Standard
33846 This section describes how new dictionaries are installed and set up for
33847 the use with \SpecialChar LyX
33851 \begin_layout Subsection
33852 Setting up the thesaurus
33855 \begin_layout Standard
33864 thesauri consist of two files per language: A file with the suffix
33868 containing the data and an index file with the suffix
33873 The standardized file names include the language code for the given language
33875 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
33879 \begin_inset space ~
33887 For instance, the US English files are named:
33890 \begin_layout Itemize
33894 \begin_layout Itemize
33898 \begin_layout Standard
33907 and its thesaurus installed, these files should be already on your system
33908 and you just need to point \SpecialChar LyX
33911 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
33912 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
33913 Paths\SpecialChar menuseparator
33915 \begin_inset space ~
33920 ) to the path where they are installed.
33924 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33925 On Linux, depending on your distribution and the way you installed the dictionar
33926 ies, typical locations are
33932 /usr/share/myspell/dicts/
33936 /usr/share/ooo/thesaurus/
33940 ~/.config/libreoffice/<version>/user/
33943 On Windows, dictionaries are to be found at
33949 LibreOffice-<Version>
33956 On the Mac, the default location is
33958 /Users\SpecialChar breakableslash
33959 <user name>\SpecialChar breakableslash
33960 Library\SpecialChar breakableslash
33961 Application Support\SpecialChar breakableslash
33962 libreoffice\SpecialChar breakableslash
33963 <version>\SpecialChar breakableslash
33971 On Windows, you can alternatively also select dictionaries for installation
33972 during the \SpecialChar LyX
33973 installation process, which will then be installed in the correct
33977 \begin_layout Standard
33978 If you want to install new\SpecialChar breakableslash
33979 further thesaurus dictionaries, you can downloaded
33983 \begin_layout Itemize
33984 \begin_inset Flex URL
33987 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33989 http://www.lyx.org/trac/browser/lyxsvn/dictionaries/trunk/thes/
33997 \begin_layout Standard
33998 To install a new dictionary, download the two files for this dictionary
33999 into the thesaurus path (which is set in
34001 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
34002 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
34003 Paths\SpecialChar menuseparator
34005 \begin_inset space ~
34010 ) and restart \SpecialChar LyX
34012 If this path is not defined yet, you can use a dictionary of your choice
34013 and point \SpecialChar LyX
34017 \begin_layout Standard
34018 Alternatively, you can also install new dictionaries via
34020 LibreOffice\SpecialChar breakableslash
34023 or, on Linux, via your package manager (look for
34029 libreoffice-thesaurus-*
34032 If you do this, make sure that \SpecialChar LyX
34033 is able to find the installed dictionaries,
34035 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
34041 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
34042 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
34043 Paths\SpecialChar menuseparator
34045 \begin_inset space ~
34050 points to the path where you installed these dictionaries.
34053 \begin_layout Subsection
34054 Using the thesaurus
34057 \begin_layout Standard
34058 To start the thesaurus, use the menu
34060 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
34063 or the toolbar button
34066 arg "thesaurus-entry"
34069 while the cursor is at the word you want to look up or while a word is
34071 A dialog pops up showing you probably related words that you can use as
34073 The suggestions are grouped into categories.
34074 Note that, for some languages (such as English), the thesaurus does not
34075 only show equivalent words (synonyms), but also generic terms (such as
34084 ), related terms (such as
34087 \begin_inset space ~
34096 ), compounds (such as
34099 \begin_inset space ~
34108 ) and opposites (antonyms) (such as
34117 Generic terms, related terms and antonyms are marked as such.
34120 \begin_layout Standard
34121 The language is automatically chosen from the language at the cursor, but
34122 you can also switch it in the dialog, as you can enter new words to look
34126 \begin_layout Standard
34127 Note that the thesaurus cannot handle phrases (only compounds that are in
34128 the dictionary, such as the above
34132 ), and you have to use the so called lemma form, i.
34133 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
34137 \begin_inset space \space{}
34140 the form that is used in the dictionaries (for many languages: first person
34141 singular indicative active for nouns, infinitive for verbs).
34142 For example, looking up the word form
34146 yields no results, while results are shown for the word form
34151 Your best bet is to highlight only the relevant part of such a word (e.
34152 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
34156 \begin_inset space \space{}
34167 s); then you will get suggestions without needing to adjust the query in
34168 the dialog, and also the replacement will probably be correct (as only
34169 the highlighted part will be replaced; thus the ending remains).
34172 \begin_layout Section
34174 \begin_inset Index idx
34177 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34184 \begin_inset Index idx
34187 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34188 Document ! Change Tracking
34194 \begin_inset CommandInset label
34196 name "sec:Change-Tracking"
34203 \begin_layout Standard
34204 When you work on a document collaboratively it is extremely useful to be
34205 able to see changes that others have made highlighted in the document.
34206 You can then decide if you want to accept a change or not.
34207 This can be achieved by turning on change tracking in the menu
34209 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
34211 \begin_inset space ~
34214 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
34216 \begin_inset space ~
34224 \begin_layout Standard
34225 Changes made in the document will then be highlighted by strokes and colors:
34239 The color depends on the author that made the change.
34240 You can change the color in
34242 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
34243 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
34245 \begin_inset space ~
34249 \begin_inset space ~
34254 \SpecialChar menuseparator
34260 \begin_inset Index idx
34263 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34264 Color ! Change tracking
34269 The author and the date of the change are shown in \SpecialChar LyX
34270 's status bar when the
34271 cursor is in changed text.
34272 The same information is shown when you use the toolbar button
34275 arg "changes-merge"
34281 \begin_layout Standard
34282 When change tracking is activated, you will see the review toolbar in \SpecialChar LyX
34284 \begin_inset Index idx
34287 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34296 \begin_layout Standard
34297 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
34303 \begin_layout Standard
34304 \begin_inset Graphics
34305 filename clipart/ChangesToolbar.png
34313 \begin_layout Standard
34314 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
34320 \begin_layout Standard
34321 The review toolbar as shown above contains the following buttons:
34324 \begin_layout Standard
34325 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
34331 \begin_layout Standard
34332 \begin_inset Tabular
34333 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="10" columns="2">
34334 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
34335 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
34336 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
34337 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
34338 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
34341 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34346 arg "changes-track"
34354 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
34357 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34360 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
34362 \begin_inset space ~
34365 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
34367 \begin_inset space ~
34376 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
34377 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
34380 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34385 arg "changes-output"
34393 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
34396 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34399 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
34401 \begin_inset space ~
34404 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
34406 \begin_inset space ~
34410 \begin_inset space ~
34414 \begin_inset space ~
34423 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
34424 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
34427 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34440 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
34443 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34444 Jumps to the next change
34450 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
34451 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
34454 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34459 arg "change-accept"
34467 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
34470 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34473 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
34475 \begin_inset space ~
34478 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
34480 \begin_inset space ~
34489 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
34490 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
34493 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34498 arg "change-reject"
34506 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
34509 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34512 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
34514 \begin_inset space ~
34517 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
34519 \begin_inset space ~
34528 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
34529 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
34532 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34537 arg "changes-merge"
34545 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
34548 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34551 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
34553 \begin_inset space ~
34556 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
34558 \begin_inset space ~
34567 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
34568 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
34571 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34576 arg "all-changes-accept"
34584 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
34587 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34590 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
34592 \begin_inset space ~
34595 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
34597 \begin_inset space ~
34601 \begin_inset space ~
34610 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
34611 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
34614 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34619 arg "all-changes-reject"
34627 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
34630 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34633 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
34635 \begin_inset space ~
34638 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
34640 \begin_inset space ~
34644 \begin_inset space ~
34653 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
34654 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
34657 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34670 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
34673 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34676 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
34677 Note\SpecialChar menuseparator
34682 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34690 \begin_inset space ~
34699 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
34700 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
34703 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34716 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
34719 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34722 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
34724 \begin_inset space ~
34740 \begin_layout Standard
34741 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
34747 \begin_layout Standard
34748 Not all changes are (yet) visualized, especially no format changes like
34768 \begin_layout Standard
34769 The review toolbar helps you to accept, reject, or merge changes – highlight
34770 the change and press one of the desired toolbar buttons.
34771 When you merge changes, a window pops up showing you information about
34772 the next change after the current cursor position.
34773 So you don't need to highlight a certain change.
34774 Within the merge window you can decide to accept or reject changes and
34775 step to the next change.
34776 This way you can jump through all the changes in the document.
34779 \begin_layout Standard
34780 The toolbar has two buttons to handle notes because notes are often important
34781 to describe a change.
34784 \begin_layout Standard
34785 To show the changes made in the output you need the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34791 \begin_inset Index idx
34794 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34796 -packages ! dvipost
34802 You will find it in the \SpecialChar TeX
34804 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
34810 or in the package manager of your \SpecialChar LaTeX
34814 \begin_layout Section
34815 Comparison of Documents
34816 \begin_inset CommandInset label
34818 name "sec:Comparison-of-Documents"
34823 \begin_inset Index idx
34826 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34827 Comparison of documents
34835 \begin_layout Standard
34836 You can compare two different \SpecialChar LyX
34839 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
34843 The comparison result is a \SpecialChar LyX
34844 file with change tracking enabled showing the
34846 In the comparison dialog you can select from which document \SpecialChar LyX
34848 the document settings for the resulting difference file with the option
34852 \begin_inset space ~
34856 \begin_inset space ~
34860 \begin_inset space ~
34869 \begin_inset space ~
34873 \begin_inset space ~
34877 \begin_inset space ~
34881 \begin_inset space ~
34885 \begin_inset space ~
34889 \begin_inset space ~
34894 enables the change tracking option
34897 \begin_inset space ~
34901 \begin_inset space ~
34905 \begin_inset space ~
34910 to visualize the differences also in the PDF output of the difference file.
34913 \begin_layout Section
34914 International Support
34915 \begin_inset Index idx
34918 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34919 International support
34927 \begin_layout Standard
34928 This section describes how to use \SpecialChar LyX
34929 with any language you want.
34930 For some languages there are special Wiki-pages that explain how to set
34931 up \SpecialChar LyX
34933 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
34935 key "Arabic,Armenian,Farsi,Hebrew,Latvian,Lithuanian,Mongolian,Vietnamese"
34942 \begin_layout Standard
34943 Besides languages, \SpecialChar LyX
34944 also supports phonetic symbols, see section
34945 \begin_inset space ~
34949 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34951 reference "subsec:Special-Character"
34958 \begin_layout Subsection
34960 \begin_inset Index idx
34963 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34970 \begin_inset Index idx
34973 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34974 Document ! Settings
34980 \begin_inset Index idx
34983 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34984 Document ! Language
34992 \begin_layout Standard
34995 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
34996 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
34999 dialog lets you set
35001 the language, the quote style and character encoding
35006 \begin_layout Standard
35011 you can choose the character encoding map you want to use for \SpecialChar LaTeX
35016 \begin_inset space ~
35021 is the preferred choice and works well in most cases.
35022 For details about the different encoding options see section
35023 \begin_inset space ~
35027 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35029 reference "sec:Language-encodings"
35036 \begin_layout Subsection
35037 Keyboard mapping configuration
35038 \begin_inset CommandInset label
35040 name "subsec:Keyboard-mapping"
35047 \begin_layout Standard
35048 If you have for example a U.
35049 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
35052 S.-style keyboard and want to write in a language other than English, you
35053 can use an alternate keymap.
35054 For example, if you want to write in Italian, you can configure \SpecialChar LyX
35059 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
35060 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
35061 Editing\SpecialChar menuseparator
35064 dialog allows you to choose up to two keyboard mappings, see section
35065 \begin_inset space ~
35069 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35071 reference "subsec:Keyboard-Map"
35076 You can choose primary and secondary keyboard languages and then select
35077 which one you want to use.
35080 \begin_layout Standard
35081 Finally, you may just want to change a few key mappings or create an entirely
35082 different keymap (for Vulcan, for instance).
35083 You may, for example, normally write in Italian on a U.
35084 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
35087 S.-style keyboard but want to include an occasional quotation in German.
35088 In such a case, you can write your own keyboard mapping or modify an existing
35089 one to support the characters you want.
35090 This and many other customizations are explained in the
35097 \begin_layout Chapter
35100 \begin_inset CommandInset label
35102 name "chap:The-User-Interface"
35109 \begin_layout Standard
35110 This appendix lists all the available menus and describes their functionality.
35111 It is designed as a quick reference if you are searching for a special
35112 topic inside the user's guide.
35115 \begin_layout Section
35117 \begin_inset Index idx
35120 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35129 \begin_layout Standard
35134 menu are the basic operations in addition to some more advanced operations.
35137 \begin_layout Subsection
35141 \begin_layout Standard
35142 Creates a new document.
35145 \begin_layout Subsection
35149 \begin_layout Standard
35150 This menu entry prompts you for a template to use.
35151 Selecting a template will automatically set certain layout features for
35152 the document, features you would otherwise need to change manually.
35155 \begin_layout Subsection
35159 \begin_layout Standard
35163 \begin_layout Subsection
35167 \begin_layout Standard
35168 The submenu shows a list of the recently opened files.
35169 Click there on a file to open it.
35172 \begin_layout Subsection
35176 \begin_layout Standard
35177 Closes the current document.
35180 \begin_layout Subsection
35184 \begin_layout Standard
35185 Closes all opened documents.
35188 \begin_layout Subsection
35192 \begin_layout Standard
35193 Saves the actual document.
35196 \begin_layout Subsection
35200 \begin_layout Standard
35201 Saves the actual document under a new name to create a copy.
35204 \begin_layout Subsection
35208 \begin_layout Standard
35209 Saves all opened documents.
35212 \begin_layout Subsection
35216 \begin_layout Standard
35217 Reloads the actual document from disk.
35220 \begin_layout Subsection
35224 \begin_layout Standard
35225 This is used when multiple people are working on the same document or when
35226 one person wants to keep a careful archive of changes.
35227 It is described in the section
35229 Version Control in \SpecialChar LyX
35234 Additional Features
35239 \begin_layout Subsection
35243 \begin_layout Standard
35244 Here you can import files from older \SpecialChar LyX
35245 -versions, HTML-files, \SpecialChar LaTeX
35246 -files, NoWeb-files,
35247 plain text files and comma separated, table-like text files (CSV).
35248 The files will be imported as a new \SpecialChar LyX
35252 \begin_layout Standard
35253 When using the menu entry
35256 \begin_inset space ~
35261 , line breaks in the text will start a new paragraph; when using the menu
35265 \begin_inset space ~
35269 \begin_inset space ~
35273 \begin_inset space ~
35278 , consecutive lines of text will be imported to one big paragraph.
35279 A new paragraph will begin when there is a blank line in the file.
35282 \begin_layout Subsection
35284 \begin_inset CommandInset label
35286 name "subsec:Export"
35293 \begin_layout Standard
35294 You can export your document to various file formats.
35295 The resulting files are placed in the directory of your \SpecialChar LyX
35297 The menu entries are not the same on all installations.
35298 They depend on the programs found by \SpecialChar LyX
35299 during its configuration.
35302 \begin_layout Standard
35303 Here is a list of all available entries; some of them are explained in detail
35305 \begin_inset space ~
35309 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35311 reference "subsec:Output-file-formats"
35318 \begin_layout Description
35324 \begin_inset space ~
35331 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35338 yX format of the special \SpecialChar LyX
35340 \begin_inset space ~
35343 1.4.x versions for Chinese, Japanese and Korean (CJK)
35344 \begin_inset Newline newline
35347 Since \SpecialChar LyX
35348 1.5.0 CJK support has been fully integrated into \SpecialChar LyX
35352 \begin_layout Description
35353 DocBook text file with code in the language SGML that is used for the markup
35359 \begin_layout Description
35361 \begin_inset space ~
35364 (XML) text file with code in the language XML that is used for the markup
35370 \begin_layout Description
35371 DraftDVI \SpecialChar LaTeX
35372 's native DVI-format.
35373 This format is not suitable if you have special characters or spaces in
35374 files paths or file names in your document.
35376 use this format internally as a pre-stage to export to
35383 \begin_layout Description
35384 DVI DVI-format that also allows the useage of special characters or spaces
35385 in files paths or file names
35388 \begin_layout Description
35390 \begin_inset space ~
35397 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35404 eX) DVI-format using the program
35406 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
35409 ; supports Unicode and the usage of non-\SpecialChar TeX
35413 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
35416 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35421 not all DVI-viewers are currently able to display this output format properly.
35429 \begin_layout Description
35431 \begin_inset space ~
35434 (cropped) the same as
35438 but with cropped page margins.
35441 \begin_layout Description
35443 \begin_inset space ~
35446 Dot text file with code in the programming language
35450 which is used to draw visualizations of graphs via the program
35455 \begin_layout Description
35459 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
35462 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35467 the exported file will be stored in a subdirectory.
35475 \begin_layout Description
35477 \begin_inset space ~
35481 \begin_inset space ~
35484 Word) HTML-format specialized so that the result can be imported to
35488 ; as a consequence of this formulas will be embedded as bitmap fonts and
35496 \begin_layout Description
35503 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35511 \begin_inset space ~
35522 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35535 text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
35536 source that is compilable with the program
35538 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
35542 \begin_layout Description
35549 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35557 \begin_inset space ~
35562 text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
35563 source, additionally all images used in the document
35564 will be converted to a format that is readable by the
35568 program (GIF, JPG, PDF, PNG)
35571 \begin_layout Description
35578 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35586 \begin_inset space ~
35591 text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
35592 source code, additionally all images used in the document
35593 will be converted to the EPS-format, only this format is readable by the
35601 \begin_layout Description
35608 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35616 \begin_inset space ~
35627 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35640 text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
35641 source that is compilable with the program
35647 \begin_layout Description
35649 \begin_inset space ~
35653 \begin_inset space ~
35662 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35672 ) text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
35673 source and also code in the syntax of the music notation
35679 \begin_layout Description
35686 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35696 \begin_inset space ~
35699 z.y.x \SpecialChar LyX
35700 -Document in a format readable by the \SpecialChar LyX
35702 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
35706 \begin_inset space \space{}
35711 \begin_inset space ~
35715 \begin_inset Quotes eld
35719 \begin_inset Quotes erd
35723 \begin_inset Quotes eld
35727 \begin_inset Quotes erd
35730 represent the version number)
35733 \begin_layout Description
35740 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35750 \begin_inset space ~
35754 \begin_inset space ~
35757 (zip|tar.gz) creates a zip-archive or a tar.gz-archive file (depending upon
35758 your system) that contains your document and all files that are necessary
35759 to compile it (images, child documents, Bib\SpecialChar TeX
35763 \begin_layout Description
35770 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35779 yXHTML HTML-format using \SpecialChar LyX
35780 's internal XHTML engine
35783 \begin_layout Description
35784 NoWeb text file with code in the format of the literate programming language
35789 \begin_layout Description
35790 OpenDocument OpenDocument-formatted file, to be opened with
35792 LibreOffice, OpenOffice, KOffice, Abiword
35795 (The OpenDocument-converter is a third-party product and may not work in
35799 \begin_layout Description
35801 \begin_inset space ~
35804 (cropped) the same as
35807 \begin_inset space ~
35812 but with cropped page margins
35815 \begin_layout Description
35819 \begin_inset space ~
35824 PDF-format using the program
35828 , produces internally a DVI-file which is then converted to a PDF-file
35831 \begin_layout Description
35835 \begin_inset space ~
35839 \begin_inset space ~
35847 \begin_inset space ~
35852 but with a reduced pixel resolution of 150
35853 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
35857 \begin_inset space \space{}
35860 useful for e-books to be read on tablet PCs or for large documents as intermedia
35864 \begin_layout Description
35868 \begin_inset space ~
35875 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35884 PDF-format using the program
35886 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
35889 , produces PDF-files directly
35892 \begin_layout Description
35896 \begin_inset space ~
35901 PDF-format using the program
35905 , produces PDF-files directly
35908 \begin_layout Description
35912 \begin_inset space ~
35917 PDF-format using the program
35921 , produces internally a PostScript-file which is then converted to a PDF-file
35924 \begin_layout Description
35928 \begin_inset space ~
35935 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35944 PDF-format using the program
35949 , produces PDF-files directly
35952 \begin_layout Description
35956 \begin_inset space ~
35964 \begin_layout Description
35968 \begin_inset space ~
35972 \begin_inset space ~
35977 text format, the document will first be converted to Postscript format
35978 and then exported as text using the program
35983 \begin_layout Description
35988 PostScript format using the program
35993 \begin_layout Description
35994 Sweave text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
35995 source and also code in the statistical programming
36009 it is possible to use
36013 -commands in \SpecialChar LaTeX
36017 \begin_layout Standard
36018 If one of the menu entries
36025 \begin_inset space ~
36034 is missing, you need to update your \SpecialChar LaTeX
36036 After updating you have to reconfigure \SpecialChar LyX
36038 \begin_inset space ~
36042 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36044 reference "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
36049 \begin_inset Index idx
36052 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36053 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
36062 \begin_layout Subsection
36066 \begin_layout Standard
36067 With this menu entry you can print your document to a file in PostScript
36068 format or send it to a printer.
36069 The printer will also use the document in PostScript format.
36070 The conversion to PostScript is done in the background by \SpecialChar LyX
36077 For more information have a look at section
36078 \begin_inset space ~
36082 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36084 reference "subsec:Printing-the-File"
36091 \begin_layout Subsection
36095 \begin_layout Standard
36096 This menu entry will only appear if you have a fax program installed (on
36097 Windows you additionally need to register its program path to \SpecialChar LyX
36100 \begin_inset space ~
36104 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36106 reference "sec:Paths"
36111 With this menu entry you can send your document to a fax program like
36120 The default format of the sent file is PostScript.
36121 The format can be changed in \SpecialChar LyX
36122 's preferences as described in section
36123 \begin_inset space ~
36127 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36129 reference "subsec:Converters"
36136 \begin_layout Subsection
36137 New and Close Window
36140 \begin_layout Standard
36141 Opens or closes a new instance of \SpecialChar LyX
36145 \begin_layout Subsection
36149 \begin_layout Standard
36150 Prompts you to save all unsaved documents and then exits.
36153 \begin_layout Section
36155 \begin_inset Index idx
36158 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36167 \begin_layout Subsection
36171 \begin_layout Standard
36172 Described in section
36173 \begin_inset space ~
36177 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36179 reference "sec:Undo-and-Redo"
36186 \begin_layout Subsection
36187 Cut, Copy, Paste, Paste Recent, Paste Special
36190 \begin_layout Standard
36191 Described in section
36192 \begin_inset space ~
36196 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36198 reference "sec:Basic-Editing-Features"
36205 \begin_layout Subsection
36209 \begin_layout Standard
36210 Selects the content of the inset in which the cursor currently is.
36211 If the cursor is outside an inset, the whole document will be selected.
36214 \begin_layout Subsection
36218 \begin_layout Standard
36219 Selects the whole document.
36222 \begin_layout Subsection
36223 Find & Replace (Quick)
36226 \begin_layout Standard
36227 Described in section
36228 \begin_inset space ~
36232 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36234 reference "sec:Basic-Editing-Features"
36241 \begin_layout Subsection
36242 Find & Replace (Advanced)
36245 \begin_layout Standard
36246 Described in section
36247 \begin_inset space ~
36251 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36253 reference "sec:Advanced-Find-and"
36260 \begin_layout Subsection
36261 Move Paragraph Up/Down
36264 \begin_layout Standard
36265 This shifts the paragraph in which the cursor currently is one paragraph
36269 \begin_layout Subsection
36273 \begin_layout Standard
36274 Described in section
36275 \begin_inset space ~
36279 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36281 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
36288 \begin_layout Subsection
36290 \begin_inset Index idx
36293 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36294 Paragraph ! Settings
36302 \begin_layout Standard
36303 Enables you to set the paragraph alignment, line spacing and label width.
36304 These settings only affect the paragraph in which the cursor is currently
36308 \begin_layout Standard
36309 You can also prevent the first line of the paragraph being indented if you
36310 have chosen to separate paragraphs with
36316 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
36317 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
36319 \begin_inset space ~
36327 \begin_layout Subsection
36331 \begin_layout Standard
36332 This menu only appears if the cursor is inside a table.
36333 It allows you to create multicolumn and multirow cells, add or remove borders
36334 of a cell and to set the vertical alignment of the cell.Table Settings and
36338 \begin_layout Standard
36339 These two menus are only fully active if the cursor is inside a table or
36341 Here you can change the properties of tables and formulas.
36342 The properties of tables are described in section
36343 \begin_inset space ~
36347 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36349 reference "sec:Tables"
36353 , the properties of formulas in chapter
36354 \begin_inset space ~
36358 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36360 reference "chap:Mathematical-Formulas"
36367 \begin_layout Subsection
36368 Increase/Decrease List Depth
36371 \begin_layout Standard
36372 These menus are only active if the cursor is in an environment that can
36374 They increase/decrease the environment nesting level as explained in section
36375 \begin_inset space ~
36379 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36381 reference "sec:Nesting"
36386 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36388 reference "subsec:Numbering-depth"
36395 \begin_layout Subsection
36398 Start New Environment/Start New Parent Environment
36401 \begin_layout Standard
36402 These menus are only visible if it is possible to have two consecutive environme
36403 nts of the same type.
36405 \begin_inset space ~
36409 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36411 reference "subsec:Separate-Nestings"
36415 for an explanation.
36418 \begin_layout Section
36420 \begin_inset Index idx
36423 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36432 \begin_layout Standard
36433 At the bottom of the
36437 menu the opened documents are listed.
36440 \begin_layout Subsection
36441 Open/Close all Insets
36444 \begin_layout Standard
36445 Opens/closes all insets in your document.
36448 \begin_layout Subsection
36449 Unfold/Fold Math Macros
36452 \begin_layout Standard
36453 Unfolds/folds the current math macro.
36456 \begin_layout Standard
36457 Math macros are described in the
36464 \begin_layout Subsection
36468 \begin_layout Standard
36469 Shows the outline window as described in sections
36470 \begin_inset space ~
36474 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36476 reference "sec:Navigating"
36481 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36483 reference "subsec:Table-of-Contents"
36490 \begin_layout Subsection
36494 \begin_layout Standard
36495 Opens a window showing the source code of the actual document, as described
36497 \begin_inset space ~
36501 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36503 reference "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
36510 \begin_layout Subsection
36514 \begin_layout Standard
36515 Opens a window showing console messages.
36516 This is useful for debugging \SpecialChar LyX
36518 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
36521 e., hunt for errors in the program) or to see what is going on in the background
36522 while \SpecialChar LaTeX
36523 is processing the document.
36526 \begin_layout Subsection
36528 \begin_inset CommandInset label
36530 name "subsec:Toolbars"
36535 \begin_inset Index idx
36538 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36547 \begin_layout Standard
36548 In this menu entry you can set the appearance of the different toolbars.
36549 All toolbars and the
36552 \begin_inset space ~
36557 can be turned on and off.
36562 state is denoted in the menu with a checkmark.
36574 \begin_inset space ~
36586 \begin_inset space ~
36591 toolbars can additionally be set to the state
36595 , denoted in the menu with the suffix
36602 \begin_layout Standard
36607 state the toolbar is permanently shown; in the
36611 state the toolbar is only shown when the cursor is in a certain environment
36612 or when a certain feature is enabled.
36613 That means that the review toolbar will only be shown if change tracking
36614 is activated, the math and table toolbars are only shown if the cursor
36615 is inside a formula or table respectively.
36618 \begin_layout Standard
36620 's toolbars and their buttons are explained in section
36621 \begin_inset space ~
36625 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36627 reference "sec:Toolbars"
36634 \begin_layout Subsection
36638 \begin_layout Standard
36642 \begin_inset space ~
36646 \begin_inset space ~
36650 \begin_inset space ~
36654 \begin_inset space ~
36658 \begin_inset space ~
36662 \begin_inset space ~
36667 will split \SpecialChar LyX
36668 's main window vertically while
36671 \begin_inset space ~
36675 \begin_inset space ~
36679 \begin_inset space ~
36683 \begin_inset space ~
36687 \begin_inset space ~
36691 \begin_inset space ~
36696 will split it horizontally.
36697 This allows you to view documents at the same time to compare them, or
36698 to view the same document, but at different positions.
36699 You can even split the main window several times to view, for example,
36700 three or more documents at the same time.
36701 To close a split view, use the menu
36704 \begin_inset space ~
36708 \begin_inset space ~
36716 \begin_layout Subsection
36720 \begin_layout Standard
36721 Closes a split view.
36724 \begin_layout Subsection
36728 \begin_layout Standard
36729 Using this menu entry or pressing F11 removes the menu bar and all toolbars
36730 so that you will see nothing but your text.
36731 It furthermore displays \SpecialChar LyX
36732 's main window fullscreen.
36733 To return from fullscreen to the normal view, press F11, or right-click
36734 and turn off the fullscreen mode in the context menu.
36737 \begin_layout Section
36739 \begin_inset Index idx
36742 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36751 \begin_layout Subsection
36755 \begin_layout Standard
36756 Inserts math constructs that are explained in chapter
36757 \begin_inset space ~
36761 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36763 reference "chap:Mathematical-Formulas"
36774 \begin_layout Subsection
36776 \begin_inset CommandInset label
36778 name "subsec:Special-Character"
36785 \begin_layout Standard
36786 Here you can insert the following characters:
36789 \begin_layout Description
36794 dialog which allows you to insert any character that can be output by your
36797 By default groups of characters are displayed in character categories;
36798 the available characters depend on the \SpecialChar LaTeX
36799 -packages you have installed.
36800 You can get a complete display by checking
36803 \begin_inset space ~
36809 \begin_inset Newline newline
36813 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
36816 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36821 Not all characters will be visible in the
36825 dialog because none of the screen fonts that you can set in the preferences
36827 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
36831 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36833 reference "subsec:Screen-Fonts"
36837 ) can display every character.
36845 \begin_layout Description
36846 Ellipsis Inserts an ellipsis: \SpecialChar ldots
36850 \begin_layout Description
36852 \begin_inset space ~
36856 \begin_inset space ~
36859 Sentence Inserts an end of sentence period as described in section
36860 \begin_inset space ~
36864 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36866 reference "subsec:Abbreviations"
36873 \begin_layout Description
36875 \begin_inset space ~
36878 Quote Inserts this quote: ", no matter what quote style you selected in
36881 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
36882 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
36888 \begin_layout Description
36890 \begin_inset space ~
36893 Quote Inserts a single quote in the quotation marks style selected in the
36896 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
36897 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
36903 \begin_layout Description
36905 \begin_inset space ~
36908 Hyphen Inserts a hyphen that is protected from line breaks: \SpecialChar nobreakdash
36912 \begin_layout Description
36914 \begin_inset space ~
36917 Slash Inserts a slash where a line break can also occur: \SpecialChar breakableslash
36921 \begin_layout Description
36923 \begin_inset space ~
36926 Space Inserts a character representing a single space (the one you get when
36932 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
36938 \begin_layout Description
36940 \begin_inset space ~
36943 Separator Inserts the menu separator sign: \SpecialChar menuseparator
36947 \begin_layout Description
36949 \begin_inset space ~
36953 \begin_inset Index idx
36956 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36963 \begin_inset Index idx
36966 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36967 Language ! Phonetic symbols
36972 Inserts a box where you can insert symbols from the International Phonetic
36973 Alphabet (IPA) and opens a toolbar which provides a large set of these
36975 To use this feature you must have the \SpecialChar LaTeX
36981 \begin_inset Index idx
36984 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36992 \begin_inset Newline newline
36995 More information about this feature can be found in the
37001 Help\SpecialChar menuseparator
37007 \begin_layout Subsection
37011 \begin_layout Standard
37012 Opens a submenu with the following options:
37015 \begin_layout Description
37016 Superscript Inserts a superscript: test
37017 \begin_inset script superscript
37019 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37028 \begin_layout Description
37029 Subscript Inserts a subscript: test
37030 \begin_inset script subscript
37032 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37041 \begin_layout Description
37043 \begin_inset space ~
37046 Space Inserts a protected space as described in section
37047 \begin_inset space ~
37051 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37053 reference "subsec:Protected-Space"
37060 \begin_layout Description
37062 \begin_inset space ~
37065 Space Inserts an inter-word space as described in section
37066 \begin_inset space ~
37070 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37072 reference "subsec:Inter-word-Space"
37079 \begin_layout Description
37081 \begin_inset space ~
37084 Space Inserts a thin space as described in section
37085 \begin_inset space ~
37089 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37091 reference "subsec:Thin-Space"
37098 \begin_layout Description
37100 \begin_inset space ~
37103 Space Inserts a character to visualize that there is or should be a space.
37105 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
37109 \begin_inset space \space{}
37112 useful if you need to indicate a space in a command sequence.
37113 An example from the \SpecialChar LyX
37119 \begin_inset Quotes eld
37122 To insert a fraction use the command
37127 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
37131 \begin_inset Formula $\downarrow$
37137 \begin_inset Quotes erd
37140 The visible space is hereby the character before the
37147 \begin_layout Description
37149 \begin_inset space ~
37152 Space Inserts horizontal space as described in section
37153 \begin_inset space ~
37157 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37159 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
37166 \begin_layout Description
37168 \begin_inset space ~
37171 Line Inserts a horizontal line as described in section
37172 \begin_inset space ~
37176 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37178 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Lines"
37185 \begin_layout Description
37187 \begin_inset space ~
37190 Space Inserts vertical space as described in section
37191 \begin_inset space ~
37195 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37197 reference "subsec:Vertical-Space"
37204 \begin_layout Description
37205 Phantom Inserts a Phantom space as described in section
37206 \begin_inset space ~
37210 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37212 reference "subsec:Phantom-Space"
37219 \begin_layout Description
37221 \begin_inset space ~
37224 Point Inserts a hyphenation point as described in section
37225 \begin_inset space ~
37229 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37231 reference "subsec:Hyphenation"
37238 \begin_layout Description
37240 \begin_inset space ~
37243 Break Inserts a ligature break as described in section
37244 \begin_inset space ~
37248 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37250 reference "subsec:Ligatures"
37257 \begin_layout Description
37259 \begin_inset space ~
37263 \begin_inset space ~
37266 Break Inserts a forced line break as described in section
37267 \begin_inset space ~
37271 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37273 reference "subsec:Forced-Line-Breaks"
37280 \begin_layout Description
37282 \begin_inset space ~
37285 Break Inserts a forced line break that right justifies the remaining text
37286 as described in section
37287 \begin_inset space ~
37291 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37293 reference "subsec:Forced-Line-Breaks"
37300 \begin_layout Description
37302 \begin_inset space ~
37305 Page Inserts a forced page break as described in section
37306 \begin_inset space ~
37310 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37312 reference "subsec:Forced-Page-Breaks"
37319 \begin_layout Description
37321 \begin_inset space ~
37324 Break Inserts a forced page break that shares the extra space among paragraph
37325 breaks instead of leaving it at the bottom of the page, as described in
37327 \begin_inset space ~
37331 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37333 reference "subsec:Forced-Page-Breaks"
37340 \begin_layout Description
37342 \begin_inset space ~
37345 Page Inserts a clear page break as described in section
37346 \begin_inset space ~
37350 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37352 reference "subsec:Clear-Page-Breaks"
37359 \begin_layout Description
37361 \begin_inset space ~
37365 \begin_inset space ~
37368 Page Inserts a clear doublepage break as described in section
37369 \begin_inset space ~
37373 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37375 reference "subsec:Clear-Page-Breaks"
37382 \begin_layout Subsection
37386 \begin_layout Standard
37387 Various lists can be inserted with this menu entry.
37391 \begin_inset space ~
37412 are described in section
37413 \begin_inset space ~
37417 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37419 reference "sec:toc"
37428 is described in section
37429 \begin_inset space ~
37433 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37435 reference "sec:Index"
37443 is described in section
37444 \begin_inset space ~
37448 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37450 reference "sec:Nomenclature"
37456 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
37459 is described in section
37460 \begin_inset space ~
37464 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37466 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
37473 \begin_layout Subsection
37477 \begin_layout Standard
37478 To insert floats, as described in section
37479 \begin_inset space ~
37483 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37485 reference "sec:Floats"
37489 and in detail the chapter
37496 \begin_inset space ~
37504 \begin_layout Subsection
37508 \begin_layout Standard
37509 To insert notes, described in section
37510 \begin_inset space ~
37514 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37516 reference "sec:Notes"
37523 \begin_layout Subsection
37527 \begin_layout Standard
37528 Inserts a branch inset, if any, and allowing you to create and insert a
37530 Branches are described in section
37531 \begin_inset space ~
37535 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37537 reference "sec:Branches"
37544 \begin_layout Subsection
37548 \begin_layout Standard
37549 Inserts document class-specific insets.
37550 Such insets only exist if they are defined in the layout file for a certain
37552 An example is the document class
37553 \begin_inset Quotes eld
37557 \begin_inset Quotes erd
37560 with three custom insets.
37563 Flex insets and InsetLayout
37567 Installing New Document Classes, The Layout file format
37573 manual explains how custom insets are defined.
37576 \begin_layout Subsection
37578 \begin_inset Index idx
37581 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37590 \begin_layout Standard
37591 This menu entry allows you to insert or include the contents of other files
37593 For more information see chapter
37595 External Document Parts
37598 \begin_inset space ~
37604 \begin_layout Subsection
37606 \begin_inset Index idx
37609 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37618 \begin_layout Standard
37619 Inserts a box in a certain style.
37620 Boxes are described in detail in the chapter
37627 \begin_inset space ~
37635 \begin_layout Subsection
37639 \begin_layout Standard
37644 dialog as described in section
37645 \begin_inset space ~
37649 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37651 reference "sec:Bibliography"
37658 \begin_layout Subsection
37662 \begin_layout Standard
37667 as described in section
37668 \begin_inset space ~
37672 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37674 reference "sec:Cross-References"
37681 \begin_layout Subsection
37685 \begin_layout Standard
37690 as described in section
37691 \begin_inset space ~
37695 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37697 reference "sec:Cross-References"
37704 \begin_layout Subsection
37706 \begin_inset Index idx
37709 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37716 \begin_inset Index idx
37719 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37720 Longtables ! Caption
37728 \begin_layout Standard
37729 Inserts a caption in a float or longtable.
37730 Floats are described in section
37731 \begin_inset space ~
37735 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37737 reference "sec:Floats"
37741 ; captions in longtables are described in the section
37748 \begin_inset space ~
37756 \begin_layout Subsection
37760 \begin_layout Standard
37761 Inserts an index entry as described in section
37762 \begin_inset space ~
37766 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37768 reference "sec:Index"
37775 \begin_layout Subsection
37779 \begin_layout Standard
37780 Inserts a nomenclature entry as described in section
37781 \begin_inset space ~
37785 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37787 reference "sec:Nomenclature"
37794 \begin_layout Subsection
37798 \begin_layout Standard
37799 Opens a dialog allowing you to specify the rows and columns of the table.
37800 Tables are described in section
37801 \begin_inset space ~
37805 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37807 reference "sec:Tables"
37811 and in detail in the chapter
37818 \begin_inset space ~
37826 \begin_layout Subsection
37830 \begin_layout Standard
37836 Graphics are described in section
37837 \begin_inset space ~
37841 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37843 reference "sec:Graphics"
37850 \begin_layout Subsection
37854 \begin_layout Standard
37855 Inserts a URL as described in section
37856 \begin_inset space ~
37860 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37862 reference "subsec:URLs"
37869 \begin_layout Subsection
37873 \begin_layout Standard
37874 Inserts a hyperlink as described in section
37875 \begin_inset space ~
37879 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37881 reference "subsec:Hyperlinks"
37888 \begin_layout Subsection
37892 \begin_layout Standard
37893 Inserts a footnote as described in section
37894 \begin_inset space ~
37898 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37900 reference "sec:Footnotes"
37907 \begin_layout Subsection
37911 \begin_layout Standard
37912 Inserts a marginal note as described in section
37913 \begin_inset space ~
37917 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37919 reference "sec:Marginal-Notes"
37926 \begin_layout Subsection
37930 \begin_layout Standard
37931 Is only visible if the cursor is in front, in or behind a section heading,
37932 title or caption of a float.
37933 Inserts a short title as described in section
37934 \begin_inset space ~
37938 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37940 reference "sec:Short-Titles"
37947 \begin_layout Subsection
37952 \begin_layout Standard
37953 Inserts a \SpecialChar TeX
37954 Code box as described in section
37955 \begin_inset space ~
37959 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37961 reference "subsec:TeX-Code-Boxes"
37968 \begin_layout Subsection
37970 \begin_inset Index idx
37973 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37982 \begin_layout Standard
37983 Inserts a program listings box.
37984 Program listings are explained in the chapter
37986 Program Code Listings
37991 \begin_inset space ~
37999 \begin_layout Subsection
38003 \begin_layout Standard
38004 Inserts the actual date.
38005 The format depends on the date format of the language that is used for
38009 offers various ways to insert a date which are explained and also compared
38017 \begin_inset space ~
38025 \begin_layout Subsection
38029 \begin_layout Standard
38030 Inserts a preview inset as described in section
38031 \begin_inset space ~
38035 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38037 reference "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
38044 \begin_layout Section
38046 \begin_inset Index idx
38049 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38058 \begin_layout Standard
38059 This menu lists the existing chapters, sections, figures, tables, etc.
38060 \begin_inset space ~
38063 of the current document.
38064 This allows you to navigate easily through your document.
38067 \begin_layout Subsection
38071 \begin_layout Standard
38072 With this menu entry you are able to define your own bookmarks.
38073 This is useful when you are working on a large document and often have
38074 to jump, for example, between section
38075 \begin_inset space ~
38079 To create bookmarks for this example, go to section
38080 \begin_inset space ~
38083 2.5 and use the submenu
38086 \begin_inset space ~
38090 \begin_inset space ~
38097 \begin_inset space ~
38103 \begin_inset space ~
38107 \begin_inset space ~
38113 Now you can jump easily between these sections by using the menu or by
38117 arg "bookmark-goto 1"
38123 arg "bookmark-goto 2"
38126 .You can also use bookmarks to jump between several opened documents.
38129 \begin_layout Standard
38130 The saved bookmarks are valid till the document is closed.
38134 \begin_inset space ~
38139 allows you to clear bookmarks while the submenu
38142 \begin_inset space ~
38147 jumps to the position in the document where you recently changed something.
38150 \begin_layout Subsection
38151 Next Note, Change, Cross-reference
38154 \begin_layout Standard
38155 Jump to the next note, change, or cross-reference after the current cursor
38159 \begin_layout Subsection
38163 \begin_layout Standard
38164 Only active if the cursor is in front of a cross-reference.
38165 Sets the cursor before the referenced label.
38166 (It is the same as if you right-click on a cross-reference box and use
38170 \begin_inset space ~
38174 \begin_inset space ~
38182 \begin_layout Subsection
38186 \begin_layout Standard
38187 Allows you to jump directly to the corresponding text part in the output,
38190 The \SpecialChar LyX
38191 Server\SpecialChar menuseparator
38193 \begin_inset space ~
38201 \begin_inset space ~
38206 manual for a detailed description.
38209 \begin_layout Section
38211 \begin_inset Index idx
38214 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38223 \begin_layout Subsection
38227 \begin_layout Standard
38228 Change Tracking is described in section
38229 \begin_inset space ~
38233 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38235 reference "sec:Change-Tracking"
38242 \begin_layout Subsection
38247 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38257 \begin_layout Standard
38258 After running \SpecialChar LaTeX
38259 by viewing or exporting a document, this menu will be enabled.
38260 It shows the logfile of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
38262 You can go to the next error or the next warning, search, copy something
38263 to the clipboard or update the view.
38264 With the help of the logfile experts can find in it reasons for \SpecialChar LaTeX
38268 \begin_layout Subsection
38269 Start Appendix Here
38272 \begin_layout Standard
38273 Sets the start of the appendices of the document at the current cursor position
38274 as described in section
38275 \begin_inset space ~
38279 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38281 reference "sec:Appendices"
38288 \begin_layout Subsection
38290 \begin_inset space ~
38296 \begin_layout Standard
38297 This menu entry generates the output in the format you have specified as
38298 default output format for the document (menu
38300 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
38301 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
38302 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
38304 \begin_inset space ~
38308 \begin_inset space ~
38314 \begin_inset space ~
38318 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38320 reference "sec:Doc-Output"
38324 ) or in the \SpecialChar LyX
38327 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
38328 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
38330 \begin_inset space ~
38333 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
38335 \begin_inset space ~
38338 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
38340 \begin_inset space ~
38344 \begin_inset space ~
38350 \begin_inset space ~
38354 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38356 reference "sec:File-Formats"
38360 ) and opens it in an appropriate viewer.
38361 The viewer can be set or changed in the preferences (menu
38363 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
38364 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
38366 \begin_inset space ~
38369 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
38371 \begin_inset space ~
38374 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
38378 \begin_inset space ~
38382 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38384 reference "sec:File-Formats"
38389 The default viewers are set by \SpecialChar LyX
38390 when it is first configured.
38391 The default output format is
38394 \begin_inset space ~
38402 \begin_layout Subsection
38403 View (Other Formats)
38406 \begin_layout Standard
38407 With this menu you can view your document in alternative output formats.
38408 The menu contains a list of available formats in which you can view the
38409 actual document with an external program.
38410 The menu entries are not the same on all installations — it depends on
38411 the \SpecialChar LaTeX
38412 programs that are found when \SpecialChar LyX
38414 All possible formats are listed in section
38415 \begin_inset space ~
38419 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38421 reference "subsec:Export"
38426 You should at least see the menu entry
38431 If it is missing, you need to update or repair your \SpecialChar LaTeX
38433 After updating you have to reconfigure \SpecialChar LyX
38435 \begin_inset space ~
38439 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38441 reference "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
38446 \begin_inset Index idx
38449 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38450 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
38459 \begin_layout Standard
38460 Invoking a view menu will start a viewer program.
38461 The viewer can be set or changed in the preferences (menu
38463 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
38464 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
38466 \begin_inset space ~
38469 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
38471 \begin_inset space ~
38474 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
38478 \begin_inset space ~
38482 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38484 reference "sec:File-Formats"
38489 The default viewers are set by \SpecialChar LyX
38490 when it is first configured.
38493 \begin_layout Subsection
38495 \begin_inset space ~
38501 \begin_layout Standard
38502 This menu entry allows you to update the view with your latest changes (in
38503 the default output format) without opening a new viewer window.
38506 \begin_layout Subsection
38507 Update (Other Formats)
38510 \begin_layout Standard
38511 With this menu you can update the view of alternative output formats of
38512 your document without opening a new viewer window.
38515 \begin_layout Subsection
38516 View Master Document
38519 \begin_layout Standard
38520 This menu item is only visible if your document is included to another document,
38522 \begin_inset Quotes eld
38526 \begin_inset Quotes erd
38536 \begin_inset space ~
38541 manual for more information on this topic).
38542 This item allows you to view the master document from within its child.
38543 That is, if you are working on a child document which is a chapter of a
38547 \begin_inset space ~
38551 \begin_inset space ~
38556 generates the output of the whole book, while
38560 will just output the chapter alone.
38563 \begin_layout Standard
38564 The format used by this function is the default output format as specified
38565 in the document settings (menu
38567 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
38568 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
38569 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
38571 \begin_inset space ~
38575 \begin_inset space ~
38581 \begin_inset space ~
38585 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38587 reference "sec:Doc-Output"
38591 ) or in the preferences (menu
38593 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
38594 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
38596 \begin_inset space ~
38599 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
38601 \begin_inset space ~
38604 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
38606 \begin_inset space ~
38610 \begin_inset space ~
38616 \begin_inset space ~
38620 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38622 reference "sec:File-Formats"
38629 \begin_layout Subsection
38630 Update Master Document
38633 \begin_layout Standard
38634 This menu item is only visible if your document is included to another document,
38636 \begin_inset Quotes eld
38640 \begin_inset Quotes erd
38650 \begin_inset space ~
38655 manual for more information on this topic).
38656 This item allows you to update the view of a master document from within
38657 its child without the need to switch to the master document itself.
38660 \begin_layout Standard
38661 The format used by this function is the default output format as specified
38662 in the document settings (menu
38664 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
38665 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
38666 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
38668 \begin_inset space ~
38672 \begin_inset space ~
38678 \begin_inset space ~
38682 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38684 reference "sec:Doc-Output"
38688 ) or in the preferences (menu
38690 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
38691 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
38693 \begin_inset space ~
38696 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
38698 \begin_inset space ~
38701 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
38703 \begin_inset space ~
38707 \begin_inset space ~
38713 \begin_inset space ~
38717 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38719 reference "sec:File-Formats"
38726 \begin_layout Subsection
38730 \begin_layout Standard
38731 Un/compresses the current document.
38734 \begin_layout Subsection
38738 \begin_layout Standard
38739 The document settings are described in appendix
38740 \begin_inset space ~
38744 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38746 reference "chap:The-Document-Settings"
38753 \begin_layout Section
38755 \begin_inset Index idx
38758 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38767 \begin_layout Subsection
38771 \begin_layout Standard
38772 Spell checking is explained in section
38773 \begin_inset space ~
38777 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38779 reference "sec:Spellchecking"
38786 \begin_layout Subsection
38790 \begin_layout Standard
38791 The thesaurus is described in section
38792 \begin_inset space ~
38796 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38798 reference "sec:Thesaurus"
38805 \begin_layout Subsection
38807 \begin_inset Index idx
38810 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38817 \begin_inset Index idx
38820 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38829 \begin_layout Standard
38830 Returns the number of the words and characters in the actual document or
38831 the highlighted document part.
38834 \begin_layout Subsection
38839 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38847 \begin_inset Index idx
38850 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38851 Chk\SpecialChar TeX
38860 \begin_layout Standard
38861 Generates with the help of the program
38863 Chk\SpecialChar TeX
38866 a log of possible \SpecialChar LaTeX
38867 -errors and displays it in a dialog.
38868 This feature is not available on Windows.
38871 \begin_layout Subsection
38876 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38884 \begin_inset Index idx
38887 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38897 \begin_layout Standard
38898 Shows you a list of the document classes and styles installed in your \SpecialChar LaTeX
38903 \begin_inset space ~
38908 to see the full filename paths.
38911 \begin_layout Subsection
38913 \begin_inset Index idx
38916 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38925 \begin_layout Standard
38926 Opens a dialog to compare \SpecialChar LyX
38927 files as described in section
38928 \begin_inset space ~
38932 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38934 reference "sec:Comparison-of-Documents"
38941 \begin_layout Subsection
38943 \begin_inset Index idx
38946 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38952 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38959 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
38964 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38977 \begin_inset Index idx
38980 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38981 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
38990 \begin_layout Standard
38991 Reconfigures \SpecialChar LyX
38992 ; that is, \SpecialChar LyX
38993 looks for \SpecialChar LaTeX
38994 -packages and programs it needs; see
38996 \begin_inset space ~
39000 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39002 reference "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
39009 \begin_layout Subsection
39013 \begin_layout Standard
39018 dialog as described in detail in appendix
39019 \begin_inset space ~
39023 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39025 reference "chap:The-Preferences-dialog"
39032 \begin_layout Section
39034 \begin_inset Index idx
39037 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39046 \begin_layout Standard
39047 This menu lists the documentation files of \SpecialChar LyX
39048 in the language of \SpecialChar LyX
39050 If a file is not available in this language, the English version will be
39054 \begin_layout Standard
39059 \begin_inset space ~
39064 shows a \SpecialChar LyX
39065 -document with information about the \SpecialChar LaTeX
39066 -packages and classes found
39067 by \SpecialChar LyX
39069 \begin_inset space ~
39073 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39075 reference "sec:LaTeX-Setup"
39082 \begin_layout Standard
39086 \begin_inset space ~
39093 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39102 gives information about the copyright, the credits and the \SpecialChar LyX
39107 \begin_layout Section
39109 \begin_inset CommandInset label
39111 name "sec:Toolbars"
39118 \begin_layout Standard
39119 How to show or hide toolbars is explained in section
39120 \begin_inset space ~
39124 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39126 reference "subsec:Toolbars"
39133 \begin_layout Standard
39134 It is also possible to define custom toolbars.
39135 This is described in the
39137 Additional Features
39142 \begin_layout Subsection
39144 \begin_inset Index idx
39147 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39156 \begin_layout Standard
39157 \begin_inset Graphics
39158 filename clipart/StandardToolbar.png
39166 \begin_layout Standard
39167 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
39173 \begin_layout Standard
39174 The standard toolbar as shown above contains from left to right the following
39179 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39191 \begin_inset Note Note
39194 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39195 This is necessary to left align the following longtables.
39200 manual for more information.
39208 \begin_layout Standard
39209 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
39215 \begin_layout Standard
39216 \begin_inset Tabular
39217 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="1" columns="2">
39218 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
39219 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
39220 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
39222 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39225 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39226 \begin_inset Graphics
39227 filename clipart/ToolbarEnvBox.png
39237 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39240 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39241 pull-down box for the environments
39254 \begin_layout Standard
39255 \begin_inset VSpace -10mm
39261 \begin_layout Standard
39263 \begin_inset Tabular
39264 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="22" columns="2">
39265 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
39266 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
39267 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
39268 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39269 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39272 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39285 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39288 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39291 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
39298 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39299 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39302 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39315 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39318 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39321 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
39328 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39329 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39332 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39345 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39348 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39351 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
39358 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39359 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39362 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39367 arg "dialog-show print"
39375 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39378 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39381 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
39388 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39389 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39392 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39397 arg "dialog-show spellchecker"
39405 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39408 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39411 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
39418 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39419 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39422 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39435 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39438 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39441 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
39448 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39449 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39452 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39465 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39468 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39471 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
39478 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39479 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39482 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39495 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39498 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39501 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
39508 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39509 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39512 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39525 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39528 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39531 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
39538 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39539 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39542 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39555 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39558 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39561 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
39568 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39569 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39572 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39577 arg "dialog-show findreplace"
39585 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39588 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39591 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
39593 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
39597 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
39601 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
39610 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39611 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39614 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39617 arg "dialog-toggle findreplaceadv"
39625 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39628 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39631 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
39633 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
39637 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
39641 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
39650 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39651 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39654 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39659 arg "bookmark-goto 0"
39667 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39670 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39673 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
39674 Bookmarks\SpecialChar menuseparator
39681 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39682 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39685 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39698 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39701 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39702 Emphasize text, function of the
39704 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
39706 \begin_inset space ~
39709 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
39718 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39719 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39722 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39735 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39738 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39739 Set text to noun style, function of the
39741 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
39743 \begin_inset space ~
39746 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
39755 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39756 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39759 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39764 arg "textstyle-apply"
39772 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39775 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39776 Format text using the current settings in the
39778 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
39780 \begin_inset space ~
39783 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
39792 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39793 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39796 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39809 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39812 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39815 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
39816 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
39818 \begin_inset space ~
39827 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39828 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39831 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39836 arg "dialog-show-new-inset graphics"
39844 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39847 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39850 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
39857 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39858 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39861 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39864 arg "tabular-insert"
39872 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39875 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39878 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
39885 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39886 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39889 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39894 arg "dialog-toggle toc"
39902 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39905 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39906 Toggle outline window on/off,
39908 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
39915 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39916 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39919 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39924 arg "toolbar-toggle math"
39932 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39935 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39936 Toggle math toolbar on/off
39942 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39943 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39946 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39951 arg "toolbar-toggle table"
39959 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39962 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39963 Toggle table toolbar on/off
39976 \begin_layout Subsection
39978 \begin_inset Index idx
39981 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39990 \begin_layout Standard
39991 \begin_inset Graphics
39992 filename clipart/ExtraToolbar.png
40000 \begin_layout Standard
40001 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
40007 \begin_layout Standard
40008 The extra toolbar as shown above contains from left to right the following
40012 \begin_layout Standard
40013 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
40019 \begin_layout Standard
40020 \begin_inset Tabular
40021 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="25" columns="2">
40022 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
40023 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
40024 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
40025 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40026 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40029 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40042 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40045 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40052 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40053 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40056 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40061 arg "layout Enumerate"
40069 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40072 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40079 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40080 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40083 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40088 arg "layout Itemize"
40096 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40099 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40106 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40107 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40110 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40123 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40126 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40133 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40134 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40137 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40142 arg "layout Description"
40150 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40153 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40160 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40161 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40164 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40169 arg "depth-increment"
40177 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40180 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40183 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
40185 \begin_inset space ~
40189 \begin_inset space ~
40198 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40199 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40202 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40207 arg "depth-decrement"
40215 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40218 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40221 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
40223 \begin_inset space ~
40227 \begin_inset space ~
40236 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40237 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40240 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40245 arg "float-insert figure"
40253 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40256 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40259 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
40260 Float\SpecialChar menuseparator
40267 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40268 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40271 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40276 arg "float-insert table"
40284 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40287 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40290 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
40291 Float\SpecialChar menuseparator
40298 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40299 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40302 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40315 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40318 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40321 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
40328 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40329 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40332 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40337 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
40345 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40348 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40351 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
40358 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40359 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40362 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40367 arg "dialog-show-new-inset citation"
40375 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40378 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40381 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
40388 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40389 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40392 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40405 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40408 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40411 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
40413 \begin_inset space ~
40422 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40423 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40426 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40431 arg "nomencl-insert"
40439 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40442 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40445 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
40447 \begin_inset space ~
40456 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40457 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40460 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40465 arg "footnote-insert"
40473 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40476 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40479 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
40486 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40487 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40490 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40495 arg "marginalnote-insert"
40503 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40506 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40509 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
40511 \begin_inset space ~
40520 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40521 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40524 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40537 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40540 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40543 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
40544 Note\SpecialChar menuseparator
40549 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40557 \begin_inset space ~
40566 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40567 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40570 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40575 arg "box-insert Frameless"
40583 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40586 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40589 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
40596 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40597 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40600 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40613 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40616 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40619 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
40626 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40627 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40630 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40643 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40646 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40649 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
40656 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40666 \begin_inset space ~
40675 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40676 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40679 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40684 arg "math-macro newmacroname newcommand"
40692 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40695 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40698 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
40699 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
40706 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40707 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40710 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40715 arg "dialog-show-new-inset include"
40723 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40726 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40729 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
40730 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
40732 \begin_inset space ~
40741 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40742 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40745 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40750 arg "dialog-show character"
40758 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40761 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40764 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
40766 \begin_inset space ~
40769 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
40776 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40777 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40780 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40785 arg "layout-paragraph"
40793 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40796 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40799 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
40801 \begin_inset space ~
40810 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40811 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40814 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40819 arg "thesaurus-entry"
40827 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40830 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40833 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
40847 \begin_layout Subsection
40848 View/Update Toolbar
40849 \begin_inset Index idx
40852 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40853 Toolbar ! View / Update
40861 \begin_layout Standard
40862 \begin_inset Graphics
40863 filename clipart/ViewToolbar.png
40870 \begin_layout Standard
40871 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
40877 \begin_layout Standard
40878 The view/update toolbar as shown above contains from left to right the following
40882 \begin_layout Standard
40883 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
40889 \begin_layout Standard
40890 \begin_inset Tabular
40891 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="7" columns="2">
40892 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
40893 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
40894 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
40895 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40896 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40899 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40912 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40915 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40918 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
40925 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40926 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40929 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40934 arg "buffer-update"
40942 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40945 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40948 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
40955 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40956 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40959 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40964 arg "master-buffer-view"
40972 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40975 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40978 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
40980 \begin_inset space ~
40989 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40990 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40993 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40998 arg "master-buffer-update"
41006 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41009 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41012 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
41014 \begin_inset space ~
41018 \begin_inset space ~
41027 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41028 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41031 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41036 arg "buffer-toggle-output-sync"
41044 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41047 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41050 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
41051 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
41052 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
41053 Synchronize with Output
41059 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41060 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41063 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41064 \begin_inset Graphics
41065 filename ../images/view-others.png
41067 groupId toolbarbuttons
41078 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41081 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41084 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
41085 View (Other Formats)
41091 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41092 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41095 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41096 \begin_inset Graphics
41097 filename ../images/update-others.png
41099 groupId toolbarbuttons
41108 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41111 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41114 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
41115 Update (Other Formats)
41128 \begin_layout Standard
41129 * These icons might look different for you if you do not use the default
41133 \begin_layout Subsection
41137 \begin_layout Standard
41138 The change tracking toolbar is explained in section
41139 \begin_inset space ~
41143 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41145 reference "sec:Change-Tracking"
41149 , the table toolbar
41150 \begin_inset Index idx
41153 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41162 \begin_inset space ~
41167 manual and the math macro toolbar
41168 \begin_inset Index idx
41171 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41184 \begin_layout Chapter
41185 The Document Settings
41186 \begin_inset CommandInset label
41188 name "chap:The-Document-Settings"
41193 \begin_inset Index idx
41196 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41197 Document ! Settings
41205 \begin_layout Standard
41209 \begin_inset space ~
41214 s dialog contains submenus to set properties for the whole document and
41215 is called with the menu
41217 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
41221 You can save your document settings as default with the
41223 Save as Document Defaults
41225 button in any dialog.
41226 This will create a template named
41230 which is automatically loaded by \SpecialChar LyX
41231 when you create a new document without
41235 \begin_layout Standard
41240 resets the document settings to the default of the document class.
41241 This affects mostly class options, the page layout and Numbering & TOC.
41244 \begin_layout Standard
41245 The different submenus of the dialog are explained in the following sections.
41246 There are so many document settings available that it might take a while
41247 to find the one you are looking for.
41248 To find a setting quicker, you can use the search field which is above
41249 the submenus of the dialog.
41251 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
41255 \begin_inset space \space{}
41259 \begin_inset Quotes eld
41263 \begin_inset Quotes erd
41266 , you will see that some submenus will be grayed-out and disabled.
41267 Only the submenus with page settings stay enabled.
41268 The found page settings are labeled red in these submenus.
41271 \begin_layout Section
41275 \begin_layout Standard
41276 Here you set the document class, class options, a graphics driver, and a
41278 Document classes are described in section
41279 \begin_inset space ~
41283 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41285 reference "sec:Document-Classes"
41293 \begin_layout Standard
41297 \begin_inset space ~
41302 you can load you own layout-file, that is not in \SpecialChar LyX
41307 folder and thus not recognized by \SpecialChar LyX
41308 as a layout for a document class.
41309 For more about layout-files, see the chapter
41311 Installing New Document Classes, Types of Layout Files
41320 \begin_layout Standard
41321 Some classes use special class options by default.
41322 If this is the case, they are listed in the field
41326 and you can decide to use them or not.
41327 If you do not know exactly what the default class options are for, it is
41328 recommended you leave them untouched.
41333 is used for \SpecialChar LaTeX
41334 's graphics, color and page layout packages.
41339 , the default driver for the \SpecialChar LaTeX
41341 It is recommended that you use the default unless you know what you are
41346 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41347 When you want to use one of the following drivers
41348 \begin_inset Newline newline
41353 dvi2ps, dvialw, dvilaser, dvitops, psprint, pubps, ln
41356 \begin_inset Newline newline
41359 you first have to activate them in your \SpecialChar LaTeX
41360 distribution, see section
41365 \begin_inset CommandInset href
41367 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/required/graphics/grfguide.pdf"
41379 \begin_layout Standard
41384 document is necessary if the current document is a child or subdocument.
41385 The master document will be used by \SpecialChar LyX
41386 in the background if the child document
41387 is opened without its master.
41388 This way child documents are always compilable.
41389 More about master and child documents is explained in the section
41396 \begin_inset space ~
41404 \begin_layout Standard
41405 There is also an option to suppress the date and one to use the \SpecialChar LaTeX
41416 \begin_inset Index idx
41419 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41421 -packages ! prettyref
41427 \begin_inset Index idx
41430 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41432 -packages ! refstyle
41437 for cross-references, see section
41438 \begin_inset space ~
41442 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41444 reference "sec:Cross-References"
41451 \begin_layout Section
41455 \begin_layout Standard
41456 This submenu is only visible when your document includes child documents.
41457 Please refer to the section
41460 \begin_inset space ~
41468 \begin_inset space ~
41473 manual for details.
41476 \begin_layout Section
41480 \begin_layout Standard
41481 Modules are explained in section
41482 \begin_inset space ~
41486 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41488 reference "subsec:Modules"
41495 \begin_layout Section
41499 \begin_layout Standard
41501 \begin_inset space ~
41505 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41507 reference "subsec:Local-Layout"
41514 \begin_layout Section
41518 \begin_layout Standard
41519 The document font settings are described in section
41520 \begin_inset space ~
41524 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41526 reference "sec:Fonts-and-Text"
41533 \begin_layout Section
41537 \begin_layout Standard
41538 You can specify if paragraphs should be separated by
41550 \begin_inset space ~
41555 and whether it should be a
41558 \begin_inset space ~
41563 can also be specified here.
41566 \begin_layout Standard
41567 Note that \SpecialChar LyX
41568 will not show two columns or the specified line spacing on screen.
41569 That would be impractical, often unreadable, and is not part of the WYSIWYM
41571 However, it will be as you specified in the output.
41574 \begin_layout Standard
41577 Use justification in \SpecialChar LyX
41580 you can decide if \SpecialChar LyX
41581 justifies the text on screen.
41582 This only affects the text inside \SpecialChar LyX
41586 \begin_layout Section
41590 \begin_layout Standard
41591 This dialog is described in sections
41592 \begin_inset space ~
41596 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41598 reference "subsec:Paper-Size,-Orientation"
41603 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41605 reference "subsec:Document-Layout"
41612 \begin_layout Section
41616 \begin_layout Standard
41617 Here you can adjust the page margins as described in section
41618 \begin_inset space ~
41622 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41624 reference "subsec:Margins"
41631 \begin_layout Section
41633 \begin_inset CommandInset label
41635 name "sec:Language-encodings"
41640 \begin_inset Index idx
41643 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41644 Language ! Encoding
41652 \begin_layout Standard
41653 The document language and quote styles are set here.
41654 The encoding specifies how the document content is exported to \SpecialChar LaTeX
41655 (the \SpecialChar LyX
41657 is always encoded in utf8).
41658 All characters that cannot be encoded using the specified encoding will
41659 be exported as \SpecialChar LaTeX
41660 -commands (this can fail if a \SpecialChar LaTeX
41661 -command is not known for
41662 a particular character).
41665 \begin_layout Standard
41666 If you use the option
41671 determines the encoding of a text part from the language of this text.
41672 If the document contains text in more than one language you may get more
41673 than one encoding in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
41675 If you do not use this option then the complete document will always use
41676 exactly one encoding.
41677 Checking this option is the preferred setting.
41680 \begin_layout Standard
41682 also supports Unicode output, which is particularly useful if you need
41683 lots of special symbols or non-alphabetic scripts, respectively.
41684 If you want to use this (and your \SpecialChar LaTeX
41685 installation supports Unicode), choose
41686 one of the four utf8 variants from the list below.
41687 Unfortunately the Unicode support of standard \SpecialChar LaTeX
41688 is quite incomplete, so
41689 it is not uncommon that a file with lots of Unicode symbols works fine
41694 (when \SpecialChar LyX
41695 uses its list of known \SpecialChar LaTeX
41696 -commands), but does not work with a fixed
41697 utf8 encoding (when the list of known \SpecialChar LaTeX
41698 -commands is not used, because all
41699 Unicode symbols can be encoded in utf8).
41700 The situation is much better with Xe\SpecialChar TeX
41701 and Lua\SpecialChar TeX
41702 , two new alternative engines
41703 to standard \SpecialChar LaTeX
41705 Both engines support Unicode natively.
41707 now also supports these two engines (via the output formats
41710 \begin_inset space ~
41717 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41729 \begin_inset space ~
41736 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41748 \begin_inset space ~
41751 (Lua\SpecialChar TeX
41755 \begin_inset space ~
41759 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41761 reference "subsec:Output-file-formats"
41766 So if you are using many special or accented characters and
41770 fails, you might try out one of these new engines.
41773 \begin_layout Standard
41777 \begin_inset space ~
41782 determines the \SpecialChar LaTeX
41783 -package that is used for hyphenation and the translation
41785 \begin_inset Quotes eld
41789 \begin_inset Quotes erd
41793 The possible settings are:
41796 \begin_layout Description
41797 Default uses the language package that is selected in
41799 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
41800 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
41804 \begin_inset space ~
41808 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41810 reference "subsec:Prefs-Language"
41817 \begin_layout Description
41818 Automatic selects the most suitable language package for the view/export
41819 format you will use.
41820 In many cases this will be
41825 \begin_inset Index idx
41828 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41836 If the newer package
41841 \begin_inset Index idx
41844 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41846 -packages ! polyglossia
41851 is more appropriate (is the case when using Xe\SpecialChar TeX
41853 \change_inserted -712698321 1432730145
41857 \change_deleted -712698321 1432730156
41860 non-\SpecialChar TeX
41861 fonts), this package will be used instead of
41868 \begin_layout Description
41870 \begin_inset space ~
41881 would be more appropriate.
41884 \begin_layout Description
41885 Custom allows you to specify a language package command of your choice.
41886 For example if you want to use a language-specific package like
41890 (for German texts), type in
41893 \begin_inset Newline newline
41898 usepackage{ngerman}
41901 \begin_layout Description
41902 None will not use a language package.
41903 This is necessary for some document classes for scientific articles.
41906 \begin_layout Standard
41907 Here is a list with the important encodings:
41910 \begin_layout Description
41912 \begin_inset space ~
41916 \begin_inset space ~
41920 \begin_inset space ~
41927 , but the \SpecialChar LaTeX
41933 \begin_inset Index idx
41936 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41938 -packages ! inputenc
41944 When using this, you probably need to load some additional packages manually
41945 in the preamble and specify the used encoding for text parts in foreign
41946 languages in \SpecialChar TeX
41950 \begin_layout Description
41951 ASCII the ASCII encoding, covers only plain English (7-bit ASCII).
41953 converts all other characters into \SpecialChar LaTeX
41954 commands, which may result in a big
41955 file when lots of \SpecialChar LaTeX
41956 -commands are needed.
41959 \begin_layout Description
41961 \begin_inset space ~
41965 \begin_inset space ~
41968 1256) MS Windows code page for Arabic and Farsi
41971 \begin_layout Description
41973 \begin_inset space ~
41977 \begin_inset space ~
41980 8859-6) for Arabic and Farsi
41983 \begin_layout Description
41985 \begin_inset space ~
41988 (ArmSCII8) for Armenian
41991 \begin_layout Description
41993 \begin_inset space ~
41997 \begin_inset space ~
42000 1257) MS Windows code page for Estonian, Latvian and Lithuanian, the same
42001 as the ISO-8859-13 encoding
42004 \begin_layout Description
42006 \begin_inset space ~
42010 \begin_inset space ~
42013 8859-13) for Estonian, Latvian and Lithuanian, a superset of the ISO-8859-4
42017 \begin_layout Description
42019 \begin_inset space ~
42023 \begin_inset space ~
42026 8859-4) (latin 4) for Estonian, Latvian and Lithuanian, a subset of the
42027 ISO-8859-13 encoding
42030 \begin_layout Description
42032 \begin_inset space ~
42036 \begin_inset space ~
42040 \begin_inset space ~
42043 1250) MS Windows code page for ISO
42044 \begin_inset space ~
42050 \begin_layout Description
42052 \begin_inset space ~
42056 \begin_inset space ~
42060 \begin_inset space ~
42063 8859-2) (latin 2) covers Albanian, Croatian, Czech, German, Hungarian, Polish,
42064 Romanian, Slovak and Slovenian
42067 \begin_layout Description
42069 \begin_inset space ~
42073 \begin_inset space ~
42076 (EUC-CN) for simplified Chinese, used especially on UNIX OSes, since 2001
42077 this encoding is officially replaced by the encoding GB18030, as GB18030
42078 is not available for \SpecialChar LaTeX
42079 you should try to use the encoding Unicode
42080 \begin_inset space ~
42084 \begin_inset space ~
42090 \begin_layout Description
42092 \begin_inset space ~
42096 \begin_inset space ~
42099 (GBK) for simplified Chinese, is the same as the Windows code page CP 936
42100 except for the Euro currency sign, since 2001 this encoding is officially
42101 replaced by the encoding GB18030, as GB18030 is not available for \SpecialChar LaTeX
42103 should try to use the encoding Unicode
42104 \begin_inset space ~
42108 \begin_inset space ~
42114 \begin_layout Description
42116 \begin_inset space ~
42120 \begin_inset space ~
42123 (EUC-TW) for traditional Chinese
42126 \begin_layout Description
42128 \begin_inset space ~
42132 \begin_inset space ~
42135 1251) MS Windows code page for Cyrillic
42138 \begin_layout Description
42140 \begin_inset space ~
42144 \begin_inset space ~
42147 8859-5) covers Belorussian, Bulgarian, Macedonian, Serbian and Ukrainian
42150 \begin_layout Description
42152 \begin_inset space ~
42155 (KOI8-R) standard Cyrillic especially for Russian
42158 \begin_layout Description
42160 \begin_inset space ~
42163 (KOI8-U) Cyrillic for Ukrainian
42166 \begin_layout Description
42168 \begin_inset space ~
42172 \begin_inset space ~
42175 154) Cyrillic for Kazakh
42178 \begin_layout Description
42180 \begin_inset space ~
42184 \begin_inset space ~
42190 \begin_layout Description
42192 \begin_inset space ~
42196 \begin_inset space ~
42199 1255) MS Windows code page for Hebrew, a superset of the ISO-8859-8 encoding
42202 \begin_layout Description
42204 \begin_inset space ~
42208 \begin_inset space ~
42214 \begin_layout Description
42216 \begin_inset space ~
42220 \begin_inset space ~
42223 (EUC-JP) EUC-JP encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
42229 \begin_inset Index idx
42232 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42239 , when using this, set the document language to
42244 \begin_layout Description
42246 \begin_inset space ~
42250 \begin_inset space ~
42253 (JIS) JIS encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
42258 , when using this, set the document language to
42261 \begin_inset space ~
42267 \begin_layout Description
42269 \begin_inset space ~
42273 \begin_inset space ~
42276 (EUC-JP) EUC-JP encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
42282 \begin_inset Index idx
42285 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42287 -packages ! japanese
42292 , when using this, set the document language to
42297 \begin_layout Description
42299 \begin_inset space ~
42303 \begin_inset space ~
42306 (JIS) JIS encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
42311 , when using this, set the document language to
42316 \begin_layout Description
42318 \begin_inset space ~
42322 \begin_inset space ~
42325 (SJIS) SJIS encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
42330 , when using this, set the document language to
42335 \begin_layout Description
42337 \begin_inset space ~
42340 (EUC-KR) for Korean
42343 \begin_layout Description
42345 \begin_inset space ~
42349 \begin_inset space ~
42353 \begin_inset space ~
42356 8859-3) (latin 3) covers Esperanto, Galician, Maltese and Turkish
42359 \begin_layout Description
42361 \begin_inset space ~
42365 \begin_inset space ~
42369 \begin_inset space ~
42372 8859-16) (latin 10) covers Albanian, Croatian, Finnish, French, German,
42373 Hungarian, Irish Gaelic, Italian, Polish, Romanian and Slovenian, is designed
42374 to cover many languages and characters with diacritics
42377 \begin_layout Description
42379 \begin_inset space ~
42383 \begin_inset space ~
42389 \begin_layout Description
42391 \begin_inset space ~
42395 \begin_inset space ~
42398 8859-9) (latin 5) for Turkish, is like the ISO-8859-1 encoding where the
42399 Icelandic letters are replaced by Turkish ones
42402 \begin_layout Description
42404 \begin_inset space ~
42408 \begin_inset space ~
42411 (utf8) Unicode utf8 with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
42417 \begin_inset Index idx
42420 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42427 (for the languages Chinese, Japanese and Korean)
42430 \begin_layout Description
42432 \begin_inset space ~
42435 (Xe\SpecialChar TeX
42437 \begin_inset space ~
42440 (utf8) Unicode utf8 to be used with
42447 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
42450 , which use Unicode directly, without the help of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
42457 automatically selects this encoding if you export or preview Xe\SpecialChar TeX
42458 or Lua\SpecialChar TeX
42460 Normally you do not need to set this encoding manually.
42463 \begin_layout Description
42465 \begin_inset space ~
42469 \begin_inset space ~
42472 (utf8x) Unicode utf8 based on the \SpecialChar LaTeX
42478 \begin_inset Index idx
42481 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42488 (comprehensive, including Latin, Greek, Cyrillic and CJK scripts).
42491 \begin_layout Description
42493 \begin_inset space ~
42496 (utf8) Unicode utf8 based on the \SpecialChar LaTeX
42502 \begin_inset Index idx
42505 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42507 -packages ! inputenc
42513 Currently only a limited range of characters (mainly for Latin scripts)
42517 \begin_layout Description
42519 \begin_inset space ~
42523 \begin_inset space ~
42527 \begin_inset space ~
42530 1252) MS Windows code page for ISO
42531 \begin_inset space ~
42537 \begin_layout Description
42539 \begin_inset space ~
42543 \begin_inset space ~
42547 \begin_inset space ~
42550 8859-1) (latin 1) covers the languages Albanian, Catalan, Danish, Dutch,
42551 English, Faroese, Finnish, French, Galician, German, Icelandic, Irish,
42552 Italian, Norwegian, Portuguese, Spanish and Swedish; better use the ISO-8859-15
42556 \begin_layout Description
42558 \begin_inset space ~
42562 \begin_inset space ~
42566 \begin_inset space ~
42569 8859-15) (latin 9) like the ISO-8859-1 encoding, but with the Euro currency
42570 sign, the œ-ligature and some characters used for French and Finnish
42573 \begin_layout Section
42575 \begin_inset Index idx
42578 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42585 \begin_inset Index idx
42588 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42595 \begin_inset Index idx
42598 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42599 Color ! Shaded boxes
42605 \begin_inset Index idx
42608 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42609 Color ! Greyed-out notes
42617 \begin_layout Standard
42618 Here you can alter the font color for the
42622 (default: black), for
42625 \begin_inset space ~
42630 (default: light grey)for the background color for the
42634 (default: white) and for
42637 \begin_inset space ~
42647 sets the color back to the default.
42650 \begin_layout Standard
42651 Clicking any button showing
42659 opens a dialog enabling you to choose from a selection of colors or from
42660 a color-picker or to specify a color using HSL or RGB values.
42661 In the dialog you can add any color to the custom colors to select them
42662 later more quickly.
42665 \begin_layout Standard
42666 Note, if you change the
42669 \begin_inset space ~
42674 font color and use the option
42677 \begin_inset space ~
42682 in the document settings under
42685 \begin_inset space ~
42690 , you probably also need to change the link font color as described in section
42691 \begin_inset space ~
42695 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42697 reference "sec:PDF-Properties"
42704 \begin_layout Standard
42705 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
42711 \begin_layout Standard
42715 \begin_inset space ~
42724 background for every page in your document if you use these commands as
42727 \begin_inset space ~
42730 Code after a forced page break:
42733 \begin_layout Itemize
42734 For the page color:
42735 \begin_inset Newline newline
42742 pagecolor{color name}
42745 \begin_layout Itemize
42746 For the text color:
42747 \begin_inset Newline newline
42757 \begin_layout Standard
42758 You are restricted to one of
42794 unless you have defined your own color (see the section
42801 \begin_inset space ~
42807 \begin_inset Newline newline
42810 If you have changed a text or background color, you can use the following
42811 names to refer to them:
42814 \begin_layout Itemize
42820 \begin_inset Newline newline
42825 page_backgroundcolor
42828 \begin_layout Itemize
42832 \begin_inset space ~
42838 \begin_inset Newline newline
42846 \begin_layout Itemize
42850 \begin_inset space ~
42856 \begin_inset Newline newline
42864 \begin_layout Itemize
42868 \begin_inset space ~
42874 \begin_inset Newline newline
42882 \begin_layout Standard
42883 To see how to define and use custom colors, see section
42886 \begin_inset space ~
42894 \begin_inset space ~
42902 \begin_layout Section
42906 \begin_layout Standard
42907 Here you can adjust the
42911 depth of section headings and the section depth in the
42915 as described in section
42916 \begin_inset space ~
42920 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42922 reference "subsec:Numbering-depth"
42929 \begin_layout Section
42933 \begin_layout Standard
42934 Here you can specify if a citation style using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
42940 \begin_inset Index idx
42943 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42955 \begin_inset Index idx
42958 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42960 -packages ! jurabib
42968 Sectioned bibliography
42970 using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
42976 \begin_inset Index idx
42979 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42981 -packages ! bibtopic
42986 and you can select a
42990 for the generation of the bibliography.
42991 For a further description see section
42992 \begin_inset space ~
42996 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42998 reference "sec:Bibliography"
43005 \begin_layout Section
43009 \begin_layout Standard
43010 Here you can define the
43014 that will generate your index and you can define additional indexes (see
43016 \begin_inset space ~
43020 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43022 reference "sec:Index"
43029 \begin_layout Section
43033 \begin_layout Standard
43034 The PDF properties are explained in section
43035 \begin_inset space ~
43039 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43041 reference "sec:PDF-Properties"
43048 \begin_layout Section
43052 \begin_layout Standard
43053 These options will force \SpecialChar LyX
43054 to use the \SpecialChar LaTeX
43060 \begin_inset Index idx
43063 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43065 -packages ! amsmath
43075 \begin_inset Index idx
43078 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43080 -packages ! amssymb
43090 \begin_inset Index idx
43093 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43105 \begin_inset Index idx
43108 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43120 \begin_inset Index idx
43123 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43125 -packages ! mathdots
43135 \begin_inset Index idx
43138 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43140 -packages ! mathtools
43150 \begin_inset Index idx
43153 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43165 \begin_inset Index idx
43168 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43170 -packages ! stackrel
43180 \begin_inset Index idx
43183 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43185 -packages ! stmaryrd
43195 \begin_inset Index idx
43198 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43200 -packages ! undertilde
43205 , or to use them automatically when they are needed.
43208 \begin_layout Description
43209 amsmath is needed for many constructs, so when you get \SpecialChar LaTeX
43210 -errors in formulas,
43211 ensure that you have this enabled.
43214 \begin_layout Description
43215 amssymb is needed for some special math symbols like bold or upright Greek
43216 letters, so when you get \SpecialChar LaTeX
43217 -errors in formulas, ensure that you have this
43221 \begin_layout Description
43222 cancel is used for canceled formulas, see section
43225 \begin_inset space ~
43237 \begin_layout Description
43238 esint is used for special integral characters, see section
43241 \begin_inset space ~
43253 \begin_layout Description
43254 mathdots is used for special ellipses, see section
43265 \begin_layout Description
43266 mathtools is used for the math commands
43302 and labeled arrows, see the corresponding sections in the
43309 \begin_layout Description
43310 mhchem is used for chemical equations, see section
43312 Chemical Symbols and Equations
43321 \begin_layout Description
43322 stackrel is used for the math command
43339 \begin_layout Description
43340 stmaryrd is used for a few special math symbols.
43343 \begin_layout Description
43344 undertilde is used for the math command
43352 Accents for one Character
43361 \begin_layout Section
43365 \begin_layout Standard
43366 The float placement options are described in the section
43369 \begin_inset space ~
43377 \begin_inset space ~
43385 \begin_layout Section
43389 \begin_layout Standard
43390 The listings settings are explained in the chapter
43392 Program Code Listings
43397 \begin_inset space ~
43405 \begin_layout Section
43409 \begin_layout Standard
43410 Here you can adjust the characters used for the itemize
43418 set to be used and set the
43423 The itemize environment is described in section
43424 \begin_inset space ~
43428 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43430 reference "sec:Itemize"
43437 \begin_layout Standard
43438 You can furthermore specify a
43441 \begin_inset space ~
43446 by inserting in this field the \SpecialChar LaTeX
43447 command of the desired character.
43448 For example to use the € sign, you have to insert the command
43455 For math symbols you additionally need to enclose the command with $ signs.
43457 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
43461 \begin_inset space \space{}
43465 \begin_inset Formula $\circlearrowright$
43475 To find the command for a math symbol, create a formula and hover the mouse
43476 over the desired symbol in the math toolbar.
43479 \begin_layout Standard
43480 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
43483 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43488 Some characters require to load special \SpecialChar LaTeX
43489 -packages in the preamble (menu
43492 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
43493 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
43496 \begin_inset space ~
43502 For example for the € sign one needs to add the line
43506 usepackage{textcomp}
43509 For most math symbols it is sufficient to add the line
43513 usepackage{amssymb}
43523 \begin_layout Section
43527 \begin_layout Standard
43528 Branches are described in section
43529 \begin_inset space ~
43533 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43535 reference "sec:Branches"
43542 \begin_layout Section
43544 \begin_inset CommandInset label
43546 name "sec:Doc-Output"
43553 \begin_layout Standard
43554 Here you can define some output specifics for the current document:
43557 \begin_layout Description
43559 \begin_inset space ~
43563 \begin_inset space ~
43566 Format: The format that is used when you enter
43567 \begin_inset Quotes eld
43571 \begin_inset Quotes erd
43575 \begin_inset Quotes eld
43579 \begin_inset Quotes erd
43583 \begin_inset Quotes eld
43586 View Master Document
43587 \begin_inset Quotes erd
43591 \begin_inset Quotes eld
43594 Update Master Document
43595 \begin_inset Quotes erd
43602 menu or the toolbar.
43603 The default is set in
43605 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
43606 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
43608 \begin_inset space ~
43611 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
43615 \begin_inset space ~
43619 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43621 reference "sec:File-Formats"
43628 \begin_layout Description
43630 \begin_inset space ~
43634 \begin_inset space ~
43637 Output settings for the menu
43639 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
43641 \begin_inset space ~
43647 For a detailed description see section
43649 Reverse DVI/PDF search
43654 \begin_inset space ~
43662 \begin_layout Description
43664 \begin_inset space ~
43668 \begin_inset space ~
43671 Options offers settings for the export format
43677 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43690 \begin_inset space ~
43695 will assure that the output follows exactly version
43696 \begin_inset space ~
43699 1.1 of the XHTML standard.
43703 \begin_inset space ~
43708 settings are described in detail in section
43710 Math Output in XHTML
43715 \begin_inset space ~
43724 \begin_inset space ~
43728 \begin_inset space ~
43733 is used for the size of equations in the output.
43736 \begin_layout Section
43741 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43751 \begin_layout Standard
43752 In this text field you can enter commands to load special \SpecialChar LaTeX
43754 define \SpecialChar LaTeX
43756 The preamble is a thing for \SpecialChar LaTeX
43758 You should not enter commands here until you know exactly what you are
43762 \begin_layout Standard
43763 An introduction to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
43764 -syntax is given in section
43765 \begin_inset space ~
43769 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43771 reference "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
43778 \begin_layout Chapter
43784 \begin_inset CommandInset label
43786 name "chap:The-Preferences-dialog"
43791 \begin_inset Index idx
43794 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43803 \begin_layout Standard
43804 The preferences dialog is called with the menu
43806 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
43810 It has the following submenus.
43813 \begin_layout Section
43817 \begin_layout Subsection
43821 \begin_layout Subsubsection
43822 User Interface File
43823 \begin_inset Index idx
43826 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43827 Customization ! of toolbars
43833 \begin_inset Index idx
43836 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43837 Customization ! of menus
43845 \begin_layout Standard
43846 The appearance of the menus and toolbars can be changed by choosing a user
43847 interface (ui) file.
43848 A ui-file is a text file where the toolbars and menus are listed.
43856 \begin_layout Description
43861 specifies the menu entries for the standard menus
43864 \begin_layout Description
43871 the menu entries in popup context menus
43874 \begin_layout Description
43879 specifies the toolbar buttons
43882 \begin_layout Standard
43883 To create your own menu and toolbar layout, start with a copy of these files
43884 and edit the entries.
43887 \begin_layout Standard
43888 The syntax of the .inc-files is straightforward: the
43900 entries must be finished with an explicit
43925 and in the case of the
43926 \begin_inset Quotes eld
43930 \begin_inset Quotes erd
43938 The syntax for the entries is:
43941 \begin_layout Standard
43942 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
43948 \begin_inset Quotes eld
43956 \begin_inset Quotes erd
43960 \begin_inset Quotes eld
43965 \begin_inset Quotes erd
43971 \begin_layout Standard
43973 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
43976 All the \SpecialChar LyX
43977 -functions are listed in the menu
43979 Help\SpecialChar menuseparator
43984 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43992 \begin_inset space ~
44000 \begin_layout Standard
44001 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
44007 \begin_layout Standard
44008 For example, assuming you use the menu
44010 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
44013 quite often and therefore want six available bookmarks, you can add the
44017 \begin_layout Standard
44018 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
44024 \begin_inset Quotes eld
44028 \begin_inset Quotes erd
44032 \begin_inset Quotes eld
44036 \begin_inset Quotes erd
44042 \begin_layout Standard
44044 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
44048 \begin_inset Quotes eld
44052 \begin_inset Quotes erd
44059 to have the sixth bookmark.
44062 \begin_layout Standard
44066 \begin_inset space ~
44071 allows you to change the appearance of \SpecialChar LyX
44072 's toolbar buttons.
44073 The currently available icon sets are compared in
44074 \begin_inset CommandInset href
44077 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/uploads/LyX/NewInLyX20/themes.png"
44084 \begin_layout Subsubsection
44088 \begin_layout Standard
44091 Enable tool tips in main work area
44093 enables tool tips showing the content of closed insets like index entries
44097 \begin_layout Subsubsection
44101 \begin_layout Standard
44106 is the number of last opened files that \SpecialChar LyX
44107 should display in the menu
44109 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
44111 \begin_inset space ~
44119 \begin_layout Subsection
44123 \begin_layout Subsubsection
44127 \begin_layout Standard
44130 Restore window layouts and geometries
44133 's main window will be opened with the size and layout that was used in
44134 the last \SpecialChar LyX
44138 \begin_layout Standard
44141 Restore cursor positions
44143 sets the cursor to the position in the file where it was at the end of
44147 \begin_layout Standard
44150 Load opened files from last session
44152 opens all files that were opened in the last \SpecialChar LyX
44156 \begin_layout Standard
44159 Clear all session information
44161 deletes all information from previous \SpecialChar LyX
44162 sessions (cursor positions, names
44163 of last opened documents, etc.).
44166 \begin_layout Subsubsection
44168 \begin_inset CommandInset label
44170 name "subsec:Backup documents"
44175 \begin_inset Index idx
44178 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44187 \begin_layout Standard
44190 Backup original documents when saving
44192 creates a backup copy of the file in the state when it was opened or when
44193 it was saved the last time.
44194 It is stored in the
44197 \begin_inset space ~
44203 \begin_inset space ~
44207 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44209 reference "sec:Paths"
44213 ) or in the same folder as your document if no
44216 \begin_inset space ~
44222 The backup file has the file extension
44223 \begin_inset Quotes eld
44231 \begin_inset Quotes erd
44237 \begin_layout Standard
44240 Backup documents, every
44242 , you can specify the time between backup saves.
44245 \begin_layout Standard
44248 Save documents compressed by default
44250 always saves files in a compressed format.
44253 \begin_layout Subsubsection
44254 Windows & work area
44257 \begin_layout Standard
44260 Open documents in tabs
44262 is not checked, every file will be opened in its own new instance of \SpecialChar LyX
44266 \begin_layout Standard
44271 is only active if a \SpecialChar LyX
44276 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44278 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
44282 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44284 reference "sec:Paths"
44288 for information about \SpecialChar LyX
44295 If it is checked, \SpecialChar LyX
44296 documents will be opened in the same running instance
44297 of \SpecialChar LyX
44299 Otherwise a new \SpecialChar LyX
44300 instance is created for each file.
44303 \begin_layout Standard
44306 Single close-tab button
44308 is checked, there will only be one close button (
44311 \begin_inset Graphics
44312 filename ../images/closetab.png
44319 ) at the right side of the tab bar to close tabs.
44320 Otherwise every document tab has its own close button.
44323 \begin_layout Standard
44324 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
44327 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44332 For this option you have to restart \SpecialChar LyX
44333 before the change takes effect.
44341 \begin_layout Standard
44346 you one can decide if a document is closed or hidden when its tab or view
44348 Hidden documents are accessible via the menu
44350 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
44354 Not to close documents can be useful if you open files parallel in several
44355 instances of \SpecialChar LyX
44356 and only want to close the view in once instance.
44359 \begin_layout Subsection
44361 \begin_inset Index idx
44364 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44371 \begin_inset CommandInset label
44373 name "subsec:Screen-Fonts"
44380 \begin_layout Standard
44381 These fonts are used to display your documents within \SpecialChar LyX
44385 \begin_layout Standard
44386 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
44389 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44394 This section only deals with the fonts
44398 the \SpecialChar LyX
44400 The fonts that appear in the output are independent of these fonts, and
44403 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
44404 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
44415 \begin_layout Standard
44416 By default, \SpecialChar LyX
44433 (depends on the system) as its
44436 \begin_inset space ~
44452 \begin_layout Standard
44453 You can change the font size with the
44460 \begin_layout Standard
44465 are calculated as letter height in units of points.
44467 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
44470 points have the size of 1
44471 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
44475 \begin_inset space ~
44479 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44481 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
44486 The default font sizes are the same as if a document font size of 10
44487 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
44491 The sizes are explained in detail in section
44492 \begin_inset space ~
44496 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44498 reference "subsec:Document-Font"
44505 \begin_layout Standard
44508 Use pixmap cache to speed up font rendering
44510 enabled, \SpecialChar LyX
44511 needs to redraw the screen less often.
44512 This results in better performance, especially on slow systems.
44513 On the other hand, the characters might look more fuzzy on screen.
44514 So whether you enable this or not depends on whether you prefer speed over
44516 Note that the Pixmap Cache is only available and useful under Mac
44517 \begin_inset space ~
44523 \begin_layout Subsection
44525 \begin_inset Index idx
44528 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44529 Color ! \SpecialChar LyX
44536 \begin_inset Index idx
44539 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44548 \begin_layout Standard
44549 Here you can change the screen colors used by \SpecialChar LyX
44550 by choosing an item in the
44551 list and selecting the
44558 \begin_layout Standard
44559 By checking the option
44563 the color scheme of your OS or window manager is used.
44566 cursor, selection, table line, text, URL
44567 \begin_inset space ~
44571 \begin_inset space ~
44576 are then not customizable and thus not listed.
44579 \begin_layout Subsection
44581 \begin_inset Index idx
44584 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44593 \begin_layout Standard
44594 Here you can specify if graphics are displayed inside \SpecialChar LyX
44598 \begin_layout Standard
44603 enables previewing snippets of your document.
44604 This feature is described in section
44605 \begin_inset space ~
44609 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44611 reference "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
44618 \begin_layout Standard
44619 Checking the option
44622 \begin_inset space ~
44626 \begin_inset space ~
44630 \begin_inset space ~
44635 displays a pilcrow (¶) at the end of every paragraph.
44638 \begin_layout Section
44640 \begin_inset Index idx
44643 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44652 \begin_layout Subsection
44656 \begin_layout Subsubsection
44660 \begin_layout Standard
44663 Cursor follows scrollbar
44665 sets the cursor to the top of the currently displayed document part when
44669 \begin_layout Standard
44670 You can adjust the width of the cursor.
44671 If you set the value to zero, the thickness of the cursor scales relative
44672 to the zoom value you choose for the screen fonts.
44675 \begin_layout Standard
44678 Scroll below end of document
44680 is self-explanatory.
44683 \begin_layout Standard
44684 In \SpecialChar LyX
44685 one can jump from word to word by pressing
44692 Use Mac-style for cursor moving between words
44694 the cursor jumps from the end of a word to the end of the next word.
44695 Normally it jumps from the beginning to the beginning.
44698 \begin_layout Standard
44701 Sort environments alphabetically
44703 sorts the entries in the pull-down box for the paragraph environments.
44706 \begin_layout Standard
44709 Group environments by their category
44711 groups the entries in the pull-down box for the paragraph environments.
44714 \begin_layout Standard
44719 options determine the editing style for math macros, see the section
44730 \begin_layout Subsubsection
44734 \begin_layout Standard
44735 Here you can specify what is hidden in the fullscreen mode.
44740 you can specify the width of the text in fullscreen mode.
44741 This way you can display the text smaller than the screen; the text then
44745 \begin_layout Subsection
44747 \begin_inset Index idx
44750 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44757 \begin_inset Index idx
44760 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44761 Settings ! Shortcuts
44769 \begin_layout Standard
44774 specifies the file to be used to bind a \SpecialChar LyX
44775 -function to a key.
44776 Several binding files are available, among them:
44779 \begin_layout Description
44780 cua.bind a typical set of PC keyboard shortcuts
44783 \begin_layout Description
44784 (x)emacs.bind a set of bindings similar to those used in the editor programs
44796 \begin_layout Description
44797 mac.bind a set of bindings for
44800 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
44808 \begin_layout Standard
44809 There are also binding files designed for special document classes, like
44814 , and binding files for special languages.
44815 The names of language binding files begin with a language code, e.
44816 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
44820 \begin_inset space \space{}
44824 \begin_inset Quotes eld
44828 \begin_inset Quotes erd
44832 If you use \SpecialChar LyX
44833 in a certain language, \SpecialChar LyX
44834 will try to use the appropriate binding
44838 \begin_layout Standard
44839 Some binding files, like
44843 , only have a limited scope.
44844 When looking at the end of the file
44848 , you can see that they are included to keep the overview in the bind-file.
44851 \begin_layout Standard
44855 \begin_inset space ~
44859 \begin_inset space ~
44864 allows you to search for the shortcut provided for a particular function
44865 in the selected key binding file.
44868 \begin_layout Subsubsection
44870 \begin_inset CommandInset label
44872 name "subsec:Editing-Shortcuts"
44877 \begin_inset Index idx
44880 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44881 Key Bindings ! Editing
44889 \begin_layout Standard
44890 To add new or modify existing keybindings to your own taste you can use
44891 the table in the dialog that lists all \SpecialChar LyX
44892 -functions and the bound shortcuts.
44893 To find functions easily, they are grouped by categories and the dialog
44896 Show key-bindings containing
44899 In this field you can insert a keyword for a function you want to edit.
44900 Insert there for example as keyword
44901 \begin_inset Quotes eld
44905 \begin_inset Quotes erd
44908 and you get the four different existing shortcuts for the three different
44909 functions that contain
44910 \begin_inset Quotes eld
44914 \begin_inset Quotes erd
44918 As you can see, one function can have more than one shortcut.
44919 All \SpecialChar LyX
44920 -functions are also listed in the file
44925 that you will find in the
44932 \begin_layout Standard
44933 For example, to add the shortcut
44941 , select the function and press the
44946 A dialog pops up where you can add the shortcut by using it.
44947 So press Alt+Q to define the shortcut.
44950 \begin_layout Standard
44951 Modifying an existing shortcut is done the same way.
44952 You can also bind multiple functions to one shortcut by starting the \SpecialChar LyX
44954 definition with “command alternatives” and following it with the different
44955 function names as a semicolon separated list.
44957 will then use the first function that is enabled in the current document
44962 \begin_layout Standard
44963 If you don't like a particular shortcut, you can remove it.
44966 \begin_layout Standard
44967 Alternatively you can also edit shortcuts by modifying binding files with
44969 The syntax of the entries is:
44972 \begin_layout Standard
44978 \begin_inset Quotes eld
44982 \begin_inset Quotes erd
44986 \begin_inset Quotes eld
44991 \begin_inset Quotes erd
44997 \begin_layout Subsection
44999 \begin_inset CommandInset label
45001 name "subsec:Keyboard-Map"
45006 \begin_inset Index idx
45009 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45016 \begin_inset Index idx
45019 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45020 Settings ! Keyboard Map
45028 \begin_layout Standard
45029 Normally keyboard settings are made in a menu of your operating system.
45030 For the case thatWhere this is not possible, \SpecialChar LyX
45031 provides keyboard maps.
45032 If, for example, you have a Czech keyboard but want to use it as if it
45033 is a Romanian one, you can enable
45036 \begin_inset space ~
45040 \begin_inset space ~
45045 and select the keyboard map file named
45052 \begin_layout Standard
45061 keyboard map and, if you use the
45065 bindings, you can select the first and second with
45068 arg "keymap-primary"
45074 arg "keymap-secondary"
45077 respectively or toggle between them with
45080 arg "keymap-toggle"
45086 \begin_layout Standard
45087 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
45090 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45095 Keyboard maps can only provide a makeshift solution and don't work on all
45104 \begin_layout Standard
45105 You can also specify the mouse
45107 Wheel scrolling speed
45110 The standard value is 1.0; higher values speed up the scrolling, lower ones
45114 \begin_layout Standard
45122 \begin_inset space ~
45126 \begin_inset space ~
45131 you can select a key for zooming.
45132 When this key is pressed and the mouse wheel is rotated, the text is zoomed.
45135 \begin_layout Subsection
45139 \begin_layout Standard
45140 Input completion is described in section
45141 \begin_inset space ~
45145 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45147 reference "sec:Input-Completion"
45154 \begin_layout Section
45156 \begin_inset CommandInset label
45163 \begin_inset Index idx
45166 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45173 \begin_inset Index idx
45176 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45185 \begin_layout Standard
45186 The paths to the various resources used by \SpecialChar LyX
45187 are normally determined during
45189 But there may be reasons why you might want to modify them.
45192 \begin_layout Description
45194 \begin_inset space ~
45197 directory This is \SpecialChar LyX
45198 's working directory.
45199 It is the default when you
45210 \begin_inset space ~
45218 \begin_layout Description
45220 \begin_inset space ~
45223 templates This directory will be opened when you use the menu
45225 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
45227 \begin_inset space ~
45231 \begin_inset space ~
45239 \begin_layout Description
45241 \begin_inset space ~
45244 files This directory will be opened when you use the button
45250 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
45254 \begin_inset Newline newline
45258 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
45261 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45270 button does not exist when using \SpecialChar LyX
45271 on Mac OS and Windows systems.
45279 \begin_layout Description
45281 \begin_inset space ~
45285 \begin_inset Index idx
45288 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45294 Backup copies will be saved to this directory.
45295 If no directory is given but backups are enabled as described in section
45296 \begin_inset space ~
45300 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45302 reference "subsec:Backup documents"
45310 will be used to save the backups.
45311 \begin_inset Newline newline
45314 Backup files have the ending
45315 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45319 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45325 \begin_layout Description
45330 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45338 \begin_inset space ~
45341 pipe Here you can enter the name of a so-called UNIX-pipe.
45342 This pipe is used to send data from external programs to \SpecialChar LyX
45344 \begin_inset Newline newline
45351 You add a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
45357 You can edit this file with the program
45366 you have to use the same Unix-Pipe for \SpecialChar LyX
45367 in its preferences under
45370 \begin_inset space ~
45376 If you want to get one entry of the database as citation, select it in
45381 and click on the \SpecialChar LyX
45383 The entry will now be inserted as a citation at the current cursor position
45384 in your \SpecialChar LyX
45390 and \SpecialChar LyX
45391 need to be running the same time.
45392 \begin_inset Newline newline
45395 The pipe is also used for the
45400 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45404 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45406 reference "subsec:Backup documents"
45411 \begin_inset Newline newline
45414 To use the \SpecialChar LyX
45415 Server-Pipe on Windows, you must use this pipe name:
45416 \begin_inset Newline newline
45432 \begin_layout Description
45434 \begin_inset space ~
45437 directory Temporary files will be saved in this directory.
45440 \begin_layout Description
45442 \begin_inset space ~
45445 dictionary Directory where the thesaurus dictionaries are located.
45446 You only need to specify it if the thesaurus does not work or if you want
45447 to use custom/alternative dictionaries.
45450 \begin_layout Description
45452 \begin_inset space ~
45455 dictionary Directory where the dictionaries of the spell checker program
45461 You only need to specify it if you are using
45465 and spell checking does not work or if you want to use custom/alternative
45467 For \SpecialChar LyX
45472 is the only available spell checker and should work without specifying
45476 \begin_layout Description
45478 \begin_inset space ~
45481 prefix This field contains a list of paths to external programs.
45482 When \SpecialChar LyX
45483 needs to use an external program, it looks in this list to see where
45484 to find it on the system.
45485 The path list is automatically set up on Windows and Mac systems when \SpecialChar LyX
45487 is configured; so you normally don't have to modify it.
45489 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45493 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45496 Linux systems, the path list will need to be set only if there are external
45497 programs you wish to use that are not in your normal system path ($PATH).
45500 \begin_layout Description
45502 \begin_inset space ~
45505 prefix The TEXINPUTS environment variable allows you to use external files
45506 which are included in a \SpecialChar LyX
45507 document via commands in \SpecialChar TeX
45508 code or in the document
45510 This prefix includes by default the document directory (represented by
45512 The prefix can contain any list of paths separated by the default separator
45513 of the OS (':' on UNIX like systems and ';' on Windows).
45514 If files are included, the paths listed in the TEXINPUTS prefix will be
45515 scanned for the input files.
45516 Note that any non-absolute path listed in the TEXINPUTS prefix is considered
45517 to be relative to the directory of your \SpecialChar LyX
45519 It is recommended that you always include ‘.' as one of the paths; otherwise
45520 compilation may fail for some documents.
45523 \begin_layout Section
45527 \begin_layout Standard
45528 Here you can insert your
45537 These will be used when you have enabled change tracking, as described
45539 \begin_inset space ~
45543 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45545 reference "sec:Change-Tracking"
45549 , to mark changes you make as yours.
45552 \begin_layout Section
45554 \begin_inset Index idx
45557 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45558 Language ! Settings
45564 \begin_inset Index idx
45567 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45568 Settings ! Language
45576 \begin_layout Subsection
45578 \begin_inset CommandInset label
45580 name "subsec:Prefs-Language"
45587 \begin_layout Description
45589 \begin_inset space ~
45593 \begin_inset space ~
45596 language Here you can select the language for \SpecialChar LyX
45598 You can find its actual translation status here:
45599 \begin_inset CommandInset href
45601 target "http://www.lyx.org/I18n"
45608 \begin_layout Description
45610 \begin_inset space ~
45613 package determines which \SpecialChar LaTeX
45614 package should be loaded to handle language issues.
45615 Language issues that are handled by this package include proper hyphenation
45616 as well as localization of dates and text strings such as
45617 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45621 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45625 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45629 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45633 The most widespread language package is
45638 \begin_inset Index idx
45641 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45648 ; it is the default language package in classic \SpecialChar LaTeX
45650 More recent typesetting engines such as Xe\SpecialChar TeX
45651 and Lua\SpecialChar TeX
45652 come with the alternative
45658 \begin_inset Index idx
45661 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45663 -packages ! polyglossia
45668 that is more suited to the multi-script support of these engines.
45669 Furthermore, there are also specific language packages for languages not
45675 The available selections are described in section
45676 \begin_inset space ~
45680 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45682 reference "sec:Language-encodings"
45689 \begin_layout Description
45691 \begin_inset space ~
45694 start If a special \SpecialChar LaTeX
45695 -package is needed to write in a certain document language,
45696 you can here specify the command to start the package.
45697 An example is the start command
45703 that is needed to write Arabic using the package
45705 Arab\SpecialChar TeX
45709 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
45724 selectlanguage{$$lang}
45729 \begin_layout Description
45731 \begin_inset space ~
45739 Some packages, like the default, don't have an end command since the start
45740 command toggles the package on and off.
45743 \begin_layout Description
45745 \begin_inset space ~
45749 \begin_inset space ~
45752 separator Defines the default decimal point for use in tables (decimal point
45756 \begin_layout Description
45758 \begin_inset space ~
45762 \begin_inset space ~
45765 unit Defines the unit that is used as default for lengths in \SpecialChar LyX
45769 \begin_layout Description
45771 \begin_inset space ~
45775 \begin_inset space ~
45778 globally When this option is set, the languages used in the document will
45779 be added as options to the document class options, so that they can be
45780 used by all \SpecialChar LaTeX
45782 Otherwise they will only be used as options for the
45789 \begin_layout Description
45791 \begin_inset space ~
45794 begin When this option is set, documents start with the chosen document
45796 When this option is not set, the
45799 \begin_inset space ~
45804 is explicitly set to the beginning of the document in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
45806 This assures that the correct language is used when you use another
45809 \begin_inset space ~
45817 \begin_layout Description
45819 \begin_inset space ~
45825 \begin_inset space ~
45831 When it is not set, the
45834 \begin_inset space ~
45839 is set to the end of the document.
45842 \begin_layout Description
45844 \begin_inset space ~
45848 \begin_inset space ~
45851 languages Text marked formatted in a language different from the document
45852 language will be underlined in blue.
45855 \begin_layout Description
45857 \begin_inset space ~
45861 \begin_inset space ~
45864 support Enables the use of languages, written from right to left (RTL),
45865 like Arabic, Hebrew or Farsi.
45868 \begin_layout Description
45870 \begin_inset space ~
45873 movement When writing RTL, you can define if the left and right arrow keys
45874 move the cursor visually to the left or right, respectively, or logically.
45875 Logical means that the cursor is moved to the left when pressing the right
45876 arrow key and the cursor is inside text in an RTL language.
45879 \begin_layout Subsection
45883 \begin_layout Standard
45884 The spellchecker settings are explained in section
45885 \begin_inset space ~
45889 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45891 reference "sec:Spellchecking"
45898 \begin_layout Section
45902 \begin_layout Subsection
45906 \begin_layout Description
45908 \begin_inset space ~
45912 \begin_inset space ~
45915 length sets the maximum number of characters printed in one line when using
45918 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
45919 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
45921 \begin_inset space ~
45927 Setting the line length to 0 means all text is printed in one endless line.
45930 \begin_layout Description
45932 \begin_inset space ~
45936 \begin_inset Index idx
45939 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45946 \begin_inset Index idx
45949 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45950 Settings ! Date format
45955 The date format can be one or a mixture of the formats listed here:
45956 \begin_inset Newline newline
45960 \begin_inset Flex URL
45963 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45965 http://unixhelp.ed.ac.uk/CGI/man-cgi?date
45971 \begin_inset Newline newline
45974 For example the format
45975 \begin_inset Newline newline
45979 \begin_inset Newline newline
45982 prints the date as day/month/year.
45985 \begin_layout Description
45987 \begin_inset space ~
45991 \begin_inset space ~
45994 export Setting what \SpecialChar LyX
45995 is allowed to overwrite on export.
45998 \begin_layout Description
46000 \begin_inset space ~
46003 search Commands that will be used for the menu
46005 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
46007 \begin_inset space ~
46013 For a detailed description see section
46015 Reverse DVI/PDF search
46020 \begin_inset space ~
46028 \begin_layout Subsection
46030 \begin_inset CommandInset label
46032 name "subsec:Printer"
46037 \begin_inset Index idx
46040 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46047 \begin_inset Index idx
46050 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46059 \begin_layout Description
46061 \begin_inset space ~
46064 printer Here you can specify the name of your
46069 The name will be used when the
46074 \begin_inset Newline newline
46078 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
46081 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46086 You can leave this field empty on Windows systems because it has no effect.
46094 \begin_layout Description
46096 \begin_inset space ~
46099 command is the command \SpecialChar LyX
46101 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
46105 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
46117 \begin_layout Description
46119 \begin_inset space ~
46123 \begin_inset space ~
46126 Options Here you can specify printer options.
46127 A list of printer options with explanations can be found in the documentation
46128 of the program that provides the
46135 \begin_layout Description
46137 \begin_inset space ~
46141 \begin_inset space ~
46145 \begin_inset space ~
46148 printer This option works only for the
46153 \begin_inset Quotes eld
46161 \begin_inset Quotes erd
46165 It activates a configuration file for dvips.
46166 This is an option only for dvips experts.
46169 \begin_layout Subsection
46174 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46182 \begin_inset CommandInset label
46184 name "subsec:LaTeX-settings"
46189 \begin_inset Index idx
46192 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46193 Settings ! \SpecialChar LaTeX
46202 \begin_layout Description
46204 \begin_inset space ~
46211 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46219 \begin_inset space ~
46223 \begin_inset space ~
46226 encoding This is the default encoding of the document font.
46231 is the default and covers western languages and symbols.
46252 are used for Cyrillic.
46253 Combinations of the encodings are possible, like
46254 \begin_inset Quotes eld
46262 \begin_inset Quotes erd
46266 The font encoding is normally automatically loaded by the language packages
46268 sets up in the background.
46269 So there is no need to change the default encoding.
46272 \begin_layout Description
46274 \begin_inset space ~
46278 \begin_inset space ~
46281 size This is the paper size that is used for new documents.
46286 value depends on your \SpecialChar LaTeX
46290 \begin_layout Description
46292 \begin_inset space ~
46296 \begin_inset space ~
46300 \begin_inset space ~
46304 \begin_inset space ~
46307 options They only have an effect when the program
46311 is used as DVI-viewer, read its manual to find out more.
46314 \begin_layout Standard
46315 Here you can also specify options and commands with parameters for processors.
46316 But before you change something, it is strongly recommended to read the
46317 manuals of the applications.
46320 \begin_layout Description
46322 \begin_inset space ~
46325 generation Settings for the generation of the bibliography, see section
46326 \begin_inset space ~
46330 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46332 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
46339 \begin_layout Description
46341 \begin_inset space ~
46344 generation Settings for the generation of the index, see section
46345 \begin_inset space ~
46349 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46351 reference "subsec:Index-Program"
46358 \begin_layout Description
46360 \begin_inset space ~
46363 command Command for the program that generates the nomenclature, see section
46364 \begin_inset space ~
46368 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46370 reference "subsec:Nomenclature-Program"
46377 \begin_layout Description
46382 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46390 \begin_inset space ~
46393 command Command for the program
46395 Check\SpecialChar TeX
46398 that is described in the section
46400 Checking \SpecialChar TeX
46405 Additional Features
46410 \begin_layout Standard
46411 There are additionally the following options:
46414 \begin_layout Description
46416 \begin_inset space ~
46420 \begin_inset space ~
46424 \begin_inset space ~
46428 \begin_inset space ~
46433 \begin_inset space ~
46436 files Uses paths in the notation of Windows, that means that
46437 \begin_inset Quotes eld
46443 \begin_inset Quotes erd
46447 \begin_inset Quotes eld
46451 \begin_inset Quotes erd
46454 to separate folders.
46455 This option is enabled by default when you use \SpecialChar LyX
46457 \begin_inset Index idx
46460 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46467 \begin_inset Index idx
46470 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46479 \begin_layout Description
46481 \begin_inset space ~
46485 \begin_inset space ~
46489 \begin_inset space ~
46493 \begin_inset space ~
46497 \begin_inset space ~
46501 \begin_inset space ~
46504 changes Removes all manually set
46510 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
46511 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
46513 \begin_inset space ~
46518 dialog when changing the document class.
46521 \begin_layout Section
46523 \begin_inset space ~
46527 \begin_inset Index idx
46530 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46539 \begin_layout Subsection
46541 \begin_inset CommandInset label
46543 name "subsec:Converters"
46548 \begin_inset Index idx
46551 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46560 \begin_layout Standard
46561 Here you find the list of defined converter commands to convert material
46562 from one format to another.
46563 You can modify converters or create new ones.
46564 To modify a converter, select it, change the entry of the
46571 \begin_inset space ~
46576 field and press the
46581 To create a new converter, select an existing one, select a different format
46585 \begin_inset space ~
46590 drop-down list, modify the
46594 field and press the
46601 \begin_layout Standard
46604 Converter File Cache
46610 , conversions will be cached as long as specified in the field
46612 Maximum Age (in days
46615 This means that images don't need to be converted again when you reopen
46616 a document; the converted images from the cache will be used instead.
46619 \begin_layout Standard
46620 More about converters, like the flags that can be used in the converter
46621 definition, is described in the section
46632 \begin_layout Subsection
46634 \begin_inset CommandInset label
46636 name "sec:File-Formats"
46641 \begin_inset Index idx
46644 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46651 \begin_inset Index idx
46654 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46663 \begin_layout Standard
46664 Here you find the list of defined file formats that \SpecialChar LyX
46674 programs that should be used for certain formats.
46677 \begin_layout Standard
46678 You can also define the
46680 Default output format
46682 that is used when you use
46684 View, Update, View Master Document
46688 Update Master Document
46694 menu or the toolbar.
46697 \begin_layout Standard
46698 More about formats and their options is described in the section
46709 \begin_layout Standard
46710 Since all conversions from one format to another take place in \SpecialChar LyX
46712 directory, it is sometimes necessary to modify a file before copying it
46713 to the temporary directory so that the conversion may be performed.
46714 This is done by specifying a
46719 More about this is described in the section
46730 \begin_layout Chapter
46731 Units available in \SpecialChar LyX
46733 \begin_inset Index idx
46736 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46743 \begin_inset CommandInset label
46745 name "chap:Units-available-in"
46752 \begin_layout Standard
46754 \begin_inset space ~
46758 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46760 reference "tab:Units"
46764 explains all the units available in \SpecialChar LyX
46765 and used in this documentation.
46768 \begin_layout Standard
46769 \begin_inset Float table
46775 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46776 \begin_inset Caption Standard
46778 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46779 \begin_inset CommandInset label
46793 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46794 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
46800 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46802 \begin_inset Tabular
46803 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="20" columns="2">
46804 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
46805 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
46806 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
46808 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46811 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46817 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
46820 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46828 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46831 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46837 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
46840 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46848 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46851 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46857 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
46860 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46868 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46871 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46877 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
46880 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46888 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46891 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46897 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
46900 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46902 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
46906 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
46916 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46919 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46925 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
46928 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46930 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
46934 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
46944 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46947 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46953 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
46956 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46957 scaled point (65536
46958 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
46962 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
46972 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46975 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46981 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
46984 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46986 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
46990 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
47000 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
47003 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47009 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
47012 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47014 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
47018 \begin_inset Formula $\approx$
47022 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
47032 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
47035 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47041 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
47044 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47046 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
47050 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
47060 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
47063 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47069 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
47072 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47073 % of original image width
47080 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
47083 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47089 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
47092 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47100 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
47103 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47109 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
47112 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47120 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
47123 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47129 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
47132 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47140 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
47143 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47149 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
47152 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47160 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
47163 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47169 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
47172 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47180 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
47183 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47189 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
47192 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47200 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
47203 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47209 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
47212 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47224 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
47227 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47233 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
47236 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47248 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
47251 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47257 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
47260 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47262 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
47266 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
47287 \begin_layout Chapter
47289 \begin_inset CommandInset label
47291 name "chap:Credits"
47298 \begin_layout Standard
47299 The documentation is a collaborative effort between many different people
47300 (and we would encourage people to contribute!).
47303 \begin_layout Itemize
47306 Alejandro Aguilar Sierra
47309 \begin_layout Itemize
47315 \begin_layout Itemize
47321 \begin_layout Itemize
47327 \begin_layout Itemize
47333 \begin_layout Itemize
47339 \begin_layout Itemize
47345 \begin_layout Itemize
47351 \begin_layout Itemize
47354 Lars Gullik Bjønnes
47357 \begin_layout Itemize
47363 \begin_layout Itemize
47369 \begin_layout Itemize
47375 \begin_layout Itemize
47381 \begin_layout Itemize
47387 \begin_layout Itemize
47393 \begin_layout Itemize
47399 \begin_layout Itemize
47405 \begin_layout Itemize
47406 The \SpecialChar LyX
47408 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
47417 \begin_layout Standard
47418 \begin_inset Newpage newpage
47421 The bibliography on the following page was created with the
47428 \begin_layout Bibliography
47429 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47430 LatexCommand bibitem
47436 The \SpecialChar LyX
47438 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47441 target "http://www.lyx.org/Credits"
47446 \begin_inset Newline newline
47450 \begin_inset Flex URL
47453 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47455 http://www.lyx.org/Credits
47463 \begin_layout Bibliography
47464 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47465 LatexCommand bibitem
47466 key "latexcompanion"
47470 Frank Mittelbach and Michel Goossens:
47472 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
47473 Companion Second Edition.
47476 Addison-Wesley, 2004
47479 \begin_layout Bibliography
47480 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47481 LatexCommand bibitem
47486 Helmut Kopka and Patrick W.
47489 A Guide to \SpecialChar LaTeX
47493 Addison-Wesley, 2003
47496 \begin_layout Bibliography
47497 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47498 LatexCommand bibitem
47506 : A Document Preparation System.
47509 Addison-Wesley, second edition, 1994
47512 \begin_layout Bibliography
47513 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47514 LatexCommand bibitem
47523 The \SpecialChar TeX
47527 Addison-Wesley, 1984
47530 \begin_layout Bibliography
47531 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47532 LatexCommand bibitem
47537 The \SpecialChar TeX
47539 \begin_inset Newline newline
47543 \begin_inset Flex URL
47546 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47548 http://mirrors.ctan.org/help/Catalogue/bytopic.html
47556 \begin_layout Bibliography
47557 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47558 LatexCommand bibitem
47563 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
47565 \begin_inset Newline newline
47569 \begin_inset Flex URL
47572 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47574 http://www.tex.ac.uk/cgi-bin/texfaq2html
47582 \begin_layout Bibliography
47583 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47584 LatexCommand bibitem
47590 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47592 name "Documentation"
47593 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/biblio/bibtex/contrib/doc/btxdoc.pdf"
47599 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
47603 \begin_inset Newline newline
47607 \begin_inset Flex URL
47610 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47612 http://mirrors.ctan.org/biblio/bibtex/contrib/doc/btxdoc.pdf
47620 \begin_layout Bibliography
47621 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47622 LatexCommand bibitem
47628 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47630 name "Documentation"
47631 target "http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/info/bibtex/tamethebeast/ttb_en.pdf"
47635 how to use the program
47637 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
47641 \begin_inset Newline newline
47645 \begin_inset Flex URL
47648 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47650 http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/info/bibtex/tamethebeast/ttb_en.pdf
47658 \begin_layout Bibliography
47659 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47660 LatexCommand bibitem
47666 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47668 name "Documentation"
47669 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/indexing/makeindex/doc/makeindex.pdf"
47678 \begin_inset Newline newline
47682 \begin_inset Flex URL
47685 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47687 http://mirrors.ctan.org/indexing/makeindex/doc/makeindex.pdf
47695 \begin_layout Bibliography
47696 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47697 LatexCommand bibitem
47703 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47705 name "Documentation"
47706 target "http://www.xindy.org/documentation.html"
47715 \begin_inset Newline newline
47719 \begin_inset Flex URL
47722 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47724 http://www.xindy.org/documentation.html
47732 \begin_layout Bibliography
47733 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47734 LatexCommand bibitem
47740 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47742 name "Documentation"
47743 target "http://www.ams.org/publications/authors/tex/amslatex"
47747 of the AMS \SpecialChar LaTeX
47749 \begin_inset Newline newline
47753 \begin_inset Flex URL
47756 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47758 http://www.ams.org/publications/authors/tex/amslatex
47766 \begin_layout Bibliography
47767 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47768 LatexCommand bibitem
47774 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47776 name "Documentation"
47777 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/caption/caption-eng.pdf"
47781 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
47787 \begin_inset Index idx
47790 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47792 -packages ! caption
47798 \begin_inset Newline newline
47802 \begin_inset Flex URL
47805 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47807 http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/caption/caption-eng.pdf
47815 \begin_layout Bibliography
47816 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47817 LatexCommand bibitem
47823 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47825 name "Documentation"
47826 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/enumitem/enumitem.pdf"
47830 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
47836 \begin_inset Index idx
47839 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47841 -packages ! enumitem
47847 \begin_inset Newline newline
47851 \begin_inset Flex URL
47854 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47856 http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/enumitem/enumitem.pdf
47864 \begin_layout Bibliography
47865 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47866 LatexCommand bibitem
47872 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47874 name "Documentation"
47875 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/fancyhdr/fancyhdr.pdf"
47879 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
47885 \begin_inset Index idx
47888 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47890 -packages ! fancyhdr
47896 \begin_inset Newline newline
47900 \begin_inset Flex URL
47903 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47905 http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/fancyhdr/fancyhdr.pdf
47913 \begin_layout Bibliography
47914 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47915 LatexCommand bibitem
47921 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47923 name "Documentation"
47924 target "http://www.ctan.org/pkg/hyperref"
47928 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
47934 \begin_inset Index idx
47937 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47939 -packages ! hyperref
47945 \begin_inset Newline newline
47949 \begin_inset Flex URL
47952 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47954 http://www.ctan.org/pkg/hyperref
47962 \begin_layout Bibliography
47963 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47964 LatexCommand bibitem
47970 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47972 name "Documentation"
47973 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/nomencl/nomencl.pdf"
47977 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
47983 \begin_inset Index idx
47986 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47988 -packages ! nomencl
47994 \begin_inset Newline newline
47998 \begin_inset Flex URL
48001 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48003 http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/nomencl/nomencl.pdf
48011 \begin_layout Bibliography
48012 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
48013 LatexCommand bibitem
48019 \begin_inset CommandInset href
48021 name "Documentation"
48022 target "http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/prettyref/prettyref.pdf"
48026 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
48032 \begin_inset Index idx
48035 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48037 -packages ! prettyref
48043 \begin_inset Newline newline
48047 \begin_inset Flex URL
48050 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48052 http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/prettyref/prettyref.pdf
48060 \begin_layout Bibliography
48061 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
48062 LatexCommand bibitem
48068 \begin_inset CommandInset href
48070 name "Documentation"
48071 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/refstyle/refstyle.pdf"
48075 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
48081 \begin_inset Index idx
48084 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48086 -packages ! refstyle
48092 \begin_inset Newline newline
48096 \begin_inset Flex URL
48099 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48101 http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/refstyle/refstyle.pdf
48109 \begin_layout Bibliography
48110 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
48111 LatexCommand bibitem
48117 \begin_inset CommandInset href
48120 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Arabic"
48124 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
48126 \begin_inset Newline newline
48130 \begin_inset Flex URL
48133 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48135 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Arabic
48143 \begin_layout Bibliography
48144 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
48145 LatexCommand bibitem
48151 \begin_inset CommandInset href
48154 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Armenian"
48158 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
48160 \begin_inset Newline newline
48164 \begin_inset Flex URL
48167 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48169 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Armenian
48177 \begin_layout Bibliography
48178 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
48179 LatexCommand bibitem
48185 \begin_inset CommandInset href
48188 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Cyrillic"
48192 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
48193 for Cyrillic languages:
48194 \begin_inset Newline newline
48198 \begin_inset Flex URL
48201 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48203 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Cyrillic
48211 \begin_layout Bibliography
48212 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
48213 LatexCommand bibitem
48219 \begin_inset CommandInset href
48222 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Farsi"
48226 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
48228 \begin_inset Newline newline
48232 \begin_inset Flex URL
48235 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48237 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Farsi
48245 \begin_layout Bibliography
48246 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
48247 LatexCommand bibitem
48253 \begin_inset CommandInset href
48256 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Hebrew"
48260 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
48262 \begin_inset Newline newline
48266 \begin_inset Flex URL
48269 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48271 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Hebrew
48279 \begin_layout Bibliography
48280 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
48281 LatexCommand bibitem
48287 \begin_inset CommandInset href
48290 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Japanese"
48294 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
48296 \begin_inset Newline newline
48300 \begin_inset Flex URL
48303 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48305 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Japanese
48313 \begin_layout Bibliography
48314 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
48315 LatexCommand bibitem
48321 \begin_inset CommandInset href
48324 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Latvian"
48328 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
48330 \begin_inset Newline newline
48334 \begin_inset Flex URL
48337 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48339 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Latvian
48347 \begin_layout Bibliography
48348 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
48349 LatexCommand bibitem
48355 \begin_inset CommandInset href
48358 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Lithuanian"
48362 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
48364 \begin_inset Newline newline
48368 \begin_inset Flex URL
48371 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48373 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Lithuanian
48381 \begin_layout Bibliography
48382 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
48383 LatexCommand bibitem
48389 \begin_inset CommandInset href
48392 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Mongolian"
48396 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
48398 \begin_inset Newline newline
48402 \begin_inset Flex URL
48405 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48407 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Mongolian
48415 \begin_layout Bibliography
48416 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
48417 LatexCommand bibitem
48423 \begin_inset CommandInset href
48426 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Vietnamese"
48430 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
48432 \begin_inset Newline newline
48436 \begin_inset Flex URL
48439 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48441 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Vietnamese
48449 \begin_layout Bibliography
48450 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
48451 LatexCommand bibitem
48457 \begin_inset CommandInset href
48460 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/LyX/NewInLyX20"
48464 about new features in
48470 \begin_inset Newline newline
48474 \begin_inset Flex URL
48477 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48479 http://wiki.lyx.org/LyX/NewInLyX20
48487 \begin_layout Standard
48488 \begin_inset Newpage newpage
48495 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48506 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48522 \begin_inset Note Note
48525 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48532 is the name of the bibliography in the current document language.
48533 It is redefined here with the number 2 at the end to state that the following
48534 bibliography is the second one:
48542 \begin_layout Standard
48543 \begin_inset CommandInset bibtex
48544 LatexCommand bibtex
48545 bibfiles "biblio/LyXDocs"
48546 options "biblio/alphadin"
48553 \begin_layout Standard
48554 The above bibliography is created from a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
48558 \begin_layout Standard
48559 \begin_inset CommandInset nomencl_print
48560 LatexCommand printnomenclature
48566 \begin_inset CommandInset index_print
48567 LatexCommand printindex